Tutorial 3d Home Architect - Landscape Design Deluxe V6.0 Architectural Design

3d home design tutorial. architectural design
View more...
   EMBED

Share

Preview only show first 6 pages with water mark for full document please download

Transcript

Coffee Cooking Tips Recipes & Food and Drink Wine & Spirits Elder Care Babies & Toddler Pregnancy Acne Aerobics & Cardio Alternative Medicine Beauty Tips Depression Diabetes Exercise & Fitness Hair Loss Medicine Meditation Muscle Building & Bodybuilding Nutrition Nutritional Supplements Weight Loss Yoga Martial Arts Finding Happiness Inspirational Breast Cancer Mesothelioma & Cancer Fitness Equipment Nutritional Supplements Weight Loss Affiliate Revenue Blogging, RSS & Feeds Domain Name E-Book E-commerce Email Marketing Ezine Marketing Ezine Publishing Forums & Boards Internet Marketing Online Auction Search Engine Optimization Spam Blocking Streaming Audio & Online Music Traffic Building Video Streaming Web Design Web Development Web Hosting Web Site Promotion Broadband Internet VOIP Computer Hardware Data Recovery & Backup Internet Security Software Advertising Branding Business Management Business Ethics Careers, Jobs & Employment Customer Service Marketing Networking Network Marketing Pay-Per-Click Advertising Presentation Public Relations Sales Sales Management Sales Telemarketing Sales Training Small Business Strategic Planning Entrepreneur Negotiation Tips Team Building Top Quick Tips Book Marketing Leadership Positive Attitude Tips Goal Setting Innovation Success Time Management Public Speaking Get Organized - Organization Credit Currency Trading Debt Consolidation Debt Relief Loan Insurance Investing Mortgage Refinance Personal Finance Real Estate Taxes Stocks & Mutual Fund Structured Settlements Leases & Leasing Wealth Building Home Security Mobile & Cell Phone Video Conferencing Satellite TV Dating Relationships Game Casino & Gambling Humor & Entertainment Music & MP3 Photography Golf Attraction Motorcycle Fashion & Style Crafts & Hobbies Home Improvement Interior Design & Decorating Landscaping & Gardening Pets Marriage & Wedding Holiday Fishing Aviation & Flying Cruising & Sailing Outdoors Vacation Rental Book Reviews College & University Psychology Science Articles Religion Personal Technology Humanities Language Philosophy Poetry Book Reviews Medicine Coaching Creativity Dealing with Grief & Loss Motivation Spirituality Stress Management Article Writing Writing Political Copywriting Parenting Divorce USER’S GUIDE www.broderbund.com 383205-MAN © 2002-2004 Riverdeep Interactive Learning Limited, and its licensors. © Copyright 1998-2004, Cadsoft Corporation. Helios32 Radiosity Renderer © 1994-2002 Heart Consultants Ltd. Portions of this product were created using LEADTOOLS © 1991-1997 LEAD Technologies, Inc. 3D Studio File Format Library © 1996-2001 by J.E. Hoffmann [email protected] This software contains ImageCELs® texture files from Imagetects. © Copyright 1989-98. ImageCELs® is a registered trademark of IMAGETECTS ™. Portions of content © 2001 Corbis Images. This software contains some symbols from Cad Easy Corporation © Copyright 1991-2004. All rights reserved by their respective parties. Broderbund, 3D Home Architect and 3DTrueView are trademarks or registered trademarks of Riverdeep Interactive Learning Limited. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. The online services advertised as part of this product may be changed or discontinued at any time for any reason. NOTE: DESIGN PLANS CREATED IN 3D HOME ARCHITECT® OR 3D HOME LANDSCAPE VERSIONS 4 OR EARLIER CANNOT BE IMPORTED INTO THIS PRODUCT. License Agreement IMPORTANT: READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT LICENSE AGREEMENT AND LIMITED WARRANTY SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR AN ENTITY) AND RIVERDEEP, INC., AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFILIATES ("RIVERDEEP"). THIS AGREEMENT IS GOVERNED BY THE INTERNAL SUBSTANTIVE LAWS OF THE STATE OF MASSACHUSETTS (AND NOT BY THE 1980 UNITED NATIONS CONVENTION ON CONTRACTS FOR THE INTERNATIONAL SALE OF GOODS, AS AMENDED). BY INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, REMOVE THE PRODUCT FROM YOUR HARD DRIVE AND PERMANENTLY ERASE ALL COPIES OF THE PRODUCT. IF YOU ARE THE ORIGINAL INSTALLER OF THE SOFTWARE YOU MAY PROMPTLY AFTER PURCHASE RETURN THE SOFTWARE (INCLUDING PRINTED MATERIALS) WITH PROOF OF PURCHASE TO THE PLACE WHERE IT WAS PURCHASED FOR A FULL REFUND OF THE AMOUNT PAID. RIVERDEEP SOFTWARE LICENSE GRANT OF LICENSE. This License Agreement permits you to use one copy of RIVERDEEP software (the "Software"), which may include electronic documentation, on a single computer/workstation. The Software is "in use" on a computer when it is loaded into the temporary memory (i.e., RAM or Cache) or installed into permanent memory (e.g., hard disk, CD-ROM drive, or other storage device) of that computer. This License does not constitute a sale and does not authorize a sale of the Software or anything created thereby. All intellectual property (including copyright, trademark and patent) in the Software, including all animations, audio, images, maps, music, photographs, video, and text incorporated into the Software, are owned by RIVERDEEP and its affiliates, suppliers and licensors, and are protected by United States laws and international treaty provisions. RIVERDEEP and its affiliates, suppliers and licensors retain all rights not expressly granted herein. You must treat the Software like any other copyrighted material, except that you may make one copy of the Software solely for backup or archival purposes. You may transfer your rights under this Agreement on a permanent basis provided you transfer the license granted by this Agreement, and the Software and all associated printed materials, and you retain no copies, and the recipient agrees to all of the terms of this Agreement. • You may not use the software on or over a network or any other transfer device (including the Internet) except in a manner using the network and online functions included in the Software, if any. Use of the Software on more than one computer constitutes copyright infringement and may be punishable by civil fines, criminal penalties, or both. You may not rent or lease the Software, but schools and libraries may lend the Software to third parties provided the Software is in CD format and each end user is given a copy of this License Agreement which will govern the use of such Software. You may not modify, translate, reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software, except to the extent that this restriction is expressly prohibited by applicable law. You may not remove any proprietary notices or labels in the Software. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the Software or distribute printed copies of any user documentation provided in electronic format. You may not publicly perform or publicly display the Software. • • • • • Broderbund® The restrictions contained herein apply equally to hybrid CD-ROMs which may contain multiple versions of the Software for use on different operating systems. Regardless of the type of media you receive, you may use only the portion appropriate for your single-user computer/workstation. In the event you fail to comply with any of the terms or conditions of this license, your rights to use the Software will end, you shall stop using the Software, remove the Software from your computer, and permanently erase all copies of the Software. You may not export or re-export the Software or any underlying information or technology except in full compliance with all United States and other applicable laws and regulations. LIMITED WARRANTY LIMITED WARRANTY. RIVERDEEP and its affiliates, suppliers and licensors warrant to the original installer of the Software, for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of purchase, that the media on which the Software is distributed is substantially free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. ANY AND ALL OTHER IMPLIED WARRANTIES, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING WRITTEN MATERIALS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. REMEDIES. Your exclusive remedy shall be, at RIVERDEEP's sole option, (a) the refund of the amount you paid for the Software or (b) repair or replacement of the Software, provided that the defective Software is returned to RIVERDEEP (at Riverdeep, Dock Door #9, 120 Hidden Lake Circle, Duncan, SC 29334. Telephone: (319) 378-7319) along with proof of the date of purchase within ninety (90) days from the date of purchase. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Software has resulted from accident, abuse, neglect or misapplication. Any replacement Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Except as set forth above, the Software is sold "as-is", without any express or implied warranties of any kind. LIMITATION OF LIABILITIES. IN NO EVENT WILL RIVERDEEP OR ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, ECONOMIC, COVER, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, USER DOCUMENTATION, OR RELATED TECHNICAL SUPPORT, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES OR COSTS RELATING TO THE LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS, GOODWILL, DATA, TIME OR COMPUTER PROGRAMS, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT WILL RIVERDEEP'S AND ITS AFFILIATES', SUPPLIERS' AND LICENSORS' LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE CLAIM (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY CONTRACT, PRODUCT LIABILITY, OR TORT CLAIM). BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. License Agreement MISCELLANEOUS RIVERDEEP may cancel, change, modify, discontinue, terminate or charge a fee at any time for any reason for the online services advertised as part of this product. The links in the Software will allow third-party sites to be accessed. These linked sites are not under the control of RIVERDEEP, and RIVERDEEP is not responsible for the contents of any linked site, and any such inclusion of any link does not imply endorsement by RIVERDEEP of the site. No change or modification of the License will be valid unless it is in writing and is signed by RIVERDEEP. The provisions of this Agreement are severable; if any provision is held to be invalid or unenforceable, it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision. If the Software was acquired outside the United States, then local law may apply. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software and user documentation is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS AND LIMITED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software--Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Riverdeep, Inc., 125 Cambridge Park Drive, Cambridge, MA 02140 U.S.A. Table of Contents Table of Contents The Basics 1 Chapter 1: Welcome......................................................................................1 Package Contents ............................................................................................................................................ 2 System Requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 2 Important Notes for Previous 3D Home Design Users............................................................................. 2 Backing Up Textures from Version 5 ........................................................................................................... 2 Uninstalling a Previous Version ................................................................................................................... 3 How the Uninstallation Works ..................................................................................................................... 3 Installing 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 .................................................................. 3 Starting the Program ...................................................................................................................................... 4 Registering the Program ................................................................................................................................ 4 Starting a New Project.................................................................................................................................... 4 Disabling the Startup Dialog ......................................................................................................................... 4 Adjusting Your Display Settings .................................................................................................................. 4 Learning the Program .................................................................................................................................... 5 Program Basics ........................................................................................................................................ 5 How to Complete a Project.................................................................................................................... 5 How to Use the Tools ............................................................................................................................. 5 Advanced Features ................................................................................................................................. 5 Online Help...................................................................................................................................................... 5 Troubleshooting Guide .................................................................................................................................. 6 Glossary of Terms ........................................................................................................................................... 6 Technical Support ........................................................................................................................................... 6 Online Self-Support ................................................................................................................................ 6 E-mail Support ........................................................................................................................................ 6 Telephone Support ................................................................................................................................. 6 3D Home Architect Online ............................................................................................................................ 7 Broderbund.com ............................................................................................................................................. 7 Satisfaction Guaranteed ................................................................................................................................. 7 i Table of Contents Chapter 2: Screen Layout ............................................................................ 9 Title Bar .......................................................................................................................................................... 10 Menu Bar ........................................................................................................................................................ 10 Toolbars and Toolbar Tabs .......................................................................................................................... 10 Landscape Toolbar................................................................................................................................ 10 Terrain Toolbar...................................................................................................................................... 10 Basic View Control Toolbar................................................................................................................. 10 Zoom and Navigate Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 11 Catalog Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 11 Status Bar........................................................................................................................................................ 12 Chapter 3: Drawing & Editing Basics ....................................................... 13 Inserting Elements ........................................................................................................................................ 14 Selecting an Insertion Method for Line-Drawn Elements....................................................................... 14 Going into Selection Mode for Editing ...................................................................................................... 14 Disabling Pre-Selection ................................................................................................................................ 15 Selecting Elements for Editing .................................................................................................................... 15 Deselecting Elements.................................................................................................................................... 15 Accessing Edit Tools..................................................................................................................................... 15 Controlling the View 17 Chapter 4: 2D and 3D Viewing................................................................... 19 Viewing the 2D Plan..................................................................................................................................... 20 Viewing a 2D Designer’s View ................................................................................................................... 20 Viewing in 3D................................................................................................................................................ 21 Zooming In and Out..................................................................................................................................... 22 Zooming a Selected Area ............................................................................................................................. 22 Zooming to Fit the Drawing Area .............................................................................................................. 22 Panning Across a Drawing.......................................................................................................................... 22 Changing the Display Mode ....................................................................................................................... 22 Chapter 5: View Filter ................................................................................. 25 Filtering the Display ..................................................................................................................................... 26 Displaying/Hiding Landscape Elements.................................................................................................. 26 Displaying/Hiding Building Elements ..................................................................................................... 27 Displaying/Hiding Building Locations..................................................................................................... 28 Displaying/Hiding Text .............................................................................................................................. 28 Displaying/Hiding Dimensions................................................................................................................. 28 ii Table of Contents Displaying/Hiding Electrical Wiring ........................................................................................................ 28 Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images ................................................................................................. 29 Selection Filtering.......................................................................................................................................... 29 Making Landscape Elements Selectable or Non-Selectable.................................................................... 30 Making Building Elements Selectable or Non-Selectable ....................................................................... 30 Making Building Locations Selectable or Non-Selectable ...................................................................... 31 Making Text Selectable or Non-Selectable ................................................................................................ 31 Making Dimensions Selectable or Non-Selectable................................................................................... 32 Making Electrical Wiring Selectable or Non-Selectable .......................................................................... 32 Making Project Trace Images Selectable or Non-Selectable ................................................................... 32 Site Design 35 Chapter 6: Starting with a House...............................................................37 Inserting a House Template ........................................................................................................................ 38 A Note About House Templates ................................................................................................................ 38 Opening a Project from Another 3D Home Design Program ................................................................ 39 Chapter 7: Property Lines ..........................................................................41 Defining Your Building Lot......................................................................................................................... 42 Defining a Custom Building Lot................................................................................................................. 43 Chapter 8: Terrain Modeling.......................................................................45 Defining the Basic Terrain ........................................................................................................................... 46 Creating Hills and Valleys........................................................................................................................... 46 Creating Berms and Trenches ..................................................................................................................... 47 Creating Plateaus .......................................................................................................................................... 48 Creating Slopes.............................................................................................................................................. 49 Hardscaping 53 Chapter 9: Fences & Gates.........................................................................55 Inserting a Fence ........................................................................................................................................... 56 Stretching a Fence Layout............................................................................................................................ 57 Changing the Length of a Fence ................................................................................................................. 57 Creating a Break in a Fence ......................................................................................................................... 57 Parts of a Fence.............................................................................................................................................. 57 iii Table of Contents Editing the Properties of a Fence ................................................................................................................ 57 Changing the Fencing Material................................................................................................................... 59 Deleting a Fence ............................................................................................................................................ 59 Inserting a Gate ............................................................................................................................................. 59 Moving a Gate ............................................................................................................................................... 60 Flipping a Gate .............................................................................................................................................. 60 Flipping a Gate’s Swing ............................................................................................................................... 60 Editing the Properties of a Gate .................................................................................................................. 60 Deleting a Gate .............................................................................................................................................. 61 Chapter 10: Decks & Patios ....................................................................... 63 Building a Deck with the Deck Tool .......................................................................................................... 64 Moving a Deck............................................................................................................................................... 64 Rotating a Deck ............................................................................................................................................. 64 Changing the Direction of Deck Boards .................................................................................................... 65 Stretching a Deck .......................................................................................................................................... 65 Reshaping a Deck.......................................................................................................................................... 65 Curving a Deck Edge.................................................................................................................................... 65 Changing the Height of a Deck................................................................................................................... 65 Editing Deck Post Properties....................................................................................................................... 65 Displaying Footings Under Deck Posts ..................................................................................................... 66 Editing the Deck Frame................................................................................................................................ 66 Changing the Railing Style .......................................................................................................................... 67 Controlling the Display of Deck Railings.................................................................................................. 67 Controlling the Display of Deck Skirting .................................................................................................. 68 Inserting Openings in a Deck...................................................................................................................... 68 Resizing a Deck Opening............................................................................................................................. 68 Reshaping a Deck Opening ......................................................................................................................... 68 Curving a Deck Opening Edge ................................................................................................................... 69 Removing Deck Openings ........................................................................................................................... 69 Deleting a Deck ............................................................................................................................................. 69 Adding Stairs to a Deck ............................................................................................................................... 69 Moving Deck Stairs....................................................................................................................................... 70 Parts of a Staircase ........................................................................................................................................ 70 Editing the Size of Deck Stairs .................................................................................................................... 70 Controlling the Display of Railings on Deck Stairs ................................................................................. 71 Editing Stringers, Risers and Treads .......................................................................................................... 71 Deleting Deck Stairs ..................................................................................................................................... 72 Creating a Patio ............................................................................................................................................. 72 Moving a Patio Slab ...................................................................................................................................... 73 Resizing a Patio Slab..................................................................................................................................... 73 Reshaping a Patio Slab ................................................................................................................................. 73 iv Table of Contents Rotating a Patio Slab..................................................................................................................................... 73 Editing the Thickness of a Patio Slab ......................................................................................................... 73 Applying a Different Material to a Patio ................................................................................................... 74 Deleting a Patio Slab..................................................................................................................................... 74 Chapter 11: Retaining Walls.......................................................................75 Drawing Retaining Walls............................................................................................................................. 76 Editing a Retaining Wall’s Height, Width or Elevation .......................................................................... 76 Lengthening and Shortening Retaining Walls.......................................................................................... 76 Rotating a Retaining Wall............................................................................................................................ 76 Curving a Retaining Wall ............................................................................................................................ 76 Breaking a Retaining Wall ........................................................................................................................... 77 Applying Different Finishes to Retaining Walls ...................................................................................... 77 Deleting a Retaining Wall ............................................................................................................................ 77 Chapter 12: Sidewalks, Pathways & Driveways .................................................................................................79 Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways and Driveways ....................................................................................... 80 Stretching a Path Element............................................................................................................................ 80 Moving a Path Element................................................................................................................................ 81 Editing the Thickness or Width of a Path Element .................................................................................. 81 Applying Different Materials to Path Elements ....................................................................................... 81 Deleting a Path Element............................................................................................................................... 81 Chapter 13: Exterior Structures .................................................................83 Inserting Exterior Structures ....................................................................................................................... 84 Moving Exterior Structures ......................................................................................................................... 84 Rotating Exterior Structures ........................................................................................................................ 84 Editing the Size of an Exterior Structure ................................................................................................... 84 Applying Different Colors or Materials to Exterior Structures.............................................................. 84 Deleting an Exterior Structure .................................................................................................................... 85 Chapter 14: Exterior Furniture ...................................................................87 Inserting Exterior Furniture ........................................................................................................................ 88 Moving Exterior Furniture .......................................................................................................................... 88 Rotating Exterior Furniture ......................................................................................................................... 88 Editing the Size of Exterior Furniture ........................................................................................................ 88 Applying Different Colors or Finishes to Exterior Furniture................................................................. 88 Deleting Exterior Furniture ......................................................................................................................... 89 v Table of Contents Chapter 15: Exterior Accessories ............................................................. 91 Inserting Exterior Accessories..................................................................................................................... 92 Moving Exterior Accessories....................................................................................................................... 92 Rotating Exterior Accessories...................................................................................................................... 92 Raising or Lowering an Exterior Accessory.............................................................................................. 92 Editing the Size of an Exterior Accessory.................................................................................................. 92 Changing the Look of an Exterior Accessory ........................................................................................... 93 Deleting an Exterior Accessory................................................................................................................... 93 Chapter 16: Landscape Lighting ............................................................... 95 Inserting Landscape Lighting ..................................................................................................................... 96 Moving a Landscape Light Fixture ............................................................................................................ 96 Editing the Size of a Landscape Light Fixture .......................................................................................... 96 Editing a Light Fixture’s Light Source ....................................................................................................... 96 Turning a Light On or Off ........................................................................................................................... 97 Changing the Look of a Landscape Light Fixture.................................................................................... 98 Deleting a Landscape Light Fixture ........................................................................................................... 98 Chapter 17: Irrigation ................................................................................. 99 Inserting Irrigation...................................................................................................................................... 100 Moving Sprinklers ...................................................................................................................................... 100 Rotating Sprinklers ..................................................................................................................................... 100 Editing the Height of a Sprinkler.............................................................................................................. 100 Editing a Sprinkler’s Spray Coverage ...................................................................................................... 100 Deleting a Sprinkler.................................................................................................................................... 100 Plants & Gardens 101 Chapter 18: Garden Beds, Ponds & Other Filled Areas ........................ 103 Creating Filled Areas.................................................................................................................................. 104 Resizing a Filled Area................................................................................................................................. 104 Reshaping a Filled Area ............................................................................................................................. 104 Rotating a Filled Area................................................................................................................................. 105 Moving a Filled Area.................................................................................................................................. 105 Changing the Fill Material......................................................................................................................... 105 Deleting a Filled Area................................................................................................................................. 105 vi Table of Contents Chapter 19: Edging ...................................................................................107 Inserting Edging.......................................................................................................................................... 108 Cleaning Up Corners.................................................................................................................................. 108 Changing the Length of Edging................................................................................................................ 109 Breaking Edging.......................................................................................................................................... 109 Moving Edging............................................................................................................................................ 109 Rotating Edging .......................................................................................................................................... 109 Editing the Height or Width of Edging ................................................................................................... 110 Changing the Edging Material.................................................................................................................. 110 Deleting Edging........................................................................................................................................... 110 Chapter 20: Trees, Shrubs & Plants ........................................................111 Inserting Plants............................................................................................................................................ 112 Moving a Plant ............................................................................................................................................ 112 Changing the Elevation of a Plant ............................................................................................................ 112 Editing the 2D Appearance of a Plant...................................................................................................... 112 Changing the Age of a Plant ..................................................................................................................... 113 Forcing a Custom Plant Size...................................................................................................................... 113 Deleting a Plant ........................................................................................................................................... 114 Seeing Plant Growth Over Time............................................................................................................... 114 Applying Seasonal Changes to Plants ..................................................................................................... 114 Using the Plant Encyclopedia ................................................................................................................... 115 The Encyclopedia Main Page .................................................................................................................... 116 Selecting a Plant to View.................................................................................................................... 116 Viewing Plant Information ................................................................................................................ 116 Plant Views .......................................................................................................................................... 117 Plant Care Calendar.................................................................................................................................... 118 World Map Page ......................................................................................................................................... 120 Notebook Page ............................................................................................................................................ 121 Picture Page ................................................................................................................................................. 122 Diseases Page............................................................................................................................................... 123 Filtering the Plant List ................................................................................................................................ 124 Adding a Plant from the Encyclopedia to the Catalog.......................................................................... 125 Drawing & Editing Tools 127 Chapter 21: Drawing Aids.........................................................................129 Setting Up a Drawing Grid........................................................................................................................ 130 Turning the Drawing Grid On and Off ................................................................................................... 130 vii Table of Contents Using the Grid Snap ................................................................................................................................... 130 Turning the Grid Snap On and Off .......................................................................................................... 130 Using the Object Snap ................................................................................................................................ 130 Using Ortho ................................................................................................................................................. 131 Using Angle Snap ....................................................................................................................................... 131 Disabling/Enabling Collision Control..................................................................................................... 131 Chapter 22: Measurement........................................................................ 133 Changing the Unit of Measure.................................................................................................................. 134 Suppressing Metric Units in Dialogs ....................................................................................................... 134 Measuring Distances .................................................................................................................................. 134 Measuring Area and Perimeter................................................................................................................. 135 Chapter 23: Commander .......................................................................... 137 Displaying the Commander ...................................................................................................................... 138 Using the Commander ............................................................................................................................... 138 Displaying the Coordinate Icon................................................................................................................ 138 Specifying the Insertion Height of an Element Before You Insert It ................................................... 138 Selecting a Reference Point When Inserting and Editing Elements .................................................... 139 Entering Values in the Commander......................................................................................................... 139 Direction and Angle of Rotation............................................................................................................... 140 Defining Points in the Cartesian Coordinate System ............................................................................ 140 Specifying Distance and Direction in the Polar Coordinate System ................................................... 140 Using the Commander When Rotating Elements .................................................................................. 140 Using the Commander When Curving Elements .................................................................................. 141 Chapter 24: Editing Your Design............................................................. 143 Undoing the Previous Action.................................................................................................................... 144 Redoing an Undo ........................................................................................................................................ 144 Accessing Edit Commands........................................................................................................................ 144 Moving Elements ........................................................................................................................................ 144 Doing a Straight Drag-and-Drop...................................................................................................... 144 Using the Move Tool .......................................................................................................................... 144 Raising or Lowering an Element .............................................................................................................. 145 Rotating Elements in 2D Plan View ......................................................................................................... 145 Doing a Simple, On-the-Spot Rotation ............................................................................................ 145 Using the Rotate Tool ......................................................................................................................... 146 Changing an Element’s Orientation......................................................................................................... 146 Copying Elements....................................................................................................................................... 146 Arraying Elements ...................................................................................................................................... 147 Deleting Elements ....................................................................................................................................... 147 viii Table of Contents Editing the Size and Composition of an Element .................................................................................. 148 Changing an Element’s Material or Color............................................................................................... 148 Power Tools 151 Chapter 25: Photo Boards ........................................................................153 Importing a Photo Board ........................................................................................................................... 154 Adding an Imported Photo Board to Your Catalog............................................................................... 155 Inserting a Photo Board from the Catalog............................................................................................... 155 Moving a Photo Board ............................................................................................................................... 155 Rotating a Photo Board in 2D Plan View ................................................................................................ 155 Changing the Elevation of a Photo Board ............................................................................................... 156 Changing a Photo Board from Stationary to Rotating and Vice Versa............................................... 156 Editing the Size of a Photo Board ............................................................................................................. 156 Deleting a Photo Board .............................................................................................................................. 156 Creating Transparency in Photo Board Images...................................................................................... 156 Chapter 26: Text & Dimensions ...............................................................159 Adding Text to Your Drawing .................................................................................................................. 160 Moving Text................................................................................................................................................. 160 Rotating Text................................................................................................................................................ 160 Editing Text Content .................................................................................................................................. 160 Changing the Style of Text......................................................................................................................... 161 Changing the Justification of Multi-line Text ......................................................................................... 161 Deleting Text................................................................................................................................................ 161 Adding Text with a Leader........................................................................................................................ 161 Moving and Stretching a Leader .............................................................................................................. 162 Changing the Leader Arrow Style............................................................................................................ 162 Moving Leader Text ................................................................................................................................... 163 Editing Leader Text .................................................................................................................................... 163 Deleting Text with a Leader ...................................................................................................................... 163 Dimensioning .............................................................................................................................................. 163 Setting the Current Dimension Style ....................................................................................................... 163 Creating Linear Dimensions...................................................................................................................... 164 Creating Aligned Dimensions................................................................................................................... 164 Moving a Dimension Line ......................................................................................................................... 164 Stretching Dimensions ............................................................................................................................... 165 Changing the Style of a Dimension.......................................................................................................... 165 Deleting a Dimension ................................................................................................................................. 165 Dimension Style Properties ....................................................................................................................... 166 ix Table of Contents Anatomy of a Dimension................................................................................................................... 166 Lines and Arrows................................................................................................................................ 166 Dimension Text ................................................................................................................................... 166 Line Styles ............................................................................................................................................ 167 Chapter 27: Project Estimate................................................................... 169 Generating a Project Estimate ................................................................................................................... 170 Opening a Saved Estimate......................................................................................................................... 171 Editing Material Pricing............................................................................................................................. 171 Chapter 28: 3DTrueView™....................................................................... 173 How 3DTrueView™ Rendering Works................................................................................................... 174 Setting the Viewpoint for the Scene ......................................................................................................... 174 Setting the Scene.......................................................................................................................................... 174 Defining Your Location and Time of Day ............................................................................................... 175 Creating a 3DTrueView™ Rendering...................................................................................................... 176 Adjusting the Rendering Quality ............................................................................................................. 176 Changing the Refresh Rate During Lighting Calculations ................................................................... 177 Adjusting the Brightness of the Rendered Image .................................................................................. 177 Turning Daylight Off.................................................................................................................................. 177 Using Antialiasing to Reduce Jagged Edges........................................................................................... 178 Creating a Fog Effect .................................................................................................................................. 178 Creating a Smoke Effect ............................................................................................................................. 178 Adjusting the Light Coming from Light Fixtures .................................................................................. 178 Editing the Surface Properties of Materials ............................................................................................ 179 Saving a 3DTrueView™ Rendering to a File .......................................................................................... 179 Specifying the Output Size of Rendered Images.................................................................................... 180 Creating Multiple 3DTrueView™ Renderings in the Same Project .................................................... 180 Managing Files 181 Chapter 29: Opening, Saving & Printing ................................................ 183 Opening a Saved Project ............................................................................................................................ 184 Viewing Sample Plans................................................................................................................................ 184 Changing the Number of Files in the Recently Used File List ............................................................. 184 Repairing Damaged Projects ..................................................................................................................... 184 Saving Projects............................................................................................................................................. 185 Setting the Automatic Save........................................................................................................................ 185 Specifying a Default Save Directory......................................................................................................... 185 x Table of Contents Saving a Project as a Template.................................................................................................................. 185 Selecting a Default Project Template........................................................................................................ 186 Disabling the Use of Templates ................................................................................................................ 186 Setting the Path to the Templates Directory ........................................................................................... 186 Selecting a Directory for Temporary Files............................................................................................... 187 Closing Projects ........................................................................................................................................... 187 Printing Drawings....................................................................................................................................... 187 Using Print Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 188 Chapter 30: Exporting Files......................................................................189 Exporting Your Model ............................................................................................................................... 190 Exporting the Current View ...................................................................................................................... 190 Customization 191 Chapter 31: Screen Settings ....................................................................193 Displaying/Hiding Toolbars .................................................................................................................... 194 Displaying Toolbars in Tabbed Format ................................................................................................... 194 Displaying Toolbars in a Non-tabbed Format ........................................................................................ 194 Changing the Background Color of Toolbars ......................................................................................... 194 Changing the Color of Toolbar Areas ...................................................................................................... 194 Moving Toolbars ......................................................................................................................................... 195 Displaying/Hiding the Catalog Panel..................................................................................................... 195 Resizing the Catalog Panel ........................................................................................................................ 195 Moving the Catalog Panel ......................................................................................................................... 195 Displaying/Hiding the Status Bar............................................................................................................ 196 Changing the Background Color of the Drawing Window.................................................................. 196 Hardware Acceleration .............................................................................................................................. 196 Improving Graphics Display..................................................................................................................... 197 Chapter 32: Building Locations ...............................................................199 Viewing and Defining Building Locations.............................................................................................. 200 Current Building Location......................................................................................................................... 200 Location Dimming ...................................................................................................................................... 201 Making Elements on All Locations Selectable in 2D Plan View .......................................................... 201 Chapter 33: Managing View Windows.....................................................203 Using the View Manager ........................................................................................................................... 204 Creating New View Windows .................................................................................................................. 204 xi Table of Contents Turning View Tabs On............................................................................................................................... 205 Switching Between View Windows ......................................................................................................... 205 Tiling View Windows................................................................................................................................. 205 Cascading View Windows......................................................................................................................... 205 Returning to a Maximized View............................................................................................................... 206 Restoring the Previous Arrangement of View Windows ..................................................................... 206 Closing View Windows ............................................................................................................................. 206 Opening View Windows that You Have Closed.................................................................................... 206 Renaming a View Window........................................................................................................................ 206 Editing the Print Scale of a View .............................................................................................................. 207 Deleting View Windows............................................................................................................................ 207 Chapter 34: Custom Viewing ................................................................... 209 Creating New 3D Views ............................................................................................................................ 210 Changing a 3D View................................................................................................................................... 210 Turning Cameras On and Off ................................................................................................................... 210 Changing Your Viewpoint......................................................................................................................... 210 Changing the Camera Height ................................................................................................................... 211 Changing the Target of Your View .......................................................................................................... 211 Changing the Target Height...................................................................................................................... 211 Viewing in Perspective Mode ................................................................................................................... 211 Viewing in Parallel Mode .......................................................................................................................... 212 Selecting a Preset Camera Angle .............................................................................................................. 212 Changing the Viewing Field Angle.......................................................................................................... 213 Walking Around in 3D View .................................................................................................................... 214 Flying Around Your 3D Model................................................................................................................. 214 Sliding in a 3D View ................................................................................................................................... 214 Spinning the View Using the Look Around Tool .................................................................................. 214 Resetting the Camera in a 3D View.......................................................................................................... 215 Selecting a Background for 3D Views...................................................................................................... 215 Viewing Elevations ..................................................................................................................................... 216 Turning Elevation Marks On and Off...................................................................................................... 216 Moving Elevation Marks ........................................................................................................................... 216 Changing the Target of an Elevation ....................................................................................................... 217 Editing Elevation Properties ..................................................................................................................... 217 Deleting an Elevation ................................................................................................................................. 217 Creating a Custom Elevation .................................................................................................................... 217 Creating a Section View ............................................................................................................................. 218 Viewing Section Views............................................................................................................................... 218 Turning Section Marks On and Off.......................................................................................................... 219 Editing a Section View ............................................................................................................................... 219 Editing Section Properties ......................................................................................................................... 219 xii Table of Contents Deleting a Section View ............................................................................................................................. 220 Displaying Framing .................................................................................................................................... 220 Chapter 35: Catalogs & Elements............................................................221 Using the Catalog Manager....................................................................................................................... 222 Adding a Group to a Catalog .................................................................................................................... 222 Renaming a Group in a Catalog ............................................................................................................... 222 Deleting a Group in a Catalog................................................................................................................... 223 Adding and Editing Elements in a Catalog ............................................................................................ 223 Saving Edited Elements in Your Drawing to a Catalog ........................................................................ 224 Importing 3D Studio Files.......................................................................................................................... 224 Simplifying an Element.............................................................................................................................. 225 Controlling What Parts of an Element are Displayed ........................................................................... 226 Working with Property Pages................................................................................................................... 226 Using Automatic Name Generation......................................................................................................... 227 Editing the Name Generation Formula ................................................................................................... 227 Basic Page..................................................................................................................................................... 228 Changing an Element’s Orientation................................................................................................. 228 Appearance Page ........................................................................................................................................ 228 Quantity Page .............................................................................................................................................. 229 Behavior Page .............................................................................................................................................. 230 Adding Notes to an Element’s Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 230 Adding Hyperlinks to an Element’s Properties ..................................................................................... 231 Creating a New Catalog............................................................................................................................. 231 Creating a Copy of a Catalog .................................................................................................................... 232 Importing Elements into Catalogs............................................................................................................ 232 Deleting Elements from a Catalog............................................................................................................ 233 Opening a Catalog ...................................................................................................................................... 233 Closing a Catalog ........................................................................................................................................ 234 Viewing Catalog Properties....................................................................................................................... 234 Chapter 36: Materials, Colors & Patterns................................................235 Things You Should Know About Editing Materials.............................................................................. 236 Customizing the Materials Library .......................................................................................................... 236 Editing Material Properties ....................................................................................................................... 237 Using Textures from Outside Sources ..................................................................................................... 239 Saving Customized Materials to a Materials Library File..................................................................... 239 Importing Materials from a Materials Library File................................................................................ 240 Specifying the Location of the Textures Directory................................................................................. 240 Customizing the Patterns Library ............................................................................................................ 241 xiii Table of Contents Chapter 37: Line Styles ............................................................................ 243 Things You Should Know About Editing Line Styles ........................................................................... 244 Customizing the Line Styles Library........................................................................................................ 244 Saving Line Styles to a Line Styles Library File...................................................................................... 246 Importing Line Styles from a Line Styles Library File........................................................................... 246 Customizing the Linetypes Library ......................................................................................................... 247 Chapter 38: Text & Dimension Styles ..................................................... 249 Customizing the Text Styles Library........................................................................................................ 250 Saving Customized Text Styles to the Text Styles Library File ............................................................ 251 Importing Text Styles from a Text Styles Library File........................................................................... 252 Customizing the Dimension Styles Library ............................................................................................ 252 Dimension Style Properties ....................................................................................................................... 253 Anatomy of a Dimension................................................................................................................... 253 Lines and Arrows................................................................................................................................ 253 Dimension Text ................................................................................................................................... 254 Line Styles ............................................................................................................................................ 255 Saving Customized Dimension Styles to the Dimension Styles Library File..................................... 255 Importing Dimension Styles from Dimension Styles Library File ...................................................... 255 Chapter 39: Light Sources ....................................................................... 257 Things You Should Know About Editing Light Sources ...................................................................... 258 Customizing the Light Source Library .................................................................................................... 258 Saving Customized Light Sources to the Light Source Library File.................................................... 259 Importing Light Sources from a Light Source Library File................................................................... 260 Specifying the Location of the Light Source Directory.......................................................................... 260 Glossary .................................................................................................... 263 Catalog Index ............................................................................................ 269 Index .......................................................................................................... 275 xiv Part 1 The Basics Welcome Screen Layout Drawing & Editing Basics page 1 page 9 page 13 Chapter Welcome Congratulations on purchasing 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6! We guarantee you are going to enjoy creating your dream design projects. 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design is for anyone who wants to create a landscape plan. This high-quality, multi-functional tool is easy to use and delivers the results you want — completely and accurately. Whether you are just playing around with different design ideas, or preparing drawings for a landscaping professional, 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design makes it fun and easy. Possible uses include: • Garden planning • Complete landscape design • 3D visualization • Photorealistic rendering • Budget and materials list • Export to other file formats Take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the contents of this guide so you can quickly find the answers you need while working on your project. 1 Chapter 1 Welcome Package Contents Your 3D Home Architect Landscape Design package includes the following: • • 3D Home Architect Landscape Design installation CD 3D Home Architect Landscape Design User’s Guide ® version 6 are JPG files. The JPG format was chosen for version 6 to reduce file size and improve program speed. If you choose not to back up your old textures, you can still open a version 5 drawing in version 6. However, the drawing will have no textures applied to it when you open it in version 6, and you will have to apply new textures to your elements if you want textures in your drawing. There are two ways to make textures from version 5 available in version 6: • Back up your old Textures directory temporarily, then once version 6 is installed, copy the old textures into the new Textures directory of version 6. This method allows you to uninstall version 5 if you want. See Backing Up Textures from Version 5 on page 2. Or, once version 6 is installed, set your Textures path in your program settings to the Textures folder in the older version. With this method you cannot uninstall the old version. Also, when working with new drawings in version 6, materials will not show up in your catalog or when using the Materials Paintbrush unless you switch the path back to the Textures directory of version 6. For more information, see Specifying the Location of the Textures Directory on page 240. System Requirements In order to run 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design, your system should include the following: • • • • Microsoft® Windows® 98SE/2000 SP4/XP SP1/ME 500Mhz or higher processor 128 MB RAM (256 MB recommended) 300MB free hard-disk space (750MB recommended if you are installing the Plant Encyclopedia on your hard drive) 4X CD-ROM drive or faster Video Card with OpenGL driver and at least 32MB RAM Color monitor with 1024x768 resolution or higher Mouse Microsoft® Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher to view tutorials and access online features (optional). • • • • • • Important Notes for Previous 3D Home Design Users If you are using 3D Home Architect Landscape Design Deluxe 6, you can open drawings from 3D Home Design Suite Professional 5, 3D Home Architect® 5 and 3D Home Landscape Designer 5. Drawings from older versions of 3D Home Architect or 3D Home Landscape Designer (4.0 or earlier) are not accepted. If you have projects from version 5 of a 3D Home Design program and would like to be able to open them in version 6, it is recommended that you make the textures in the older version available in version 6 so that textures will appear properly in version 6. This is because textures in the older version are bitmap (BMP) files, and the textures in Backing Up Textures from Version 5 If you want to uninstall version 5 before installing version 6, and you want to be able to open version 5 drawings in version 6 with all your textures properly applied, you should back up your old textures. If you are not planning to uninstall version 5, backing up your Textures directory is not necessary because they will still be available on your system and can be copied to your new Textures directory. To back up textures from version 5: 1. Open Windows® Explorer. 2 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Uninstalling a Previous Version 2. Locate the Textures directory. (e.g. C:\Program Files\Broderbund\Broderbund Home Design 5.1\Textures.) Copy the folder to another location on your system, such as the root (e.g. C: drive). You can now safely uninstall version 5 if you want. 1 How the Uninstallation Works When you uninstall an older version of the software, all program files, folders and icons are removed unless you modified your catalog and/ or have projects residing in the program’s Projects directory. In this case, the old program folder remains on your system with the old Catalogs and Projects directories in tact. If you want you can replace the Catalogs and Projects directories in 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design with the old directories after you’ve installed it. 3. 4. Once you’ve installed version 6, you can copy the textures in the backed up Textures directory to your new Textures directory. The new directory will then contain textures from both version 5 and version 6. By default, textures are located in the following directory in version 6: C:\\Program Files\3D Home Architect\Landscape Design Deluxe 6\Textures Installing 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 To install 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6, you need to run Setup. Make sure you exit all other programs, applications and screensavers before installing. To install the program: 1. 2. Begin at the Windows® desktop. Insert the installation CD into your CD-ROM drive. The InstallShield Wizard screen appears and loads the setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. Uninstalling a Previous Version Note: If you have projects from version 5 that you would like to open in version 6, see Important Notes for Previous 3D Home Design Users on page 2 before uninstalling. If you currently have an older 3D Home Design program installed on your system, you may want to uninstall it before installing 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6. To uninstall a previous version: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. At your Windows® desktop, select Start > Settings > Control Panel. In the Control Panel window, double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon. In the Add/Remove Programs window, select the program to be deleted. Click the Change/Remove button. In the InstallShield Wizard window, enable the Remove radio button. Click Next. In the Confirm Uninstall window, click Yes. The uninstallation begins. Follow any remaining instructions. 3. Note: If the install screen does not appear automatically, you must install the program manually. To install the program if installation does not begin automatically: 1. 2. 3. Make sure the installation CD is in your CDROM drive. At the Windows® desktop, click the Start button, then select Run. Type D:\setup.exe in the Open edit box. The letter D represents your CD-ROM drive. If you are installing from a different drive, substitute the correct letter for the letter D. Click OK, then follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. 4. User’s Guide 3 Chapter 1 Welcome Starting the Program You can start your program from your Windows Start menu, or by double-clicking the 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 icon on your desktop. ® Disabling the Startup Dialog You can disable the startup dialog that appears when you start the program. If you disable it, the House Builder Wizard will launch when you start the program. If you have disabled the House Builder Wizard, a blank project will open. To disable the startup dialog: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab. Uncheck the Enable Startup Dialog check box. Click OK. Registering the Program Take a moment to register online when you see the registration window. Once registered you are eligible for technical support, special offers, advance notice of upgrades, and more. You can also register your software later in one of two ways: • Select Start > Programs > 3D Home Architect > Landscape Design Deluxe 6 > Register Online. Click the Register Online button in the startup dialog that appears when you start the program. 2. 3. 4. • Adjusting Your Display Settings You can control program performance by ensuring your Windows® display settings are set correctly. To adjust your display settings: 1. 2. 3. 4. From the Windows® Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel. In the Control Panel window, double-click Display. In the Display Properties dialog, select the Settings tab. From the Color drop box, select True Color (32 bit). Note: If 32-bit is unavailable, select 24-bit. 5. 6. In the Screen area section, move the slider to display at least 1024 x 768 pixels. Click OK. Starting a New Project Every time you start the program, a startup dialog appears. This dialog lets you start new drawings, or open saved drawings. To start a new project, click the Start a New Project button in the startup dialog. If the program is already running, you can start a new project by selecting File > New or clicking the New button on the Standard toolbar. 4 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Learning the Program 1 Learning the Program 3D Home Architect Landscape Design includes a Learning Center that contains a variety of videos and tutorials to help you get started and learn the program. It’s a quick, fun and easy, and will get you up and running with your project in no time. ® How to Use the Tools The How to Use the Tools page lets you select a specific tool — anything from exterior furniture to slopes, and view narrated videos on how to insert, edit and troubleshoot the element, and more. To access the Learning Center: • • When you start the program, click the Learn to Use button in the startup dialog, or If the program is running, make a selection from the Learn menu Advanced Features The Advanced Features page offers insider's tips and instructions on performing more difficult tasks in the program. Choose from the following step-by-step guides: • • • Everything You Ever Wanted to Know About Plants Getting the Most Out of the Plant Encyclopedia Terrain Modeling Program Basics The Program Basics page contains short videos, tools and guides to help get you up and running with the program. Online Help 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design includes a comprehensive online help system that includes all of the information found in this User’s Guide. You can browse through all help topics, or get help for a specific element, tool or dialog while you are designing. To access the online help file: • • • Select Help > Program Help, or Press F1, or Click the Program Help button on the Standard toolbar How to Complete a Project The How to Complete a Project page contains project-specific tutorials that you can read and print out. Examples include: • • Completing a Landscape Design Adding a Deck User’s Guide 5 Chapter 1 Welcome To get help for a specific part of your drawing: 1. 2. Select the element you want help with. Right-click and select the Tool Help option for that element (e.g. Plants Help). Help for the element is displayed. You can also access the Tool Help from the Edit > Modify Elements menu. Glossary of Terms You can instantly access a glossary of terms from the Help menu. To view the Glossary of Terms: 1. Select Help > Glossary of Terms. Technical Support Our online technical support system offers 24-hour service and product information. The online Support Center provides access to Online Self-Support, and lists contact information for E-mail Support and Telephone Support. Tool Help Online Self-Support You can access troubleshooting guides, FAQs and downloads for 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. To access free online software help: 1. 2. Select Help > Online Software Help. On the contact page, click the Online Self-Support link. To get help in a dialog: 1. Click the Dialog Help button in the dialog. A window is displayed that describes the content of the dialog. E-mail Support You can contact technical support by e-mail provided you have registered your software and received a User Name and Password. To contact technical support by e-mail: 1. 2. 3. Select Help > Online Software Help. On the contact page, click the E-mail Support link. On the Customer Support Login page, enter your User Name and Password. If you have not yet registered your software, you can do so from the Customer Support Login page. Dialog Help Troubleshooting Guide 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design’s help tools include a Troubleshooting Guide that describes common problems in the program and how to solve them. To access the Troubleshooting Guide: 1. Select Help > Troubleshooting Guide. Telephone Support If you contact technical support by telephone, be prepared to provide information about your computer name and model, and the brand name of the video card and sound card you are using, and a detailed description of your issue. We 6 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 3D Home Architect Online provide a form on our web site for your convenience. If possible, sit at your computer with the program running when you call. To prepare for your call: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select Help > Online Software Help. On the contact page, click the Telephone Support link. Fill out the Technical Support Contact Form. Click Print to print the form. Have the form with you when you call. 1 Satisfaction Guaranteed If you are not completely satisfied with this product, Broderbund® will gladly exchange it for another title of equivalent value or refund your purchase price. Return the complete package to us at: Broderbund Dock Door # 9 120 Hidden Lake Circle Duncan, SC 29334 U.S.A. Make sure you include your store receipt showing the store name and location within 30 days of purchase. Please enclose an explanation for the return and specify the replacement title. Allow 4– 6 weeks for refund or replacement title. Limit 1 per household. Dealers, wholesalers and their immediate families are not eligible. Written inquires should be addressed to our corporate address at: Broderbund 500 Redwood Boulevard Novato, CA 94947 U.S.A. Note: If you want to submit your technical support contact form to technical support by email, click the Send E-mail button at the bottom of the form. To contact technical support by telephone: 1. Call (319) 247-3333 during the following hours: Monday, Tuesday, Thursday, Friday 8:00 AM - 5:00 PM CST & Wednesday 9:00 AM - 5:00 PM CST Note: Though technical support does not charge for support calls, this is a toll call that will be billed to your long distance carrier. Average hold times during peak periods can exceed 20 minutes. 3D Home Architect Online The 3D Home Architect product page on our web site offers additional help, content and services related to the program. To access the 3D Home Architect page: 1. Select Help > 3D Home Architect Online. Broderbund.com Visit the Broderbund® web site to view a complete listing of Broderbund products and services. To instantly access the Broderbund web site: 1. Select Help > Broderbund.com, or go to http://www.broderbund.com in your Internet browser. User’s Guide 7 Chapter Screen Layout The 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design screen contains a variety of user-friendly features that make it easy to create precise landscape plans. This chapter describes everything you see on the screen so you can become familiar and comfortable with your work environment. Title Bar Menu Bar Tabbed Toolbars Landscape Toolbar Catalog Panel Basic View Control Toolbar Zoom and Navigate Toolbar Help String Status Bar Drawing Aids 9 Chapter 2 Screen Layout Title Bar The title bar runs across the top of the screen. It displays the name of your program, the name of the current project, and the name of the current view. You can minimize, maximize, restore or close the application window using the buttons at the right end of the title bar, or by clicking the Control menu button at the left end of the title bar. You can also maximize or restore the window by double-clicking the title bar. If the application window is not maximized, you can move the entire window around on your desktop by dragging the title bar. In addition to the two toolbar tabs, there are two free-standing toolbars displayed just below the drawing area: Basic View Control and Zoom and Navigate. Free-standing toolbars can be moved around on the screen. There are more toolbars available for display in your program settings. Each one can be displayed in tabbed or nontabbed format — the choice is yours. Note that you still have access to a complete set of Insert features on the Insert menu regardless of what tab you are on. Landscape Toolbar The Landscape toolbar contains all the tools you need to create a complete landscape plan for the exterior of your home. Tools include Plants, Fences/Gates, Decks, and Irrigation. Menu Bar The menu bar is located directly below the title bar. You can select menu items using either the mouse or keyboard. To use the mouse, simply click a menu name, then select an item from the menu that pops down. Menu items that have an arrow to the right display cascading menus when you place your pointer over them. When you highlight a menu item, a brief description is displayed on the status bar. To use the keyboard, press the ALT key and type the underlined letter in the menu name, then type the underlined letter in the menu item name. If the menu item has a cascading menu, you need to type an additional letter. You can also use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move through menu items and press ENTER to select one. You can use the ESC key to back out of the menu items one level at a time. Terrain Toolbar The Terrain toolbar contains tools that you can use to design a realistic terrain for your model, which is especially important in 3D views. Tools include Hills/Valleys, Slopes, Paths, Retaining Walls, and Site Boundary. Basic View Control Toolbar The Basic View Control toolbar contains several essential view-related tools. It lets you quickly switch between 2D view and 3D view, as well as access the View Filter. A display mode button lets you choose the current display type for the view (wireframe, hidden line, etc.). Toolbars and Toolbar Tabs By default, two tabs are located just beneath the menu bar: Landscape and Terrain. These are actually toolbars displayed in tabbed format. The view in the drawing window does not change when you switch to a different tab. The tabs simply provide you with instant access to the specific toolbars you need, when you need them. If you have opened a drawing from another 3D Home Design product which contains a house model, the building locations drop box displays a list of the locations used by that drawing. 10 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Catalog Panel 2 Zoom and Navigate Toolbar Zoom tools on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar include Zoom Realtime, Zoom Window, and Pan. Note that if you are in a 3D Perspective view, only the Zoom Realtime zoom tool is available. The navigation features on the toolbar (Walk Around, Fly Around, Look Around, Slide) are only active when you are in a 3D view. These tools let you change the view in real time using your mouse. Catalog Panel The catalog panel, located on the right side of the screen, displays the elements contained in the program’s Master Catalog, or whatever catalog is currently open. This is where you select elements to insert into your drawing. User’s Guide 11 Chapter 2 Screen Layout The content of the catalog panel changes depending on which Insert tool is currently selected, or was last selected. For example, if you select the Plants tool, you will see plants displayed in the catalog panel. The top window of the catalog panel displays a list of groups specific to the current element type. For example, if Plants is the current tool, you will see groups such as Deciduous Trees, Shrubs and Flowers. The middle window of the catalog panel displays all the element types available in the currently selected group. For example, if the Deciduous Trees group is currently selected, you will see a list of deciduous trees in the element window. The lower window of the catalog panel displays a 3D rendered preview of the currently selected element. You can rotate the image around by clicking and dragging with your mouse. Note, however, that the preview is for viewing purposes only within the catalog panel. The orientation of the element in the preview window has no effect on the orientation of the element when you insert it in your plan. You can change an element’s orientation after you have inserted it in the plan. You can also right-click in the preview window and select a different display mode for the image, or switch the preview to a 2D plan view. Status Bar The Status bar is located at the bottom of the screen. It displays helpful prompts while you are working on your design project. For example, if you are inserting a retaining wall, it may display “Pick first insertion point”. The Status bar also includes a selection of drawing aid buttons such as ORTHO and OBJSNAP. 12 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Chapter Drawing & Editing Basics Everything is point-and-click in 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design, making it extremely simple to use and leaving you free to be as creative as you like. While working on your project, you will probably want to edit it as you go. You can select elements by clicking on them, or by drawing a selection window around them. This chapter describes the basics of inserting elements, and selecting them for editing. 13 Chapter 3 Drawing & Editing Basics Inserting Elements When you select a tool from the Insert menu or one of the insertion toolbars, you are in Insertion mode. To insert an element, you select it in the catalog panel, then click in your drawing area. Many elements can be inserted with a single mouse click. Single-click elements include plants, furniture and accessories. Line-drawn elements, like retaining walls and edging, require that you select two points to define the element’s start point and end point. The points you pick determine the element’s length and angle. Areadrawn elements, such as pads, fills and plateaus, are drawn by picking a series of points to define their outline. In many cases, on-screen dimensions are displayed as you draw, making it easy to create line-drawn and area-drawn elements at the correct length or size. Once you insert an element in your drawing area, you can: • • • Continue inserting the same element Select a different element in the catalog to insert Right-click and select Finish to end the command and return to Selection mode Selecting an Insertion Method for Line-Drawn Elements Some elements, like retaining walls and edging, are drawn by picking two or more points. By default, line-drawn elements use the Pick and drag insertion method. With this method, you keep the mouse button depressed after clicking the first point, drag the mouse to draw the element, then release your mouse button to select the next point. If you prefer to pick points without dragging, you can select the Pick Points insertion method. With this method you do not have to keep your mouse button depressed to draw the element (i.e. you do not have to click and drag the mouse). Once you’ve selected the first point, you can simply move your mouse in the direction you want the element to run, then click to select the next point. To select an insertion method for line-drawn elements: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab. In the Insertion Method area, select either Pick Points or Pick and drag. Click OK. 2. 3. 4. Tip: When an Insert tool is active, double-clicking inserts the element and finishes the command at the same time. Note, however, that doubleclicking after you’ve already inserted an element will, in most cases, insert another element. Tip: If you are in Selection mode, you can insert any element currently accessible in the catalog by clicking the desired element in the catalog and dragging your pointer into the drawing area. Note: If you don’t see the exact element you want to insert in the catalog, you can create custom elements to suit your needs. See Adding and Editing Elements in a Catalog on page 223. Going into Selection Mode for Editing When you have finished using an insertion tool, either by double-clicking or selecting Finish from the right-click menu, you automatically go into Selection mode. When in Selection mode, you can select elements in your drawing area and edit them. You can also go into Selection mode by clicking the Select/Edit button on any insertion toolbar, or by selecting Select/Edit from the Edit menu. 14 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Disabling Pre-Selection 3 Disabling Pre-Selection When pre-selection is turned on, elements highlight when you hover your cursor over them. Tooltips are also displayed that tell you what the elements are as they are highlighted. By default, pre-selection is enabled. On some systems, disabling pre-selection can help improve program speed. To disable pre-selection: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab. In the Visual Aids area, uncheck the Enable Pre-Selection check box. Click OK. To select a group of elements by creating a selection window: 1. Going from either left to right, or right to left, drag a selection window around the elements you want to select. Any elements touching the selection window will be selected (they do not need to be totally enclosed). To select all elements: 1. Select Edit > Select All. To re-select the elements you last selected: 1. Select Edit > Select Previous. 2. 3. 4. Deselecting Elements When you select elements, you can remove individual elements from your selection set. You can also deselect everything that is currently selected. To deselect individual elements: 1. 2. Hold down your Shift key. Click the element you want to deselect. Selecting Elements for Editing When in Selection Mode, you can select elements for editing. You can select individual elements, a group of elements, or all elements. When an element is selected, it is highlighted in a different color (usually light green). One or more handles are also displayed on the element. If you are having trouble selecting the element you want, you may want to use the View Filter to make other elements non-selectable. This makes selection of the element much easier. See Selection Filtering on page 29. To select a single element: 1. Click on the element. To deselect everything in your selection set: 1. Select Edit > Deselect All, or right-click in the drawing area and select Deselect All, or simply click in a blank spot somewhere else in the drawing area. Accessing Edit Tools Most elements can be moved once they are selected by simply clicking and dragging them. Some can also be stretched or rotated. You can access a full menu of edit tools by right-clicking in the drawing area, or by selecting Edit > Modify Elements. Menus vary depending on the element selected. Typical tools are Properties, Move, Rotate, Duplicate, and Delete. If two types of elements are selected, only tools that are common to both element types are available. Each chapter includes editing instructions specific to the contents of that chapter. For information about general editing, see Editing Your Design on page 143. User’s Guide To select multiple elements by clicking: 1. 2. Click the first element you want to select. Hold down the Shift key and click on the rest of the elements you want to select. The most recent selection is green and prior selections are blue. 15 Part 2 Controlling the View 2D and 3D Viewing View Filter page 19 page 25 Chapter 2D and 3D Viewing 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design offers a variety of options for viewing your design in 2D and 3D. When working in 2D plan view, you can magnify or reduce the view using the Zoom Realtime tool. You can also magnify a selected area using the Zoom Window tool. The Zoom to Fit tool magnifies your design so it fills the drawing area, creating the largest view possible. The Pan tool lets you pan the view in any direction by simply clicking and dragging. You can instantly switch to 3D view with a couple of mouse clicks. You can choose from the realistic 3D Perspective view, which is like viewing your design from a distance, or 3D Overview, which eliminates distance from the view and lets you see the design from above. While viewing in 3D you can choose from a variety of display types, including Wireframe, Patterned and Rendered. This chapter describes all basic 2D and 3D viewing features. For information about advanced viewing features, see page 209. 19 Chapter 4 2D and 3D Viewing Viewing the 2D Plan When you start a drawing, the default view is a 2D plan view. It shows your design in a "flat" view, as if you were looking at it from above. 2D plan view is ideal for inserting and arranging elements in your plan. Viewing a 2D Designer’s View By default, your design is displayed in a wireframe 2D plan view. You can use the 2D Designer’s View tool to quickly display a rendered version of the 2D plan view. In a rendered view, materials are applied to the elements and terrain, creating a more realistic view. To display your model in 2D plan view: • • Select View > 2D Plan View, or Click the 2D Plan View button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar, or Right-click in the drawing area and select 2D Plan View To view a 2D Designer’s View: 1. Select View > 2D Designer’s View, or click the 2D Designer’s View button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. • You can control which elements are displayed by using the View Filter. See Filtering the Display on page 26. While in 2D plan view you can zoom in and out, and pan your drawing. 20 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Viewing in 3D 4 Viewing in 3D You can instantly switch to 3D view by selecting either the 3D Perspective or 3D Overview tool. In a 3D Perspective view, the scale of an element decreases according to its distance from the viewer, creating a more real-world view. The 3D Overview is an orthographic view, where the view is set from a common angle, and distance is eliminated from the view. This creates an instant close-up of your design. To view a 3D overview: 1. To view a 3D perspective view: 1. Select View > 3D Model View > 3D Perspective, or click the 3D Model View button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select 3D Perspective. Select View > 3D Model View > 3D Overview, or click the 3D Model View button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select 3D Overview. Tip: If you have your cameras turned on in 2D, you can switch to a 3D view by selecting a camera, right-clicking it, then selecting Look Through. Note: By default, 3D views are displayed in Rendered mode. For information about changing the display mode, see Changing the Display Mode on page 22. For information about moving around in a 3D view, or creating or customizing 3D views, see Custom Viewing on page 209. User’s Guide 21 Chapter 4 2D and 3D Viewing Zooming In and Out The Zoom Realtime tool continuously magnifies or shrinks the view as you click and drag with your mouse. You can zoom in and out in 2D plan view or any 3D view. To zoom in and out: 1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Realtime, or click the Zoom Realtime button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. To zoom in, click and drag toward the top of the screen. To zoom out, click and drag toward the bottom of the screen. When the view is the desired size, release your mouse button. Zooming to Fit the Drawing Area The Zoom to Fit tool instantly extends your drawing to the edges of the drawing area. This ensures your entire drawing is visible at the most maximized view possible, and makes full use of the drawing area. To zoom the drawing to fit the drawing area: 1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom to Fit, or click the Zoom to Fit button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. 2. 3. Note that the terrain is considered part of your drawing. If you want to zoom just your design to fit the drawing area, you need to turn the terrain off before using Zoom to Fit. Note: The Zoom to Fit tool is not available in 3D perspective views. Tip: You can also zoom in and out using the scroll button on your mouse. Zooming a Selected Area Using the Zoom Window tool you can magnify a particular area of your design by drawing a selection window around it. To zoom a selected area: 1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Window, or click the Zoom Window button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Your cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Click and drag a selection window around the area you want to magnify. Panning Across a Drawing Using the Pan tool you can move the current view of your design to bring a particular part of your design into view. This is especially useful when the area you want to view is currently not visible because you have zoomed in on your drawing. To pan the current view: 1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Pan, or click the Pan button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Click in the drawing. Hold your mouse button down. Drag the view in the direction you want to pan. Release the mouse button. 2. 2. 3. 4. 5. Note: The Pan tool is not available in 3D perspective views. Changing the Display Mode By default, your design is displayed in Wireframe mode when you are in 2D plan view. When you switch to a 3D view, the default display mode is Rendered mode. There are five display modes you can choose from. Note: The Zoom Window tool is not available in 3D perspective views. 22 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Changing the Display Mode Wireframe. Each line in your design is visible, creating a “see-through” view. Patterned. Applies patterns of lines (hatching) to the surfaces of elements. 4 Hidden Line. Removes lines from the view that you would normally not see, creating an opaque view. To view Wireframe mode: • • Select View > Display Mode > Wireframe, or Click the Display Mode button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Wireframe To view Hidden Line mode: • • Rendered. Applies materials to the elements and terrain, creating a very realistic view. Select View > Display Mode > Hidden Line, or Click the Display Mode button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Hidden Line To view Rendered mode: • • Select View > Display Mode > Rendered, or Click the Display Mode button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Rendered Rendered Outline. Applies materials to the elements and terrain, and outlines surface edges in a single, dark line for increased surface definition. To view Rendered Outline mode: • • Select View > Display Mode > Rendered Outline, or Click the Display Mode button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Rendered Outline To view Patterned mode: • • Select View > Display Mode > Patterned, or Click the Display Mode button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Patterned User’s Guide 23 Chapter View Filter The program’s unique View Filter feature lets you decide which elements you want displayed at any given time. It also lets you make selected elements non-selectable, which is sometimes necessary when trying to select a particular element in your drawing. 25 Chapter 5 View Filter Filtering the Display The View Filter provides precise control over what elements are displayed in a view at any given time. You can display/hide: • • • selected or all landscaping elements text and dimension elements an entire location, or multiple locations (if your project contains a house drawn in another 3D Home Design program) • building elements on a specific location or multiple locations Note: Using the View Filter does not delete elements from your drawing. It just hides them from view. To access the View Filter: • Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. Tabs Display Filter The View Filter dialog contains three tabs: Building, Landscape and Notation. The Building tab lists all building element types related to architectural models drawn in other 3D Home Design programs. If you expand an element, a list of building locations is displayed below the element name. If you choose to sort by location, a list of building locations is displayed with a list of elements under each one. The Landscape tab contains a list of exterior landscaping elements, and the Notation tab contains text, dimensions, project trace images, and electrical wiring. The icons in the Display column indicate whether or not that location or element is currently displayed. Clicking an icon toggles the icon to the opposite state (on or off). Location or element is turned on Location or element is turned off If sorting by element on the Building tab, this means that the element is displayed on some locations and not on others. If sorting by location, it means that some elements on the location are displayed and some are not. Clicking Display All turns on all locations and elements on the current tab. Clicking Display None turns off all locations and elements on the current tab. The View Filter dialog also lets you control whether or not individual locations and elements can be selected. See Selection Filtering on page 29. Elements Displaying/Hiding Landscape Elements Landscape elements include things like the terrain, site boundary, paths and plants. Using the View Filter you can display or hide selected landscape element types. To filter landscape elements: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. 26 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Displaying/Hiding Building Elements 2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Landscape tab. A list of landscape elements is displayed. 4. If you want to change the visibility of an element on all locations, click the element’s eye icon in the Display column. If you want to filter an element on a specific location, click the element’s plus sign (+) to display a list of building locations. Then, click the location’s eye icon in the Display column. Eye Icon 5 Element is turned on Element is turned off You can also filter elements by location. If you enable the Location radio button in the Sort By area, a list of building locations is displayed. You can then expand the location you want to filter elements on to display a list of elements. Toggling the eye icons of elements in this list filters elements on the selected location. 3. Click the eye icons in the Display column to turn elements on or off. Element is turned on Element is turned off 4. Click OK. Displaying/Hiding Building Elements Building elements are things like walls, doors and windows - things that make up an architectural model. Using the View Filter you can display or hide selected element types on all or selected building locations if you have opened a drawing from another 3D Home Design program which contains a model. To display or hide building elements: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. In the View Filter dialog, select the Building tab. In the Sort By area, make sure the Element radio button is selected. User’s Guide If you want to make all elements on all locations visible, click the Display All button. If you want to make all elements on all locations non-visible, click Display None. 5. Once you’ve selected what you want to filter, click OK. 2. 3. 27 Chapter 5 View Filter Displaying/Hiding Building Locations If you have opened a drawing from another 3D Home Design program which contains a model, you can turn individual locations on or off. When you turn a location off, all building elements on that location are hidden from view. To display or hide entire locations: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. In the View Filter dialog, select the Building tab. In the Sort By area, enable the Location radio button. A list of building locations is displayed in the window. 2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab. 3. In the Text row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn text on or off. Text is turned on Text is turned off 2. 3. 4. Click OK. Displaying/Hiding Dimensions Using the View Filter you can display or hide dimensions in your drawing. To filter dimensions from view: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab. 4. Click the eye icon next to the name of the location you want to display or hide. Location is turned on Location is turned off 2. 5. Click OK. Displaying/Hiding Text Using the View Filter you can display or hide text in your drawing. To filter text from view: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. 3. In the Dimension row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn dimensions on or off. Dimensions are turned on Dimensions are turned off 4. Click OK. Displaying/Hiding Electrical Wiring If you have opened a drawing from another 3D Home Design program which contains a model with electrical wiring, you can use the View Filter 28 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images to display or hide electrical wiring in your drawing. To filter electrical wiring from view: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab. 3. In the Project Trace Image row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn wiring on or off. Project trace image is turned on Project trace image is turned off 4. Click OK. 5 2. Selection Filtering When your model contains a number of elements, it can sometimes be difficult to select certain ones because of proximity or overlapping edges. If you have inserted a house template, for example, it can sometimes be difficult to select landscaping elements that you have inserted near it. 3. In the Electrical Wiring row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn wiring on or off. Wiring is turned on Wiring is turned off You can use the View Filter to stop certain elements from being selected. To access the View Filter: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. Tabs Selection Filter 4. Click OK. Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images If you have opened a drawing from another 3D Home Design program which contains a project trace image, you can hide the image if you want using the View Filter. This is an alternative to deleting the image. To filter project trace images from view: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab. Elements 2. User’s Guide 29 Chapter 5 View Filter The View Filter dialog contains three tabs: Building, Landscape and Notation. The Building tab lists all building element types related to architectural models drawn in other 3D Home Design programs. When you expand an element, all of your building locations are listed below the element. The Landscape tab contains a list of exterior landscaping elements, and the Notation tab contains text, dimensions, project trace images, and electrical wiring. The icons in the Selection column indicate whether or not that location or element is currently selectable. Clicking an icon toggles the icon to the opposite state (selectable or non-selectable). Element or location is selectable Element or location is not selectable 2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Landscape tab. A list of landscape elements is displayed. Making Landscape Elements Selectable or Non-Selectable Landscape elements include things like the terrain, site boundary, paths and plants. Using the View Filter you can make selected landscape element types selectable or non-selectable. To make landscape elements selectable or non-selectable: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. 3. Click the filter icons in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off. Element is selectable Element is not selectable 4. If you want to make all landscape elements selectable, click the Select All button. If you want to make all landscape elements nonselectable, click Select None. Click OK. 5. Making Building Elements Selectable or Non-Selectable Building elements are things like walls, doors and windows - things that make up an architectural model. Using the View Filter you can make individual element types selectable or nonselectable on all or selected building locations. To change the selectability of building elements: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. 30 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Making Building Locations Selectable or Non-Selectable 2. 3. 4. In the View Filter dialog, select the Building tab. In the Sort By area, make sure the Element radio button is selected. If you want to change the selectability of an element on all locations, click the element’s filter icon in the Selection column. If you want to filter an element on a specific location, click the element’s plus sign (+) to display a list of building locations. Then, click the location’s filter icon in the Selection column. Filter Icon 5 Making Building Locations Selectable or Non-Selectable When you make a location non-selectable, no elements on that location can be selected in any view. To make a location selectable or non-selectable: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. In the View Filter dialog, select the Building tab. In the Sort By area, enable the Location radio button. A list of building locations is displayed in the window. 2. 3. Element is selectable Element is not selectable You can also filter elements by location. If you enable the Location radio button in the Sort By area, a list of building locations is displayed. You can then expand the location you want to filter elements on to display a list of elements. Toggling the filter icons of elements in this list filters elements on the selected location. 4. Click the filter icon next to the name of the location you want to make selectable or nonselectable. Location is selectable Location is not selectable If you want to make all locations selectable, click the Select All button. If you want to make all locations non-selectable, click Select None. If you want to make all elements on all locations selectable, click the Select All button. If you want to make all elements on all locations non-selectable, click Select None. 5. Once you’ve selected what you want to filter, click OK. 5. Once you’ve made your selections, click OK. Making Text Selectable or NonSelectable Using the View Filter you can make text selectable or non-selectable. To make text selectable or non-selectable: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. User’s Guide 31 Chapter 5 View Filter 2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab. Making Electrical Wiring Selectable or Non-Selectable Using the View Filter you can make electrical wiring selectable or non-selectable. Electrical wiring can be found in models that were drawn in other 3D Home Design programs. To make electrical wiring selectable or nonselectable: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab. 3. In the Text row, click the filter icon in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off. Text is selectable Text is not selectable 2. 4. Click OK. Making Dimensions Selectable or Non-Selectable Using the View Filter you can make dimensions selectable or non-selectable. To make dimensions selectable or nonselectable: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab. 4. 3. In the Electrical Wiring row, click the filter icon in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off. Wiring is selectable Wiring is not selectable Click OK. 2. Making Project Trace Images Selectable or Non-Selectable You can use the View Filter to make project trace images selectable or non-selectable. Project trace images can be found in drawings from other 3D Home Design programs. 3. In the Dimension row, click the filter icon in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off. Dimensions are selectable Dimensions are not selectable To make project trace images selectable or non-selectable: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. 4. Click OK. 32 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Making Project Trace Images Selectable or Non-Selectable 2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab. 5 3. In the Project Trace Image row, click the filter icon in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off. Project trace image is selectable Project trace image is not selectable 4. Click OK. User’s Guide 33 Part 3 Site Design Starting with a House Terrain Modeling Property Lines page 37 page 45 page 41 35 Chapter Starting with a House There are many different ways you can start your landscape plan. One of the first things you may want to do is create a focal point in your plan, such as a house, and insert landscaping around it. 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design’s catalog contains a wide selection of house templates for you to insert. If you have a drawing from another 3D Home Design program which contains a house, you can open it in 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design, then use the landscaping tools to add landscaping around it. If you don’t want to include a house in your landscape plan, you can begin by inserting any element you want using a tool from the Insert menu or Landscape toolbar. You can also recreate the topography of your lot using tools from the Terrain toolbar. 37 Chapter 6 Starting with a House Inserting a House Template A house template is basically the exterior shell of a finished home. If you are creating a landscape plan, you can insert a house template to serve as the focal point of your plan. You can choose from a wide selection of house templates to insert. Once inserted, you can move and rotate the template, as well as edit its size and appearance. To insert a house template: 1. Select Insert > Exterior Structures, or click the Exterior Structures button on the Landscape toolbar. In the catalog, select the House Templates group, then select the template you want to insert. Without dragging, move your pointer into the drawing area. Position the template where you want it, then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish. always square or rectangular, and does not necessarily follow the shape of the house outline. Bounding Box 2. 3. This can interfere with the selection of other elements near the house. If you have inserted elements around the house, such as plants, and want to select them, you may want to use the View Filter to make the house template nonselectable for ease of editing your landscape plan. Another thing to note is that the house template’s exterior walls are not visible in 2D. You only see the roof line. If you want to insert things like fills up against the exterior walls of the house, you will need to either draw them in 3D, or draw them in 2D and then move them into place in 3D. To make a house template non-selectable: 1. Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. In the View Filter dialog, select the Landscape tab. Click the selection filter icon next to the Exterior Structures item. Selection Filter icon 4. Click OK. 4. 5. Note: For information about moving, rotating or editing the properties of a house template, see the Exterior Structures chapter on page 83. A Note About House Templates House templates are an excellent starting point for any landscape design. Although a house template looks like a real house, it can’t be edited like a real model can. It is considered a singleclick element, so clicking on any part of the template selects the entire house. It is important to note that when you select the house template, the invisible bounding box is 2. 3. 38 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Opening a Project from Another 3D Home Design Program 6 Opening a Project from Another 3D Home Design Program If you have drawn a house in another 3D Home Design program, you can open that drawing in 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design. You can open any BLD file created in any of the following programs: • • • • 3D Home Architect® 5 3D Home Architect® Home Design 6 3D Home Design Suite 5 3D Home Architect® Design Suite 6 If the startup dialog is on your screen, just click Open a Saved Project, then select the project to open. If the program is already running, you can open a saved project using the Open tool. To open a project if the program is already running: 1. 2. 3. Select File > Open, or click the Open button on the Standard toolbar. In the Open dialog, navigate to the location where you saved the project. Select the project to open, then click Open. Note: You can also open drawings from 3D Home Landscape Designer 5. User’s Guide 39 Chapter Property Lines You may want to know where your property lines are, especially if you are working in a confined or unusually-shaped area. Lot lines and setbacks can be found on a survey plan or surveyor’s certificate. Using the Site Boundary tool you can define and insert a site boundary, which shows your property lines, stakes, and building setbacks. Site Boundary 41 Chapter 7 Property Lines Defining Your Building Lot You can use the Site Boundary tool to insert a site boundary in your 2D plan. A site boundary consists of two continuous lines: one that shows the legal property boundary (lot lines), and one that defines the building envelope (setbacks). The site boundary can be annotated with peg markers, bearing text, length text and peg numbers. It will only appear in 2D wireframe view. 3. Peg (stake) In the catalog, select the boundary you want to insert. If you want to create a custom site boundary, right-click the lot that is closest to the one you want to create, then select Catalog Manager. See Defining a Custom Building Lot on page 43. You can also insert a lot for now and edit it later if you want. Position the boundary where you want it, then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish. 4. Lot Line Setback Line 5. Tip: You can put a fence along your lot lines to show where the lot lines are in 3D. See Inserting a Fence on page 56. To move the site boundary: 1. Click on one of your lot lines to select the entire site boundary. A blue grab handle is displayed at the center of the site boundary. Hover your pointer over the center blue grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to move the boundary, then release your mouse button. The catalog contains some pre-defined site boundaries that you can edit to suit your needs. You can also create a new site boundary element from scratch if you prefer. Note: Site boundaries are visible in 2D plan view only. To insert a site boundary: 1. In 2D plan view, select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom to Fit, or click the Zoom to Fit button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. This will bring the entire terrain into view so you can insert the boundary easily and precisely. Select Insert > Terrain > Site Boundary, or click the Site Boundary button on the Terrain toolbar. 2. 3. To edit the site boundary: 1. 2. 3. Click on one of your lot lines to select the entire site boundary. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Make your changes in the Site Boundary dialog, then click OK. For more information about site boundary properties, see Defining a Custom Building Lot on page 43. 2. To delete the site boundary: 1. Click on one of your lot lines to select the entire site boundary. 42 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Defining a Custom Building Lot 2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. 7. On the Basic property page, click the Direction drop box, then select the method you want to use to define your lot lines. The Ref. angle option lets you define lot lines using compass points (N, S, E, W) and specifying a reference angle in degrees, minutes and seconds (e.g. 5d12’10”). The Angle bearing option lets you use angles to specify a forward and back bearing. 8. Define your first lot line by filling in the fields in the parameters window, then clicking Add. The line appears in the preview window, and its properties appear in the Segments window. Continue defining lot lines. When you are ready to define the last lot line, just check the Closing check box, then click Add. This closes the last line created back to the first line. • 7 Defining a Custom Building Lot If the building lot you want to insert is not available in the catalog, you can create a custom one on the fly. Defining a site boundary involves entering a bearing and length from one peg to the next. This information can be found on a survey plan or surveyor’s certificate. To define a custom building lot: 1. If you haven’t already accessed the Catalog Manager, select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager. In the Catalog Manager, make sure Site Boundary is selected in the Element drop box. In the Select a Type window, select the group you want to add the site boundary to (Rectangle Lots, Pie Shape Lots or Square Lots). If your boundary has an unusual shape, you may want to create a new group for it. Select Catalog > Add Element. 9. 2. 3. 4. To edit an existing lot line, select it in the upper window, edit its parameters in the lower window, then click Update. • To delete a lot line, select it in the upper window, then click Delete. • To delete all existing lot lines, click Clear All. 10. Once you’ve defined the size and shape of the site boundary, select the Annotation tab in the Site Boundary dialog. 5. 6. In the Site Boundary dialog, click Clear All. Type a name for your boundary in the Name edit box. User’s Guide 43 Chapter 7 Property Lines 11. Specify the desired annotation settings. You can choose round or square peg markers, and specify the marker’s diameter. You can also choose to include bearing text, length text and peg text (numbers), as well as specify the position and style for the text. 83’-4” @ N 90d00’00” E 12. Once your lot lines are defined, click OK. The boundary is added to the current catalog. 13. Click OK. You can now insert the boundary in your drawing. 44 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Chapter Terrain Modeling 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design goes well beyond home design by letting you recreate the topography of the lot your home will be built on. By default, a basic 150’ x 150’ grass terrain is displayed in the drawing area. In 2D view, only the boundary of the terrain is shown (you may need to zoom out to see it). Contour lines may also be visible depending on the terrain’s defined properties. In 3D view, the terrain is displayed as a solid, 3D object. It can be viewed in wireframe, hidden line or rendered form. You add hills, berms, plateaus and slopes to your terrain to create an incredibly realistic-looking building site. 45 Chapter 8 Terrain Modeling Defining the Basic Terrain You can control the base level, size (length and width), mesh spacing, and contour interval of the terrain. You can also select a texture to use when displaying the terrain in rendered view (the default is grass). You can specify whether or not you want the terrain to cut around your building, and select the location that you want the terrain to cut around. To define the terrain: 1. Select Settings > Terrain Settings, or click the Terrain Settings button on the Settings toolbar. 9. 7. desired value in the Grid Mesh Spacing edit box. To change the texture used for the terrain, click the Select button in the Material area, then make your selection in the Materials dialog. To display contours on your terrain, enable the Show contours check box. In the Start edit box, enter the elevation of the first contour. In the Interval check box, enter the desired spacing between contours. Click OK. 8. Creating Hills and Valleys You can add hills to your terrain with a single mouse click. You can control the height of a hill as well as its peak shape. Generally, the diameter of the hill base is the same as the hill height. You can insert multiple hills together to create one larger hill. Also, if you insert hills next to other terrain elements, like plateaus or slopes, the elements will automatically blend together. 2. 3. In the Terrain Settings dialog, set your terrain options: To force the terrain to cut around a building, enable the Auto-cut terrain around building check box, then select the building location that you want the terrain to cut around from the Select Building Location to cut around drop box. To change the level at which the base of the terrain sits, type the desired value in the Terrain Base Level edit box. This value is measured from 0. To change the overall size of the terrain, enter the desired values in the Length and Width edit boxes. To change the spacing between mesh lines (when viewing the terrain in Wireframe, Hidden Line or Patterned view), enter the 4. 5. 6. 46 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Creating Berms and Trenches To create a hill or valley: 1. Select Insert > Terrain > Hills / Valleys, or click the Hills/Valleys button on the Terrain toolbar. 8 Creating Berms and Trenches A berm is a mound or bank of soil without formal sides. You often see large berms on the sides of highways, which are used for noise control. On a reduced scale, a natural berm can provide some interesting benefits in a backyard landscape. These include: Climate control. Berms act as windbreaks, channeling air flow. Berms can create a warmer microclimate or direct cooling breezes. Privacy. A berm can be a "friendly fence" in the back yard or between your house and a sidewalk. 2. In the Hills / Valleys dialog, specify the height of the hill in the Height edit box. Entering a negative value will create a valley. Using the Zenith slider control, select a peak shape for the hill. Click OK. Click to insert the hill. You can insert multiple hills if you like. Right-click and select Finish. 3. 4. 5. 6. Vertical interest. You can add variety and texture to your gardens with berms, change the view from your outdoor sitting areas, or even hide eyesores with them. Noise control. A berm can cut down on traffic noise if you live on a busy street or near a schoolyard. Berms may be shored with stone, bricks, or timbers, and planted with groundcovers, perennials, annuals, trees, etc. You can control the height of a berm as well as its peak shape. To move a hill/valley: 1. 2. Click in the center of the hill to select it. Click and drag the center grab handle to move the hill, then release your mouse button. To edit the height or peak shape of a hill: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click in the center of the hill to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Edit the properties in the Hills/Valleys dialog. Click OK. To remove a hill/valley: 1. 2. Click in the center of the hill to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. User’s Guide 47 Chapter 8 Terrain Modeling To create a berm/trench: 1. Select Insert > Terrain > Berms/ Trenches, or click the Berms/ Trenches button on the Terrain toolbar. To move a berm/trench: 1. Click in the center of the berm to select it. A blue grab handle is displayed in the middle of the berm’s central line. Click and drag the central blue grab handle to move the berm, then release your mouse button. 2. To rotate a berm/trench: 1. Click in the center of the berm to select it. Grab handles are displayed along the berm’s central line. Click and drag a grab handle to rotate the berm around the selected point. Release your mouse button. 2. 2. In the Berms/Trenches dialog, specify the height of the berm in the Height edit box. Entering a negative value creates a trench. Using the Zenith slider control, select a peak shape for the berm. Click OK. Select two points to define the length of the top of the berm. The berm will be created downward and outward from this line. 3. 3. 4. 5. To edit the height or peak shape of a berm: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click in the center of the berm to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Edit the properties in the Berms/Trenches dialog. Click OK. To delete a berm/trench: 1 2 1. 2. Click in the center of the berm to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. Creating Plateaus 6. Right-click and select Finish. To stretch a berm/trench: 1. 2. 3. Click in the center of the berm to select it. Grab handles are displayed at either end of the berm’s central line. Click and drag an end grab handle to stretch the berm, then release your mouse button. You can move the end point to any position on the screen. A plateau is a relatively large, flat area of land situated above the adjacent land. Adding a plateau to your terrain involves clicking a few points to define the shape of the plateau. You can control the height of the plateau as well as its peak shape. Note that if you insert a plateau in close proximity to other terrain elements, such as hills, the elements automatically blend together. 48 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Creating Slopes To create a plateau: 1. Select Insert > Terrain > Plateaus, or click the Plateaus button on the Terrain toolbar. To reshape a plateau: 1. Click in the center of the plateau to select it. Corner grab handles are displayed on the central outline of the plateau. Click and drag a corner grab handle to stretch the shape, then release your mouse button. 8 2. To move a plateau: 1. 2. Click in the center of the plateau to select it. Right-click and select Move Whole Element, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Whole Element. Click and drag to move the plateau, then release your mouse button. 2. In the Plateaus dialog, specify the height of the plateau in the Height edit box. Entering a negative value creates an excavated area. Using the Zenith slider control, select a general shape for the plateau. The pointier the shape, the steeper the sides will be. Click OK. In the drawing area, select points to define the outline of the top of the plateau. Note that the last point picked always closes back to the start point, so you don’t have to pick the start point again. The plateau will be created downward and outward from your outline. 3. 3. To edit the height or peak shape of a plateau: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click in the center of the plateau to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Edit the properties in the Plateaus dialog. Click OK. 4. 5. To delete a plateau: 1. 2. Click in the center of the plateau to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. 1 2 Creating Slopes 4 3 6. Right-click and select Finish. To stretch a plateau: 1. 2. Click in the center of the plateau to select it. Click on the edge of the central outline that you want to stretch. A blue grab handle is displayed on the selected edge. Click and drag the edge to stretch the plateau, then release your mouse button. A slope is an area of land with a natural incline. It is often common practise to slope the land away from the sides of a house so that water drains away from it rather than towards it. When you create a slope, you select two points: the first point is the starting point of the slope, and the second point determines the length and direction of the slope. If the slope comes into contact with other terrain elements, like hills and plateaus, the elements automatically blend together. 3. User’s Guide 49 Chapter 8 Terrain Modeling To create a slope in your terrain: 1. Select Insert > Terrain > Slopes, or click the Slopes button on the Terrain toolbar. 8. Move your cursor in the direction you want the slope to run. A stretchable arrow is displayed. 2. 3. In the Slopes dialog, enable the Height button. In the Height edit box, enter the desired height for the top of the slope. Note that slopes are built from the top surface of the terrain up. Enable the Angle button. In the Angle edit box, enter an angle (in degrees) for the slope. The higher the value, the steeper the slope. Click OK. Select a start point for the slope. The slope will incline from this point. Note that the sides of the slope will extend to the very edges of the terrain. 9. 4. 5. 6. 7. When the arrow is pointing in the right direction and is the desired length, click to insert the slope. The longer the arrow, the more gradual the slope will be. A shorter arrow will result in a steeper slope. Note that if the point you pick is not on the edge of the terrain, the land will level off at the top of the slope. 10. Right-click and select Finish. Note: If you insert another slope, and that slope comes into contact with an existing slope, the new slope will insert on top of the existing slope. To stretch a slope: 1. Click in the center of the slope. The central arrow is displayed, and grab handles are displayed at either end of it. Click and drag an end grab handle to stretch the arrow, then release your mouse button. 2. 50 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Creating Slopes Note that you can also rotate the arrow by selecting a different position for it while clicking and dragging. This changes the direction of the slope. To move a slope: 1. 2. Click in the center of the slope. The central arrow is displayed. Click and drag the arrow’s center blue grab handle to move the slope, then release your mouse button. 8 To edit the height of a slope: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click in the center of the slope to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Slopes dialog, enable the Height radio button. Edit the height in the Height edit box. Click OK. To edit the angle (steepness) of a slope: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click in the center of the slope to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Slopes dialog, enable the Angle radio button. Edit the height in the Angle edit box. Click OK. To delete a slope: 1. 2. Click in the center of the slope to select it. The central arrow is displayed. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. User’s Guide 51 Part 4 Hardscaping Fences & Gates Decks & Patios Retaining Walls Sidewalks, Pathways & Driveways Exterior Structures Exterior Furniture Exterior Accessories Landscape Lighting Irrigation page 55 page 63 page 75 page 79 page 83 page 87 page 91 page 95 page 99 Chapter Fences & Gates Fences can add beauty, privacy and security to your property. Fences are drawn with ease in 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design. Just point and click to fence off a yard in seconds! The catalog contains an assortment of fences in a variety of materials, including concrete, stone and wood. You can even add a white picket fence for that classic look. Once you’ve drawn your fence you can easily pop a gate into it. You can choose a style that matches your fence, or choose an entirely different style to create a stylish accent. 55 Chapter 9 Fences & Gates Inserting a Fence To insert a fence, you draw it just like a wall by selecting a start point and end point. This allows you to create a fence of any length. You can continue selecting points in other directions to add on to the fencing (if you want to fence around your yard, for example). Tip: If you have inserted a site boundary in your plan, you can draw your fence on top of the lot lines for ease. The fence then acts as a visual indicator of your property extents in 3D. To insert a fence: 1. Select Insert > Fences/Gates > Fences, or click the Fences/Gates button on the Landscape toolbar and select Fences. 5. Select an end point for the fence. If you want you can continue adding sections to the fence in any direction by simply selecting points. 3 4 2 1 6 5 2. In the catalog, select the fence type you want to insert. Select a start point for the fence. Move your cursor in the direction you want the fence to run. The fence stretches as you move your cursor. 6. Right-click and select Finish. 3. 4. 56 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Stretching a Fence Layout 9 Stretching a Fence Layout You can stretch a fence layout by clicking and dragging one of the fence segments. To stretch a fence layout: 1. 2. Click on the fence segment you want to move. Position your pointer over the center blue grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to stretch the layout, then release your mouse button. Parts of a Fence Post Boards Secondary Post Rails 3. Changing the Length of a Fence You can lengthen or shorten a fence by clicking and dragging its end points. To change the length of a fence: 1. 2. Select the fence you want to lengthen or shorten. Click and drag one of the fence’s end handles to stretch the fence, then release your mouse button. Editing the Properties of a Fence You can change the height of a fence, specify whether or not you want the fence to hug the terrain, edit the size and position of fence posts, and edit the dimensions of the rails and boards. To edit the properties of a fence: 1. 2. Click on the fence to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Creating a Break in a Fence When you create a break in a fence, you can select the fence portions on either side of the break independently. You may want to insert one or more breaks in a fence so that you can then remove certain segments of it. To create a break in a fence: 1. 2. 3. Select the fence you want to break. Right-click and select Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break. Double-click where you want to break the fence. User’s Guide 57 Chapter 9 Fences & Gates 3. To change the type of fence, click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area. Choose from General, Privacy, Picket or Ranch. The General style just inserts a plain, flat surface. To change the height of the fence, edit the values in the Fence Height edit box. If you want the bottom of the fence to hug the terrain, check the Hug Terrain? check box, then select either Raked or Stepped from the Slope Type drop box. Max. Post Spacing. The maximum allowable spacing between posts. If you stretch the fence, the spacing between posts increases. More posts are added to prevent the spacing from exceeding the maximum. Post Width. The width (and depth) of fence posts. Post Extension. The distance the fence posts extend past the top of the fence boards. Post Rotation. Determines the rotation of the connecting post where two fence segments connect. Choosing Half Way rotates the connecting post half way between the angle. Choosing None leaves the connecting post aligned to the first fence. 7. Raked 4. 5. To change the dimensions of the top, middle or bottom rail, edit the parameters in the Rails area. Rail Width. The width of the rail members. Rail Depth. The thickness of the rail members. Top Rail Height. The distance from the bottom of the fence to the top rail. Middle Rail Height. The distance from the top rail to the middle rail. Bottom Rail Height. The distance from the middle rail to the bottom rail. Stepped 8. To change the dimensions of the boards in a privacy or picket fence, edit the parameters in the Boards area. Board Style. Choose either Squared or Pointed. You would typically see pointed boards on a picket fence. Board Width. The width of one fence board. Board Depth. The thickness of one fence board. Board Spacing. The distance from the center of one board to the center of the next board. Board Offset. The offset of the bottom of the fence boards from the ground. 6. To change the dimensions or position of the fence posts, edit the parameters in the Posts area. Secondary Post Position. Choosing Centered starts the spacing of intermediate posts from the middle of the fence to create a balanced look. Choose From Start starts the spacing of intermediate posts from the first main post. 9. When you’re done editing properties, click OK. 58 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Changing the Fencing Material 9 Changing the Fencing Material You can apply a different color or material to the boards, posts or rails of a fence. For example, you can select a different type of wood for a wood fence. To apply different materials to a fence: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the fence is visible in the view. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. Click on the fence component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the fence (fence boards, posts and rails). Clicking on one component will apply the material to all components of the same type. For example, clicking on one post will apply the material to all posts. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish. Inserting a Gate The catalog contains a variety of gate types, including wood, picket and ranch style gates. Gates just pop themselves right into fences. Naturally, if you are inserting a gate in a fence, you want to choose a gate size that corresponds to the fence size. For example, if your fence is a 6’ wood privacy fence, you would likely choose the 6’ wood privacy gate. Gates are shown slightly open so you can identify them easily in 2D and 3D views. To insert a gate: 1. Select Insert > Fences/Gates > Gates, or click the Fences/Gates button on the Landscape toolbar and select Gates. 3. 4. 2. 3. In the catalog, select the gate you want to insert. Position the gate where you want it, then click to insert it. The gate will automatically pop itself into the fence when you position it in the fence. 5. Deleting a Fence You can delete a fence in a couple of easy steps. To delete a fence: 1. 2. Select the fence. You can select multiple fence segments using Shift+click. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. User’s Guide 59 Chapter 9 Fences & Gates 4. Right-click and select Finish. 2. Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Swing, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Flip Swing. Editing the Properties of a Gate You can change the height and width of a gate as well as the dimensions of the rails and boards. You can also control how far the gate is open in 2D and 3D views. To edit the properties of a gate: 1. 2. Click on the gate to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Moving a Gate You can move a gate back and forth inside a fence by simply clicking and dragging it. To move a gate: 1. 2. 3. Click on the gate to select it. Hover your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to move the gate, then release your mouse button. Flipping a Gate You can use the Flip Opening tool to flip an entire gate around. If the gate originally opened out, it now opens in; if it was hinged on the left, it is now hinged on the right (and vice versa). To flip a gate: 1. 2. Click the gate to select it. Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Flip Opening. 4. 3. To change the type of gate, click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area. Choose from General, Privacy, Picket or Ranch. The General style just inserts a plain, flat door. To change the overall size of the gate, edit the values in the Gate Width and Gate Height edit boxes. To change the swing type, select either Left or Right from the Swing Type drop box. This determines which side the gate is hinged on. If you want to change how far the gate is open in 3D views, edit the percentage in the 3D Percent Open edit box. To change how far the gate is open in 2D views, change the percentage in the 2D Percent Open edit box. Flipping a Gate’s Swing Use the Flip Swing tool to flip only the swing of a gate. The gate will be hinged on the opposite side, but it will still open in the same direction, either in or out. To flip a gate swing: 1. Click the gate to select it. 5. 6. 60 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Deleting a Gate 7. To change the dimensions of the top, middle or bottom rail, edit the parameters in the Rails area. Rail Width. The width of the rail members. Rail Depth. The thickness of the rail members. Top Rail Height. The distance from the bottom of the gate to the top rail. Middle Rail Height. The distance from the top rail to the middle rail. Bottom Rail Height. The distance from the middle rail to the bottom rail. 8. To change the dimensions of the boards in a privacy or picket fence, edit the parameters in the Boards area. Board Style. Choose either Squared or Pointed. You would typically see pointed boards on a picket fence. Board Width. The width of one fence board. Board Depth. The thickness of one fence board. Board Spacing. The distance from the center of one board to the center of the next board. Board Offset. The offset of the bottom of the gate boards from the ground. 9. When you’re done editing properties, click OK. 9 Deleting a Gate You can delete a gate in a couple of easy steps. When you delete a gate, the fence returns to its original state. To delete a gate: 1. 2. Select the gate. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. User’s Guide 61 Chapter Decks & Patios A great way to add more living space to your home without building an addition is to build a deck or patio. With outdoor living spaces becoming more and more desirable, 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design gives you all the tools you need to create the exact look you want, quickly and easily. You can create the precise size and shape of deck you want using the Deck tool. You can even add levels to your deck if you want for a truly customized look. Once you’ve got the main structure up, you can point and click to insert stairs of your choice. Creating a patio involves clicking a few points to define the outline of the slab using the Pads tool. 63 Chapter 10 Decks & Patios Building a Deck with the Deck Tool You can use the Deck tool to build a deck of virtually any shape and size. By default, decks include posts and railings. You can opt to include skirting if you want. Once you’ve inserted a deck you can move, stretch, rotate, raise or lower it if needed, as well as edit its properties, which include settings for posts, railings and skirting. Decks are inserted at a height that is relative to the current building location. For information about building locations, see page 199. To create a deck: 1. In the Building Locations drop box, select the location you want to associate the deck with. The height of a deck is determined by the Height above current location variable in the deck properties. You can edit this value after the deck has been inserted if necessary. Select Insert > Decks > Decks, or click the Decks button on the Landscape toolbar and select Decks. 3. 4. 5. the last point you pick is always closed back to the start point.) 2 3 1 4 Right-click and select Finish. Moving a Deck You can move a deck using the Move Whole Element tool. To move a deck: 1. 2. Click on one of the deck’s edges to select the deck. Right-click and select Move Whole Element, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Whole Element. Alternatively you can Shift+click to select the remaining edges. Click and drag the deck to move it. Release your mouse button. 2. Rotating a Deck 3. In the catalog, select the decking material you want to use. Select a start point for the deck outline. Continue selecting points until the outline is defined. (You do not have to select the start point again because You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a deck about a selected point. To rotate a deck: 1. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges. A grab handle is displayed at each corner. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around. Click and drag to rotate the deck, then release your mouse button. 4. 2. 3. 4. Note: When you rotate a deck, the direction of the deck boards does not change. You can change the decking direction if you want. 64 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Changing the Direction of Deck Boards 10 Changing the Direction of Deck Boards You can use the Set Decking Direction tool to change the direction of your deck boards. To change the direction of deck boards: 1. 2. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges. Right-click and select Set Decking Direction, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Set Decking Direction. Select two points to define a line that runs in the direction you want the deck boards to run. The deck boards update to match the direction of the line. Curving a Deck Edge You can curve a deck edge using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the deck edge to curve it, or select a point to curve to. To curve a deck edge by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click on the deck edge you want to curve. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the deck edge to the desired curve. Release your mouse button. 3. To curve a deck edge to a selected point: 1. 2. 3. Click on the deck edge you want to curve. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve. Select the point you want to curve to. The deck edge automatically curves to the point. Click to finish. Stretching a Deck You can stretch a deck in any direction by clicking and dragging one of its edges. To stretch a deck: 1. 2. Click on the deck edge you want to stretch. Hover your pointer over the center blue grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to stretch the deck, then release your mouse button. 4. Changing the Height of a Deck By default, decks are inserted at the floor level of the current building location. To change the height of a deck: 1. 2. 3. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. On the Support property page, edit the value in the Height above current location edit box. Click OK. 3. Reshaping a Deck You can change the shape of a deck by stretching any of its corners. To reshape a deck: 1. 2. 3. Click on the deck to select it. A grab handle is displayed at each corner. Click and drag a corner grab handle to stretch the deck. Release your mouse button. 4. Editing Deck Post Properties By default, the support system of a deck consists of 4”x4” wood posts spaced 8’ apart. Posts are sunken 3’-6” into the ground for adequate support. You can edit the post type, post spacing and post depth. You can also disable posts altogether if you want. User’s Guide 65 Chapter 10 Decks & Patios To edit deck post properties: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Decks dialog, select the Support tab. If you want to remove posts from the deck, uncheck the Include Posts check box in the Posts area. To select a different member to use for deck posts, click the Select button in the Posts area, then make your selection from the catalog. To change the spacing between posts along beams, edit the value in the Spacing along Beam edit box. To change the depth of the posts in the ground, edit the value in the Depth below ground level edit box. This effectively changes the overall height of the post, but does not affect the portion shown above ground. Click OK. Editing the Deck Frame You have complete control over the way a deck is constructed. You can specify the way you want the beams constructed in relation to the posts. You can also select specific materials to use for deck boards, beams and joists, as well as edit the spacing and overhang of these members. To edit the deck frame: 1. 2. 3. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Decks dialog, select the Frame tab. 5. 6. 7. 8. Displaying Footings Under Deck Posts Footings are not included in your deck by default, but you can display them instantly by editing deck properties. You can also choose the footing material you want to use. To create footings under deck posts: 1. 2. 3. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. On the Support property page, check the Include Footings check box in the Footings area. Click the Select button in the Footings area, then select the desired footing type from the catalog. Click OK. 5. 4. To change the way the beams are constructed, click on the desired configuration in the Construction area. Beams are the vertical members that rest on or are attached to the posts, and that support the deck joists. To select a different material for the deck boards, click the Select button in the Decking area, then make your selection from the catalog. To edit the spacing between deck boards, edit the value in the Spacing edit box in the Decking area. To change the amount the deck boards hang over the deck frame, edit the value in the Overhang edit box in the Decking area. 6. 4. 7. 5. 66 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Changing the Railing Style 8. To adjust the angle of the deck boards in relation to the joists, edit the value in the Angle from Joists edit box. To select a different material for the deck joists, click the Select button in the Joists area, then make your selection from the catalog. 3. In the Decks dialog, select the Accessories tab. 10 9. 10. To edit the spacing between joists, edit the value in the Spacing edit box in the Joists area. 11. To change the amount the joists hang over the beams, edit the value in the Overhang edit box in the Joists area. The general rule of thumb is to limit the extension to 1/3 of their length. 12. To select a different material for the deck beams, click the Select button in the Beams area, then make your selection from the catalog. 13. To change the amount the beams extend past each other, edit the value in the Overhang edit box in the Beams area. 14. Once you’ve specified the deck frame properties, click OK. 4. 5. 6. In the Railings area, click the Select button. Select the desired railing type from the catalog. Click OK. Controlling the Display of Deck Railings You can delete railings from selected deck edges to provide access to the deck. If you want to remove all the railings on a deck, you need to select all of the decks edges first. To control the display of deck railings: 1. Click on the deck edge you want to remove a railing from, or add a railing to. A blue grab handle is displayed at the center of the selected deck edge. If you want to remove railings from other edges as well, use Shift+click to select the additional edges. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Decks dialog, select the Accessories tab. Disable the Include railing on selected edges check box. Click OK. Changing the Railing Style You can change a deck’s railing type by making a selection on the Accessories property page. To change a deck’s railing style: 1. 2. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. 2. 3. 4. 5. Note: If you add stairs to your deck, an opening will be automatically created in the railing. User’s Guide 67 Chapter 10 Decks & Patios Controlling the Display of Deck Skirting Skirting is basically screening along the bottom of a deck that conceals the underside of the deck frame. It can also keep out animals and debris. Most decks display skirting. You can choose to turn skirting off if you want. If displaying skirting, you can select the skirting material you want to use, such as lattice. To display skirting on your deck: 1. 2. 3. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Decks dialog, select the Accessories tab. Inserting Openings in a Deck Once you have created a deck, you can insert a custom opening in it of virtually any shape and size using the Cut Opening tool. You create the opening by picking points to define its outline. To insert an opening in a deck: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges. Right-click and select Cut Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Cut Opening. Select a start point for the opening. Continue selecting points to define the opening. As you select points, the opening is created. The last point picked is always connected back to the start point to form a closed shape, so you don’t have to pick the start point again. When you have selected your final point, right-click and select Finish. 5. Resizing a Deck Opening You can resize a deck opening by clicking and dragging one of its edges. To stretch a deck opening: 1. Click on the opening edge you want to move. The entire opening is highlighted, and a blue grab handle appears at the center of the opening edge you selected. Hover your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag in the direction you want to stretch. When the opening is the correct size, release your mouse button. 4. If you want to display skirting on your deck, check the Include skirting on selected edges check box. Click the Select button in the Skirting area, then select the desired skirting material from the catalog. Click OK. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Reshaping a Deck Opening You can change the shape of a deck opening by stretching its corners. You can do this by clicking and dragging. 68 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Curving a Deck Opening Edge To reshape a deck opening by stretching: 1. 2. 3. Click on the opening to select it. A grab handle is displayed at each corner. Click and drag a corner grab handle to stretch the opening. Release your mouse button. 4. 3. Hover your pointer over one of the grab handles to display the Move cursor. Click and drag the opening off the deck until it disappears. 10 Deleting a Deck You can remove a deck completely in a couple of easy steps. To remove a deck: 1. 2. Click on one of the deck’s edges to select the deck. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. Curving a Deck Opening Edge You can curve an opening edge using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the opening edge to curve it, or select a point to curve to. To curve an opening edge by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click on the opening edge you want to curve. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the opening edge to the desired curve. Release your mouse button. Note: If you added stairs to your deck, you need to remove them separately. Adding Stairs to a Deck You can add a staircase to your deck with a single mouse click. Stairs automatically snap to your deck for easy insertion, and the railings on the deck are automatically removed to allow for the stair opening. By default, stairs extend from the deck platform to down to the terrain, so there’s absolutely nothing you need to calculate. Also, deck stairs have a railing on both sides by default, but you can remove one or both of them if you want after the stairs have been inserted. You can choose either pressure treated or cedar stairs, and edit the stair dimensions to get the exact result you want. To add stairs to a deck: 1. Select Insert > Decks > Deck Stairs, or click the Decks button on the Landscape toolbar and select Deck Stairs. To curve an opening edge to a selected point: 1. 2. 3. Click on the opening edge you want to curve. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve. Select the point you want to curve to. The opening edge automatically curves to the point. Click to finish. 4. Removing Deck Openings You can remove an opening from a deck by selecting all sides of the opening, then clicking and dragging it away from the deck. Note: You cannot remove an opening using Delete. To remove a deck opening: 1. 2. Click on one of the opening’s edges. Shift+click to select the remaining sides. User’s Guide 69 Chapter 10 Decks & Patios 2. In the catalog, select the type of stairs you would like to insert. Move your pointer close to the deck edge. Position the stairs where you want them, then click to insert them. Right-click and select Finish. Editing the Size of Deck Stairs You can edit the overall height and width of deck stairs, the width of the steps, and the riser height. To edit the size of deck stairs: 1. 2. 3. Click on the staircase to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Edit the properties on the Basic tab. 3. 4. Moving Deck Stairs You can move a deck staircase by clicking and dragging it along the deck edge. Note that you can’t move deck stairs away from the deck, but you can move them to another deck edge. Also, the opening in the deck railing adjusts with the move of the deck stairs. To move a staircase by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click on the staircase to select it. Hover your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag the staircase along the deck edge to move it. Release your mouse button. Parts of a Staircase Riser Extend Stair. The option selected determines where the base of the stairs sit. You can either change where they extend to, or specify an explicit height. By default, the deck stairs are inserted at deck level and run down to the terrain. Down to terrain. Extends the stairs down to the ground. Tread Down to previous location. Extends the stairs to the floor level of the building location below the current one. Nosing Stringer Down to deck location. Extends the stairs down to the floor level of the building location the deck is associated with. You might use this if you have raised your deck above the floor level of the current location and want to extend the stairs down. Explicit Height. Extends the stairs down a specific distance that you define in the Overall Height edit box. 70 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Controlling the Display of Railings on Deck Stairs Overall Height. Available only if Explicit Height is selected in the Extend Stair drop box, this lets you define a fixed height for the stairs. Max. Riser Height. The maximum distance allowed between individual steps. Note that if your riser height exceeds the width of the member you are using for your riser boards, two or more boards will be inserted for each riser. Tread Run. The width of each step. The width of a step is measured from the nose of the step to the riser of the next step. Note that if your tread run exceeds the width of the member you are using for your treads, two or more boards will be inserted for each step. Overall Width. The width of the stairs measured from one end of a step to the other end of the step. 10 Editing Stringers, Risers and Treads You can specify detailed settings for the stringers, risers and treads on your deck stairs. To edit stringer, riser or tread details: 1. 2. 3. Click on the staircase to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Deck Stairs dialog, select the Details tab. Controlling the Display of Railings on Deck Stairs By default, deck stairs have a railing on both sides. You can choose to have a railing on the left side only or right side only, or remove them altogether. To remove railings from deck stairs: 1. 2. 3. Click on the staircase to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Railings area, uncheck the Include Railings check box if you don’t want any railings on your deck stairs. If you want one or more railings on the stairs, leave this check box enabled. If you want a railing on the left side of the stairs, select Railing on left side from the drop box. If you want a railing on the right side of the stairs, select Railing on right side from the drop box. If you want a railing on both sides of the stairs, select Railing on both sides. Click OK. 4. To change the stringer style, click the appropriate graphic in the Stringer area. Choose from Notched, Stringer and Side. Edit the remaining properties as desired. They are described below. Stringer Spacing. The spacing between the outside stringers and intermediate stringers. Height. The distance from the bottom of the stringer to the underside of the tread/riser intersection. Specifying a stringer height that is the same as the overall height of the staircase creates a staircase that is completely 5. 4. 5. User’s Guide 71 Chapter 10 Decks & Patios closed on the sides. In other words, the stringers go right to the ground. 6. Click OK. Deleting Deck Stairs You can delete a set of stairs in a couple of easy steps. To delete deck stairs: 1. Click on the stairs. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. Height = 12” Height = 4’ 2. Width. The thickness of the stringer members. Riser Closed Riser. Inserts riser boards under the steps. If you leave this disabled, the staircase will be open under the treads. Select. Click this button to select a riser board to use. Spacing. When the riser comprises two or more boards, this is the spacing between the boards. Angle. The tilt of the riser boards. A value of 0 means the board is perpendicular to the step (straight up and down). A value above 0 tilts the riser down toward the back of the staircase. The maximum angle allowed is 20º. 0º 20º Creating a Patio You can use the Pads tool to insert a concrete, brick or wood patio directly on your terrain. By drawing the outline of the patio, you control its precise size and shape. By default, patio slabs hug the terrain they are inserted on. If the terrain is not flat where you are inserting the patio, you may want to turn off the slab’s Hug Terrain option. This makes the slab flat and positions it at the Terrain Base Level specified in your Terrain Settings. You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply a different color or material to the patio after it has been inserted. To create a patio: 1. 2. Select Insert > Terrain > Pads, or click the Pads button on the Terrain toolbar. In the catalog, select the type of slab you want to insert. Select a start point for the slab. Continue selecting points to define the outline of the slab. Note that the last point picked always closes back to the start point, Tread Select. Click this button to select the type of wood to use for your steps. Spacing. When each step comprises two or more boards, this is the spacing between those boards. Nosing. The distance the step extends past the riser. Overhang.The distance the ends of the steps extend past the outer stringers. 3. 4. 72 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Moving a Patio Slab so you don’t have to pick the start point again. 1 4 4. 5. Click and drag to stretch the slab. Release your mouse button. 10 Reshaping a Patio Slab You can change the shape of a patio slab by stretching its corners. You can do this by clicking and dragging. To reshape a patio slab: 1. 2 5. 3 2. Click on the slab to select it. A grab handle is displayed at each corner. Click and drag a corner grab handle to stretch the slab. Release your mouse button. Right-click and select Finish from the shortcut menu. 3. To disable the slab’s Hug Terrain option: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click on the slab to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. On the Basic property page, uncheck the Hug Terrain? check box. Click OK. Rotating a Patio Slab You can rotate a patio slab using the Rotate tool. To rotate a patio slab: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click on the slab to select it. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around. Click and drag to rotate the slab, then release your mouse button. Moving a Patio Slab You can move a patio slab by clicking and dragging it. To move a patio slab: 1. 2. Click on the slab to select it. Right-click and select Move Whole Element, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Whole Element. Click and drag the slab to move it, then release your mouse button. Editing the Thickness of a Patio Slab You can edit the thickness of a patio slab on the slab’s Basic property page. To edit the thickness of a patio slab: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click on the slab to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Pads dialog, select the Basic tab. Enter the desired thickness in the Thickness edit box. Click OK. 3. Resizing a Patio Slab You can resize a patio slab by stretching one of its edges. To resize a patio slab by stretching it: 1. 2. 3. Click on the slab to select it. Click on the edge you want to stretch. Hover your pointer over the grab handle to display the Move cursor. User’s Guide 73 Chapter 10 Decks & Patios Applying a Different Material to a Patio You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply a different color or material to your patio. For example, you may want to change the patio to stone. To apply a material to a patio: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D view and make sure the patio is visible in the view. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. Click on the patio surface. The material is immediately applied. Right-click and select Finish. 3. 4. 5. Deleting a Patio Slab You can delete a patio slab in a couple of easy steps. To delete a patio slab: 1. 2. Click on the slab to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. 74 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Chapter Retaining Walls A well-built retaining wall system can preserve the natural shape of your land, reinforce hills and slopes, and protect your home from possible landslides or soil erosion. Retaining walls can also be an attractive addition to a garden or the overall landscaping around your home. Drawing retaining walls is easy — just point and click. 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design automatically displays dimensions as you draw, and connects corners for you. Once inserted, any wall can be moved, rotated, lengthened, shortened, broken, curved or deleted. This lets you create the exact wall layout that you want. The catalog contains wood, concrete and concrete block retaining walls in a variety of sizes. You can change the properties of walls, such as their thickness and appearance, as well as create custom walls. 75 Chapter 11 Retaining Walls Drawing Retaining Walls Retaining walls are a snap to draw — just point and click. To draw a retaining wall: 1. Select Insert > Terrain > Retaining Walls, or click the Retaining Walls button on the Terrain toolbar. In the catalog, select the wall type you want to insert. Select a start point for the wall. Move your cursor in the direction you want your wall to run. Its length is shown as you draw the wall. Note: By default, drawing is constrained to 5º angles. To release this constraint, turn off your Angle Snap. 5. 6. 7. When the wall is the length you want, click to set its endpoint. Continue selecting points to add on to the wall if you want. When you are done, right-click and select Finish. 5. Wall Height. The physical height of the wall. Extension Below Base. The height of the wall below the terrain. Once the properties are set, click OK. Lengthening and Shortening Retaining Walls You can lengthen or shorten an individual wall by clicking and dragging one of the wall’s ends. To lengthen or shorten a retaining wall: 1. 2. Select the wall. A grab handle is displayed at each wall end. Hover your pointer over the wall end you want to stretch. The Stretch cursor is displayed. Click and drag the wall end until it has reached the desired length. Release your mouse button. 2. 3. 4. 3. 4. Rotating a Retaining Wall You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a wall about a selected point. To rotate a retaining wall: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the wall. A grab handle is displayed at each wall end. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate. Position your pointer over the grab handle you want to rotate the wall around. Click and drag to rotate the wall, then release your mouse button. Editing a Retaining Wall’s Height, Width or Elevation You can edit the size properties of a wall by making changes on the wall’s Basic property page. To edit a retaining wall’s size properties: 1. Select the wall whose properties you want to change. You can select multiple walls using Shift+click if you want. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Walls dialog, select the Basic tab. Edit the properties as desired: Width. The thickness of the wall. Curving a Retaining Wall You can curve a retaining wall using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the wall to curve it, or select a point to curve to. To curve a retaining wall by clicking and dragging: 1. Click the wall to select it. 2. 3. 4. 76 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Breaking a Retaining Wall 2. 3. 4. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the wall to the desired curve. Release your mouse button. 4. 3. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. Click on the wall face that you want to apply the material to. The material is immediately applied. Right-click and select Finish. 11 To curve a retaining wall to a selected point: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the wall to select it. Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve. Select the point you want to curve to. The wall automatically curves to the point. Click to finish. 5. Breaking a Retaining Wall You can break a retaining wall into two or more segments using the Break tool. The segments can then be edited individually. To break a retaining wall: 1. 2. Click the wall to select it. Right-click in the drawing area and click Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break. Double-click the point where you want to break the wall. This divides the wall into two segments that can be moved, stretched or manipulated individually. Deleting a Retaining Wall You can delete a retaining wall in a couple of easy steps. To delete a retaining wall: 1. 2. Select the wall to remove. You can select multiple walls using Shift+click. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. 3. Applying Different Finishes to Retaining Walls You can apply different finishes to your retaining walls using the handy Materials Paintbrush. The materials catalog contains an excellent selection of brick, concrete, wood and stone finishes. To apply a material to a retaining wall: 1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the wall face you want to apply the material to is visible in the view. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. 2. User’s Guide 77 Chapter Sidewalks, Pathways & Driveways Sidewalks, pathways and driveways add to the overall aesthetics of your landscape and provide access to different areas of your property. Drawing them is easy — just select a start point, then point and click in the direction you want the pathway to run. Continue picking points to add segments if you want. The 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design catalog includes an excellent selection of pathway materials including wood, sand, gravel, concrete, brick and asphalt. You can even create a forest path! A number of different widths are available, but you can create a custom width if you want. Paths 79 Chapter 12 Sidewalks, Pathways & Driveways Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways and Driveways The catalog contains a wide variety of path types, including boardwalks, sand paths, gravel paths, brick paths, and driveways. The width and thickness of a path is determined by the path’s properties in the catalog. You control the length and direction of the path as you draw it. Dimensions are displayed as you draw each segment. By default, all paths hug the terrain they are inserted on. If the terrain is not flat where you are inserting the path, you may want to turn off the path’s Hug Terrain option. This makes the path flat and positions it at the Terrain Base Level specified in your Terrain Settings. To create a path: 1. Select Insert > Terrain > Paths, or click the Paths button on the Terrain toolbar. In the catalog, select the path type you want to insert. Select a start point for your path. Note that your insertion point is on the center line of the path. Move your cursor in the direction you want the path to run, then select an endpoint for the path. You can continue selecting points in any direction to add more sections to the path if you want. Tip: To create a smooth curve in the path, click several points with a short distance between each point. 5. Double-click to finish, or right-click and select Finish. Double-click after last point Next Point Start Point Next Point 2. To disable the path’s Hug Terrain option: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click on the path to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. On the Basic property page, uncheck the Hug Terrain? check box. Click OK. 3. 4. Stretching a Path Element You can lengthen, shorten or rotate a sidewalk, pathway or driveway by clicking and dragging its end or corner grab handles. If the path has multiple segments, you can also stretch the path layout by moving one of its segments. To stretch a path by clicking and dragging: 1. Select the path. If the path has multiple segments and you want to stretch the whole path layout by moving a segment, click on the segment you want to move. 80 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Moving a Path Element 2. Click and drag one of the path’s end or corner grab handles to stretch or reshape the path, then release your mouse button. If you are moving a segment to stretch the entire layout, hover your pointer over the segment’s center blue handle, then click and drag to stretch the path. 12 Applying Different Materials to Path Elements You can apply a different material to any path, sidewalk or driveway using the quick and handy Materials Paintbrush. To apply a material to a path element: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the path is visible in the view. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. The Landscape category contains a good selection of pavers, flagstone, gravel and sand. Click anywhere on the path surface. Right-click and select Finish. Moving a Path Element You can move an entire path using the Move Whole Element tool. To move a path: 1. 2. Click on the path to select it. Right-click and select Move Whole Element, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Whole Element. Click and drag the path to where you want it, then release your mouse button. 3. 3. Editing the Thickness or Width of a Path Element You can edit the thickness of your path material or the path’s overall width. To edit the thickness or width of a path: 1. Select the path. If the path has multiple segments, you do not have to select them all. Property changes affect the whole path. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. To edit the thickness of the path, enter a value in the Thickness edit box. To edit the width of the path, enter a value in the Width edit box. Click OK. 4. 5. Deleting a Path Element You can delete a sidewalk, pathway or driveway in a couple of easy steps. To delete a path: 1. 2. Click on the path to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. 2. 3. 4. 5. User’s Guide 81 Chapter Exterior Structures 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design offers an excellent selection of exterior structures to make your outdoor living space more functional. These include play gyms, swings, sandboxes, trampolines, tennis and volleyball courts, detached garages, sheds, gazebos, arbors, garden boxes, greenhouses, pools and hot tubs. If you are creating a landscape plan and do not have a model in your project, you can insert a house template to create your landscape plan around. All structures are inserted with a single mouse click and can be easily moved, rotated and edited. Exterior Structures 83 Chapter 13 Exterior Structures Inserting Exterior Structures Inserting exterior structures is easy — just point and click. To insert an exterior structure: 1. Select Insert > Exterior Structures, or click the Exterior Structures button on the Landscape toolbar. In the catalog, select the structure you want to insert. Position the structure where you want it, then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish. Editing the Size of an Exterior Structure You can edit the height, width and depth of most exterior structures. To edit the size of an exterior structure: 1. 2. 3. Select the structure. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Edit the values on the Basic page. The Uniform Scale option ensures that the element scales uniformly when you change one of its dimensions. 2. 3. 4. Moving Exterior Structures You can move exterior structures in plan view by simply clicking and dragging them. To move an exterior structure: 1. 2. Select the element you want to move. Hover your pointer over the element’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to move the element. When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button. 4. Click OK. 3. 4. Rotating Exterior Structures You can rotate exterior structures by clicking and dragging them. To rotate an exterior structure: 1. 2. Select the element you want to rotate. Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor. Click and drag to rotate the element. When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button. Applying Different Colors or Materials to Exterior Structures You can change the look of an exterior structure by applying different colors or materials to it. To apply different colors or materials to an exterior structure: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the structure is visible in the view. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. 3. 4. 84 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Deleting an Exterior Structure 3. In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply. Click on the component you want to apply the material to. Some structures can have different materials applied to individual parts. For example, the roof of a shed can be different from the shed’s walls. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish. 13 4. 5. Deleting an Exterior Structure You can delete an exterior structure in a couple of easy steps. To delete an exterior structure: 1. 2. Select the structure. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. User’s Guide 85 Chapter Exterior Furniture The 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design catalog includes a great selection of exterior furniture so you can relax, eat and entertain outdoors. Furniture types include patio tables, patio chairs, picnic tables, loungers and benches. All it takes is one click to insert any piece of furniture. Exterior Furniture 87 Chapter 14 Exterior Furniture Inserting Exterior Furniture Inserting exterior furniture is easy — just point and click. To insert exterior furniture: 1. Select Insert > Exterior Furniture, or click the Exterior Furniture button on the Landscape toolbar. In the catalog, select the element you want to insert. Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish. Editing the Size of Exterior Furniture You can edit the height, width and depth of most exterior furniture. To edit the size of exterior furniture: 1. 2. 3. Select the element. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Edit the values on the Basic page. The Uniform Scale option ensures that the element scales uniformly when you change one of its dimensions. 2. 3. 4. Moving Exterior Furniture You can move exterior furniture in plan view by simply clicking and dragging it. To move exterior furniture: 1. 2. Select the element you want to move. Hover your pointer over the element’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to move the element. When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button. 4. Click OK. 3. 4. Rotating Exterior Furniture You can rotate exterior furniture by clicking and dragging it. To rotate exterior furniture: 1. 2. Select the element you want to rotate. Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor. Click and drag to rotate the element. When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button. Applying Different Colors or Finishes to Exterior Furniture You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply a color, fabric or finish to any exterior furnishing element. To apply materials to exterior furniture: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the furnishing element is visible in the view. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. 3. 4. 88 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Deleting Exterior Furniture 3. In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply. You can find an assortment of colors in the Paint category. Click on the component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the element. For example, you can apply a specific color to a tabletop, and a different color to the legs of the table. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish. 14 4. 5. Deleting Exterior Furniture You can delete any piece of exterior furniture in a couple of easy steps. To delete exterior furniture: 1. 2. Select the element. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. User’s Guide 89 Chapter Exterior Accessories It’s always those small touches that really pull a design together. 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design makes adding decorative accents and accessories a breeze - just point and click to insert a vast array of items, including fireplaces, fountains, wind chimes, decorative columns, corner accents, garden borders, weather vanes, door mats, patio umbrellas, trellises, bird baths, mailboxes, cars and planters. Exterior Accessories 91 Chapter 15 Exterior Accessories Inserting Exterior Accessories Inserting exterior accessories is easy — just point and click. Accessories are inserted at a logical height, but you can edit their elevation after insertion if you want. To insert an exterior accessory: 1. Select Insert > Exterior Accessories, or click the Exterior Accessories button on the Landscape toolbar. In the catalog, select the accessory you want to insert. Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish. 4. When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button. Raising or Lowering an Exterior Accessory You can raise or lower an outdoor element using the Elevate tool. To change the elevation of an exterior accessory: 1. 2. Select the element. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the element. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the element above the ground. Click OK. 2. 3. 3. 4. Moving Exterior Accessories You can move exterior accessories in plan view by simply clicking and dragging them. To move an exterior accessory: 1. 2. Select the element you want to move. Hover your pointer over the element’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to move the element. When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button. 4. Editing the Size of an Exterior Accessory You can edit the height, width and depth of most exterior accessories. To edit the size of an exterior accessory: 1. 2. 3. Select the element. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Edit the values on the Basic page. The Uniform Scale option ensures that the 3. 4. Rotating Exterior Accessories You can rotate exterior accessories by clicking and dragging them. To rotate an exterior accessory: 1. 2. Select the element you want to rotate. Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor. Click and drag to rotate the element. 3. 92 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Changing the Look of an Exterior Accessory element scales uniformly when you change one of its dimensions. right-click and select Finish. 15 Deleting an Exterior Accessory You can delete an exterior accessory in a couple of easy steps. To delete an exterior accessory: 1. 2. Select the element. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. 4. Click OK. Changing the Look of an Exterior Accessory You can change the look of an exterior accessory by applying different colors or materials to it. To apply different colors or materials to an exterior accessory: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the accessory is visible in the view. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply. Click on the component you want to apply the color or material to. Some accessories can have different materials applied to their individual parts. When you are finished applying materials, 3. 4. 5. User’s Guide 93 Chapter Landscape Lighting Outdoor lighting can beautify any landscape and offers security and visibility at night. Lighting can also play an important part when you create exterior 3DTrueView™ renderings. 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design offers both light posts and path lights to enhance the exterior design of your home. You can even turn them on and off! Outdoor lighting is inserted directly on the terrain. Just point and click! Landscape Lighting 95 Chapter 16 Landscape Lighting Inserting Landscape Lighting Inserting outdoor light posts and path lights is easy — just point and click. To insert a landscape light fixture: 1. Select Insert > Landscape Lighting, or click the Landscape Lighting button on the Landscape toolbar. In the catalog, select the light you want to insert. Position the light where you want it, then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish. element scales uniformly when you change one of its dimensions. 2. 3. 4. Moving a Landscape Light Fixture You can move outdoor light fixtures in plan view by simply clicking and dragging them. To move a landscape light fixture: 1. 2. Select the element you want to move. Hover your pointer over the element’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to move the element. When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button. 4. Click OK. Editing a Light Fixture’s Light Source A light source is usually a type of light bulb. You can edit a light fixture’s light source to achieve a different lighting effect. To edit a light fixture’s light source: 1. 2. Select the light fixture whose properties you want to edit. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. 3. 4. Editing the Size of a Landscape Light Fixture You can edit the overall height, width and depth of light fixtures. To edit the size of a landscape light fixture: 1. 2. 3. Select the light fixture. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Edit the values on the Basic page. The Uniform Scale option ensures that the 96 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Turning a Light On or Off 3. Select the Lights tab. Selecting Middle positions the light in the center of the fixture, and selecting Minimum or Maximum positions it on the left or right side. If you select Custom you can enter a specific value in the adjacent edit box which is relative to the center position. For example, entering -3 moves the light source 3” left from the center. Changing the Y value moves the light source forward or backward. Selecting Minimum brings the light source all the way forward, and selecting Maximum moves it to the back of the fixture. Changing the Z value moves the light source up or down. Selecting Minimum positions the light source at the bottom of the fixture, while selecting Maximum positions it at the top of the fixture. 7. 4. To replace the currently selected light source with another type, click Edit, then select a light source from the Light Sources dialog. To add a light source to the fixture, click Add, then select a light source from the Light Sources dialog. Once you’ve specified the properties, click OK. 16 Turning a Light On or Off By default, lights are on when you insert them. You can virtually turn a light off by disabling its light source. To turn a light on or off: 1. 2. 3. Select the light fixture you want to turn on or off. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Select the Lights tab. eye icon 5. 6. To delete a light source from the light fixture, click Delete. To edit the position of the light source in relation to the light fixture, specify the X, Y and Z coordinates in the Light Position area. Coordinates are measured from the bottom center of the fixture. The small red box in the preview window indicates the current position of the light source. Changing the X value moves the light source left or right. User’s Guide 97 Chapter 16 Landscape Lighting 4. 5. To turn the light on or off, click the eye icon next to the light source name. Click OK. Changing the Look of a Landscape Light Fixture You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different colors or materials to different parts of a light fixture. To change the look of a light fixture: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the light fixture is visible in the view. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply. Click on the component you want to apply the material to. For some fixtures, materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the fixture. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish. 3. 4. 5. Deleting a Landscape Light Fixture You can delete an outdoor light fixture in a couple of easy steps. To delete a light fixture: 1. 2. Select the light fixture. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. 98 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Chapter Irrigation You can insert pop-up sprinklers in your landscape plan with a single mouse click. When you insert a sprinkler, the coverage of the spray is outlined with a dashed line. Irrigation 99 Chapter 17 Irrigation Inserting Irrigation The catalog contains a wide selection of pop-up sprinklers with varying ranges of spray. You insert a sprinkler by simply pointing and clicking with your mouse. When you insert a sprinkler, the coverage of the spray is outlined with a dashed line. To insert pop-up sprinklers: 1. Select Insert > Irrigation, or click the Irrigation button on the Landscape toolbar. In the catalog, select the sprinkler you want to insert. Position the sprinkler where you want it, then click to insert it. You can continue inserting more sprinklers if you want. Right-click and select Finish. 3. Click and drag to rotate the sprinkler, then release your mouse button. Editing the Height of a Sprinkler All sprinklers in the catalog are 3” tall. You can edit the height of a sprinkler if you want. To edit the height of a sprinkler: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the sprinkler. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. On the Basic page, edit the value in the Height edit box. Click OK. 2. 3. Editing a Sprinkler’s Spray Coverage You can edit the distance covered by a sprinkler’s spray. To edit a sprinkler’s spray properties: 1. 2. 3. Select the sprinkler. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Edit the size values on the Basic property page. For most sprinklers you would edit the Width and Depth values. The Adjustable sprinkler in the catalog lets you specify a custom radius and included angle for the spray. Click OK. 4. Moving Sprinklers You can move a sprinkler by simply clicking and dragging it. To move a sprinkler: 1. 2. Select the sprinkler. Hover your pointer over the sprinkler’s square grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to move the element. When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button. 4. 3. 4. Deleting a Sprinkler You can delete a sprinkler in a couple of easy steps. To delete a sprinkler: 1. 2. Select the sprinkler. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. Rotating Sprinklers You can rotate a sprinkler (and its spray) by simply clicking and dragging its rotation handle. To rotate a sprinkler: 1. 2. Select the sprinkler. Hover your pointer over the sprinkler’s triangular grab handle. 100 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Part 5 Plants & Gardens Garden Beds, Ponds & Other Filled Areas Edging Trees, Shrubs & Plants page 103 page 107 page 111 Chapter Garden Beds, Ponds & Other Filled Areas In the real world, one of the first things you need to do to create a garden is to dig out a bed for your plants. In 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design, you can create a garden bed instantly by simply picking points to define the outline of the bed. The bed is then automatically filled with a material of your choice, such as soil or bark. The versatile Fills tool is handy for more than just garden beds. Choose the Water fill to create a pond, or the Sand fill to create a horseshoe pit. The possibilities are endless. Fills 103 Chapter 18 Garden Beds, Ponds & Other Filled Areas Creating Filled Areas You can use the Fills tool to define an area filled with soil, sand, gravel, concrete, bark or water. You define the area by picking points to draw its outline. Filled areas automatically hug the terrain they are inserted on. To create a filled area: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select Insert > Fills, or click the Fills button on the Landscape toolbar. In the catalog, select your fill material. Select a start point for your filled area. Continue selecting points to define the boundary of the filled area. Note that the last point picked always closes back to the start point, so you don’t have to pick the start point again. Right-click and select Finish. 1 4 Tip: If you want to create a raised garden you may want to insert a raised garden box from the catalog. See Inserting Exterior Structures on page 84. Note: You cannot insert a fill on top of another fill. Resizing a Filled Area You can resize a filled area by stretching one of its edges. To resize a filled area by stretching it: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click on the filled area to select it. Click on the edge you want to stretch. Hover your pointer over the solid blue grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to stretch the fill. Release your mouse button. Reshaping a Filled Area You can change the shape of a filled area by stretching its corners. You can do this by clicking and dragging its grab handles. To reshape a filled area by stretching: 1. Click on the filled area to select it. A grab handle is displayed at each corner. 5. 2 3 2. Click and drag a corner grab handle to stretch the filled area. 104 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Rotating a Filled Area 3. Release your mouse button. 3. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. The Landscape category contains fill materials like water, sand and gravel. Click anywhere on the surface of the fill. The material is applied immediately. Right-click and select Finish. 18 4. Rotating a Filled Area You can rotate a filled area using the Rotate tool. To rotate a filled area: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click on the filled area to select it. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate. Hover your pointer over the corner you want to rotate around. Click and drag to rotate the fill, then release your mouse button. 5. Deleting a Filled Area You can delete a filled area in a couple of easy steps. To delete a filled area: 1. 2. Click on the filled area to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. Moving a Filled Area You can move a filled area using the Move Whole Element tool. To move a filled area: 1. 2. Click on the filled area to select it. Right-click and select Move Whole Element, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Whole Element. Click and drag the filled area to move it, then release your mouse button. Note: Deleting a fill returns the terrain to its original state where the fill was located. 3. Changing the Fill Material You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly change the look of a fill. To change the fill material: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the path is visible in the view. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. User’s Guide 105 Chapter Edging Edging can be an attractive accent around gardens, ponds, sidewalks, driveways, and other areas. It can also help retain fill materials and keep weeds out of your garden. You can choose from PVC lawn edging, wood posts, or rails. Drawing edging is easy — just point and click to define the start and end point of the edging, then keep clicking to add more segments. Edging 107 Chapter 19 Edging Inserting Edging Use the Edging tool to add PVC lawn edging, wood posts, or wood, brick or concrete rails to your landscape design. The width and height of the edging is determined in the material’s properties. You insert edging by simply picking points to define the end points and direction of the edging. To insert edging: 1. Select Insert > Edging, or click the Edging button on the Landscape toolbar. In the catalog, select your edging material. Select a start point for the edging. Move your cursor in the direction you want the edging to run, then select an endpoint for the edging. You can continue selecting points in any direction to add more sections to the edging if you want. 5. Right-click and select Finish. 1 4 2 3 2. 3. 4. Tip: You can also insert decorative borders around a garden. See Inserting Exterior Accessories on page 92. Cleaning Up Corners If you edged around an area with posts or rails, you’ll notice that the edging members connect on center at the corners. You may want to stretch the corners to form completely flush intersections. To clean up the corners of edging: 1. Click on one of the edging members. Blue grab handles are displayed at the ends of the member. Hover your pointer over the end grab handle to display the Move cursor. 2. 108 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Changing the Length of Edging 3. Click and drag the edging so that it meets up with the outside of the member it is connected to, then release your mouse button. 19 Breaking Edging When you create a break in edging, you can select and edit the portions on either side of the break independently. To create a break in edging: 1. 2. Select the edging you want to break. Right-click and select Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break. Double-click where you want to break the edging. 4. 5. Select the other member. Click and drag the end so that it meets up with the inside edge of the connecting member, then release your mouse button. 3. Moving Edging You can move a piece of edging by clicking and dragging it. If the member is attached to any other edging members, the other members move along with it. To move edging: 1. Changing the Length of Edging You can lengthen or shorten edging by clicking and dragging its end points. To change the length of edging: 1. Select the edging you want to lengthen or shorten. Grab handles are displayed at the center and ends of the edging. Click and drag one of the end grab handles to stretch the edging, then release your mouse button. 2. Select the edging you want to move. If you want to move multiple members, use Shift+click to select the other members. Hover your pointer over the center blue grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to move the edging, then release your mouse button. 3. Rotating Edging You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a wall about a selected point. To rotate edging: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the edging. A grab handle is displayed at the center and ends of the edging. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around. Click and drag to rotate the edging, then release your mouse button. 2. User’s Guide 109 Chapter 19 Edging Editing the Height or Width of Edging You can edit the height or width (thickness) of edging on the edging’s Basic property page. To edit the height or width of edging: 1. Click on the edging to select it. Use Shift+click to select multiple segments if necessary. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. 2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. Click on the edging. Right-click and select Finish. 3. 4. 5. 2. Deleting Edging You can delete edging in a couple of easy steps. To delete edging: 1. 2. Select the edging to remove. You can select multiple edging segments using Shift+click. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. 3. 4. To edit the height of the edging, change the value in the Edge Height edit box. To edit the width (thickness) of the edging, change the value in the Edge Width edit box. Note that this variable is not available for PVC edging. If the edging is post edging, you can control the spacing between posts by editing the value in the Approx. Edge Spacing edit box. Click OK. 5. 6. Changing the Edging Material You can apply a different color or material to edging using the Materials Paintbrush. To apply different materials to edging: 1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the edging is visible in the view. 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 110 Chapter Trees, Shrubs & Plants Nothing brings your landscape to life like trees, shrubs, plants and flowers. With over 7500 plants to choose from, 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design lets you create the landscape of your dreams. Inserting plants involves nothing more than a single mouse click, and once inserted, they can be dragged and dropped anywhere you like. You can even make them grow! If you need to learn more about a particular species of plant, you can view the plant’s light, water, temperature and soil requirements in its properties. For even more detailed information you can browse through 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design’s comprehensive Plant Encyclopedia. Plants 111 Chapter 20 Trees, Shrubs & Plants Inserting Plants Plants are inserted with a simple mouse click. Once inserted, they can be dragged and dropped anywhere in the drawing. To insert a plant: 1. Select Insert > Plants, or click the Plants button on the Landscape toolbar. In the catalog, select the plant you want to insert. If you want to view the plant’s size or requirements before inserting it, right-click in the catalog and select Properties. Position the plant where you want it, then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish. Changing the Elevation of a Plant You can raise or lower a plant using the Elevate tool. You may want to do this for hanging plants, or plants in raised garden boxes. To change the elevation of a plant: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the plant. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the plant above the ground. Click OK. 2. Editing the 2D Appearance of a Plant By default, plants are represented by a circle in 2D plan view. At the center of the circle is a smaller circle that represents the trunk. 3. 4. Note: Although the catalog contains a wide variety of plants for you to insert, it does not contain all the plants listed in the Plant Encyclopedia. You can, however, add plants from the Encyclopedia to the current catalog. For more information, see Adding a Plant from the Encyclopedia to the Catalog on page 125. You can choose from three 2D plant styles. You can also change the diameter of the trunk in 2D, or hide the trunk altogether. To edit the style of a plant in 2D: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the plant whose properties you want to edit. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Plants dialog, select the Basic tab. To change the style of the circle shown in 2D plan view, click the style you want in the Type area. Moving a Plant You can move a plant easily by just clicking and dragging it. To move a plant: 1. 2. Select the plant you want to move. Hover your pointer over the plant’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to move the plant. When the plant is where you want it, release your mouse button. 3. 4. 112 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Changing the Age of a Plant 5. To change the size of the trunk in 2D plan view, edit the value in the Trunk Diameter edit box. To hide the trunk from 2D view, select No from the Show trunk in plan? drop box. Click OK. the plant’s size changes in both 2D and 3D regardless of the Planting Age setting on the Plant Info page. Note: If you just want to see plants at a different maturity level (i.e. change their age), you should change their planting age instead. See Changing the Age of a Plant on page 113. You can also apply an overall age change to your landscape. See Seeing Plant Growth Over Time on page 114. To change the size of a plant: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the plant whose properties you want to edit. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Plants dialog, select the Size tab. Set the Size from encyclopedia option to No. 20 6. Changing the Age of a Plant The age of a plant determines its size at planting time. You can increase or decrease the age of a plant by making a change on the plant’s Plant Info property page. To change the age of a plant: 1. 2. 3. Click on the plant whose planting age you want to change. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Plants dialog, select the Plant Info tab. 4. Move the Planting Age slider left or right until the desired planting age is displayed. Planting age is measured in years. Click OK. 5. 6. 7. To change the width of the plant, enter a value in the Width edit box. To change the height of the plant in 3D view, edit the value in the Height edit box. Click OK. 5. Forcing a Custom Plant Size The size of a plant is determined by properties in the Plant Encyclopedia. You can specify a custom height and width for a plant on the plant’s Size property page. Note that if you do this, however, User’s Guide 113 Chapter 20 Trees, Shrubs & Plants Deleting a Plant You can delete a plant in a couple of easy steps. To delete a plant: 1. 2. Select the plant. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. 2. In the Program Settings dialog, change the date. Select a month by clicking the arrows on the month bar at the top of the calendar. Select a day by clicking a number on the calendar. Click OK. The plants in your drawing are updated according to the time of year you specified. 3. Seeing Plant Growth Over Time Once you have inserted plants in your landscape plan, you can see how they will look any specified number of years down the road using the Plant Growth Over Time feature. To see plant growth over time: 1. Select Tools > Gardening > Plant Growth Over Time. Note: Keep in mind that seasonal changes may have different results depending on the plant’s properties in the Encyclopedia. Things to consider are the climate of the region the plant is in, and the plant’s world origin. 2. 3. Enter the number of years to add to your landscape. Click OK. Applying Seasonal Changes to Plants The Plant Seasonal Change feature updates the appearance of the plants in your drawing to reflect a particular season. Generally the change applies to flowering plants and trees that have a certain bloom time. You specify the season by adjusting the time of year on the Global Settings page of the Program Settings dialog. To apply seasonal changes to your plants: 1. Select Tools > Gardening > Plant Seasonal Change. 114 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Using the Plant Encyclopedia 20 Using the Plant Encyclopedia The Plant Encyclopedia contains comprehensive information on over 7500 different varieties of plants. The Encyclopedia has many uses related to the selection and care of plants. You can view information about any plant, select plants based on certain criteria, research potential diseases, and learn how to care for your plants. To access the Plant Encyclopedia, select Tools > Gardening > Plant Encyclopedia. You can also access the Plant Encyclopedia by clicking the Encyclopedia button on a plant’s Encyclopedia property page. Plant Photo Usage Window Plant Info Season Color Diagram Profile View Overhead View Plant Height Plant Width Plant List Search Edit Field Select Button Scroll through the list and select the plant you want to view Type in the first few letters of the plant you are looking for Selects the current plant for placement in the current catalog when adding plants to the catalog Latin/Common Button Switches between Common and Latin plant names User’s Guide 115 Chapter 20 Trees, Shrubs & Plants The Encyclopedia Main Page The Encyclopedia’s main page contains a comprehensive plant list that you can scroll through and select plants from. The page also displays a photo and two previews of a selected plant, as well as basic information about the plant and its appropriate growing environment. options to view a brief description of the usage in the Plant Usage catalog. Selecting a Plant to View By default, the plant list contains all 7500 plant species. If you have used the Plant Filter to filter out certain plant types, the list is smaller. (For more information about the Plant Filter, see Filtering the Plant List on page 124). To select a plant in the plant list, use the scrollbar beside the plant list to scroll through the list of plants, then click on the plant you want to view. By default, common plant names are listed in the plant list. You can switch to Latin names by clicking the Latin button. If you know the name of the plant you are looking for, you can locate it more quickly by typing the first few letters of the plant’s name in the Search Edit field above the plant list. The list of plants will move to the closest match as you type. Soil/Zone/Lifetime. The window below the Usage window indicates Soil Preference (alkaline, acidic, heavy, etc.), Zone (ranging from 1 for Sub-Arctic to 10 for Sub-Tropical), and Lifetime (the life span of the plant in years). Each of the icons/items in this window has a tool tip. If you hover your cursor over the icon/item, a small pop-up window appears displaying a brief description of the item. For example, if you hover your cursor over the soil preference icon, the window will display the preferred soil type that the icon indicates. Search edit field Scrollbar Plant Type and Needs. The window to the right of the Usage window indicates the following: Plant Type Temperature Preference Lighting Preference Water Requirements Complexity of Care Viewing Plant Information The Encyclopedia’s main page displays images and basic information about the currently selected plant. Usage. This window lists all the possible ways you can use the plant. Click one of the usage Growth Each of the icons in this window has a tool tip. If you hover your cursor over the icon, a small pop- 116 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 The Encyclopedia Main Page up window appears displaying a brief description of the icon. Season Color Diagram. This circle gives you an idea of what you can expect from the chosen plant throughout the year. The outer circle shows the months in which the plant blooms, and the color of its flowers. Fruits are also indicated in this circle, showing the period when they ripen, and the color of their fruit. The inner circle indicates when the plant has foliage (including autumn leaves), and the color of its leaves. plant will look like in 3D. The profile view is shown in the lower right corner of the main page. 20 Note: The profile view shows the plant’s total height. If the plant is a vegetable, this includes the underground part. If the plant is a water plant, the underwater part is included. The width of bushes and flowers can be affected by how they are pruned. The plant will reach optimum size at maturity and under favorable conditions. Plant Views The main page has two views: overhead and profile. The overhead view shows you a textured view of the plant from above. The profile view gives you an idea of the plant’s height and spread, and shows you what your User’s Guide 117 Chapter 20 Trees, Shrubs & Plants Plant Care Calendar The Plant Care Calendar page shows the required monthly care (planting, watering, fertilizing, etc.) for the currently selected plant. 118 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Plant Care Calendar To see detailed information about each plant care task, click on the icon. A Care dialog appears displaying helpful animations and tips on how to complete a given task. Click Animate to play the animation, and Stop to stop it. Clicking the tools icon in the top right corner of the dialog opens a dialog showing the tools you will need to complete the task. 20 User’s Guide 119 Chapter 20 Trees, Shrubs & Plants World Map Page The World Map page displays a world map that indicates the region of the world where the currently selected plant originates. Right-click on a highlighted region to see details about the climate and growing conditions most favorable for plants indigenous to the region. 120 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Notebook Page 20 Notebook Page You can use the Notebook page to enter and view notes about the currently selected plant. To select a plant, scroll through the list and click on it, or use the Search Edit field above the plant list to enter the first few letters of the plant name and find a quick match. Click in the box on the right side of the page and type your note. When you move to another page in the Encyclopedia, your text is saved automatically. User’s Guide 121 Chapter 20 Trees, Shrubs & Plants Picture Page The Picture page contains a collage of thumbnail images of all the available plants in the plant list. You can browse through the images manually or by using the arrows at the top of the page. To view a large picture of a selected plant, click the Full Size button at the top of the page. Click the Thumbnails button to return to the thumbnails. 122 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Diseases Page 20 Diseases Page The Diseases page lists the possible diseases that may affect a plant. By default, the disease list contains the diseases that can affect the currently selected plant. If you want to view a comprehensive list of diseases for all plants, click All in the bottom right corner of the page. When you select a disease in the disease list, you will see a picture of the disease, details of its symptoms in the Symptoms windows, and care information in the Control window. If you want to search in reverse to find all plants affected by a specific disease, click the Filter button at the bottom of the page. This opens the main Encyclopedia page. To restore your plant list, return to the Diseases page and click the All button. User’s Guide 123 Chapter 20 Trees, Shrubs & Plants Filtering the Plant List The Encyclopedia’s Plant Filter lets you filter out unwanted plants from your plant list by specifying various criteria. To use the Plant Filter: 1. Select the Plant Filter tab on the left side of the Encyclopedia window. originate. For example, if you wanted to find plants for an Asian-themed water garden, you would click on the Asian region of the map to exclude any plants that aren’t indigenous to Asia. The Notebook page lets you filter plants by notes that you’ve entered previously on this page. For example, you could enter the note “Front Yard” for all plants that you want to use in your front yard. When you are ready to lay out the front yard of your landscape plan you can go back to the Plant Filter and limit your plant list to only the plants you’ve pre-chosen for your front yard. The Picture page lets you limit your plant list by the part of the plant shown in its photo (leaf, bark, fruit, etc.). The filter option available on the Diseases page is different, because it affects the disease list, not the plant list. To use this filter, click on the image that represents the part of the plant affected or type of infestation, then select the Encyclopedia tab on the left side of the window to switch to the regular Diseases page. For example, if you are considering planting lilies or daffodils in your garden, and want to know what type of diseases these bulb plants may encounter, click the Bulb image on the Diseases page (in Plant Filter mode), then go into Encyclopedia mode and select the Diseases page. 3. Select the filter criteria. Each icon and scale represents a specific plant criterion. As soon as you click on an icon or move a slider, filtering begins. To deselect an icon, click on it again. Note: If some of the icons disappear, it is because no such plant is selectable within the current criteria. For example, if you select minimal water, the climber plant type icon will disappear because there are no climbing plants that will accept minimal watering. If you select more than one icon within a single group, then all plants with any of the checked properties will be selected. For example, selecting maximum light and medium light will exclude all plants that Plant Filter Tab 2. Each Encyclopedia page has different filtering options. Click on the tabs along the top of the Encyclopedia window to select the page you want. The main Encyclopedia page lets you select the Plant Type, Watering Needs, Lighting Preference, Soil Preference, Zone, Color (for flower, leaf, autumn leaf, and fruit), Height and Blooming Season. The Plant Care Calendar page lets you select the Complexity of Care required, Speed of Growth (for both height and spread), Life Expectancy and Usage. The World Map page lets you select the region of the world where the plants 124 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Adding a Plant from the Encyclopedia to the Catalog flourish under minimal light (shade) conditions. If icons/sliders of more than one type are checked/moved, then plants that satisfy all the chosen criteria will be selected. For example, if you click on the deciduous tree icon in the Type box, the full sun icon in the Lighting Preference box, and the white square on the Color box, then only hardwood trees that flourish in full sunlight, require minimal watering, and produce white flowers will be selected. 4. The total number of plants available — based on the filters you have applied — is indicated on the leaf in the upper right corner of the window. If at any time you want to restore the complete list of plants, click Reset. 10. Specify the remaining properties (Quantity or Behavior) if desired, then click OK in the Plants dialog. Note that the settings on the Appearance page have no effect on the plant’s appearance. The appearance of a plant is determined by settings in the Encyclopedia. 11. Click OK in the Catalog Manager dialog. The plant is added to your catalog. 20 Adding a Plant from the Encyclopedia to the Catalog Although the catalog contains a vast array of plants for you to insert, it does not contain all the plants listed in the Plant Encyclopedia. You can add any plant from the Plant Encyclopedia to any catalog by following the steps below. To add a plant from the encyclopedia to the current catalog: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager. In the Catalog Manager dialog, select Plants from the Element drop box. In the Select a Type window, select or create the group you want to add the plant to. Select Catalog > Add Element. In the Plants dialog, select the Plant Info tab. Click the Encyclopedia button to launch the Plant Encyclopedia. On the Encyclopedia’s main page, select the desired plant in the plant list. Click Select. Notice that the Plant Info page of the Plants dialog is now full with the selected plant’s information. In the Name edit box, specify a name for your plant (disable Auto Name if you want to type in the name yourself). User’s Guide 9. 125 Part 6 Drawing & Editing Tools Drawing Aids Measurement Commander Editing Your Design page 129 page 133 page 137 page 143 Chapter Drawing Aids 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design offers a variety of powerful drawing tools that help you insert elements easily and precisely where you want them in your drawing. If you want you can display a drawing grid in your drawing area, as well as set up a snap grid so that your cursor snaps to the grid when you are inserting elements. The Object Snap feature automatically snaps your pointer to existing objects, and the Angle Snap snaps your pointer to specified angles. You can set up drawing aids in your program settings, and toggle them on and off using the buttons on the Status bar. 129 Chapter 21 Drawing Aids Setting Up a Drawing Grid A drawing grid is simply a set of horizontal and vertical lines that can help you orient objects to one another. By default, the spacing between grid lines is 1’, but you can change this if you want. Note that the drawing grid is a visual aid only, and will not be included in printouts. To set up a drawing grid: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab. In the Grid area, specify the desired distance between vertical grid lines in the X Spacing edit box. Specify the desired distance between horizontal grid lines in the Y Spacing edit box. By default, the grid is 150’ x 150’, which is the default size of the terrain. To change the overall size of the grid, enter the desired width in the X Limit edit box, and the desired height in the Y Limit edit box. If you want to turn the grid on, check the Enable (F7) check box. Click OK. want. If you enable the Match Grid option, the invisible snap grid becomes the same size as the drawing grid. This will make it seem like you are snapping to the drawing grid while drawing. To set up a snap grid: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab. If you want the snap grid to be the same size as the drawing grid, check the Match Grid check box in the Grid Snap area. To specify a custom distance between vertical grid lines, enter a value in the X Spacing edit box. To specify a custom distance between horizontal grid lines, enter a value in the Y Spacing edit box. If you want to turn the grid snap on, check the Enable (F4) check box. Click OK. 2. 3. 2. 3. 4. 4. 5. 5. 6. 7. Turning the Grid Snap On and Off You can toggle the grid snap on and off in one of two ways: • • Press F4 on your keyboard Click the GRIDSNAP button on the Status bar 6. 7. Turning the Drawing Grid On and Off You can toggle the drawing grid on and off in one of two ways: • • Press F7 on your keyboard Click the GRID button on the Status bar Using the Object Snap The Object Snap feature makes elements that you are currently inserting automatically snap to existing elements in your drawing. Using the Grid Snap The Grid Snap feature snaps your pointer to an invisible grid when inserting elements. By default, the spacing between the grid lines in the invisible grid is 1”, but you can change this if you You can set the pixel search distance for the object snap, which determines how close your pointer needs to be to an element for it to snap to the element. 130 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Using Ortho By default, the Object Snap is enabled, but you can turn it off whenever you want. There are three ways to turn the Object Snap on or off. To turn the Object Snap on or off: • • Press F5 on your keyboard Click the OBJSNAP button on the Status bar 21 Using Angle Snap When the Angle Snap feature is turned on, your cursor snaps to specific angles when rotating an element. If you set your snap angle to 10º, for example, your cursor will snap at 10º intervals as you rotate the element. By default, the Angle Snap is on. You can turn the Angle Snap on and off using one of three methods. To turn the Angle Snap on or off: • • Press F6 on your keyboard Click the ANGLESNAP button on the Status bar • Select Settings > Program Settings, then on the Drawing Aids page, check or uncheck the Enable (F5) check box in the Object Snap area To set the pixel search distance: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab. In the Object Snap area, type the desired number of pixels in the Pixel Search Distance edit box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values. Click OK. 2. 3. • 2. 3. Select Settings > Program Settings, then on the Drawing Aids page, check or uncheck the Angle Snap (F6) check box To change the snap angle: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab. In the Ortho / Angle Snap area, type the desired snap angle in the Snap Angle edit box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values. Click OK. 4. Using Ortho The Ortho feature restricts your cursor movement to 90-degree angles when you are inserting elements. This can be especially helpful when drawing elements like pads and retaining walls. By default, Ortho is enabled. You can toggle it on and off using one of three methods. To turn Ortho on or off: • • Press F8 on your keyboard Click the ORTHO button on the Status bar 4. Disabling/Enabling Collision Control The program’s intelligent Collision Control feature prevents objects from being inserted where they do not fit. By default, Collision Control is on, but you can turn it off whenever you like using one of three methods. • Select Settings > Program Settings, then on the Drawing Aids page, check or uncheck the Ortho (F8) check box User’s Guide 131 Chapter 21 Drawing Aids To turn Collision Control on or off: • • Press F9 on your keyboard Click the COLLISION button on the Status bar • Select Settings > Program Settings, then on the Drawing Aids page, check or uncheck the Enable Collision Control (F9) check box Note: Collision Control does not affect landscape elements. It does, however, affect building elements on the current building location if you have opened a drawing from another 3D Home Design program that contains building elements. 132 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Chapter Measurement You can change the unit of measure used in a drawing, or select a different level of precision for your measurements. You can measure the distance between any two points using the Measure tool. If you have opened a project from another 3D Home Design program which contains a house, you can use the Area/Perimeter tool to instantly calculate the area of a room or building. 133 Chapter 22 Measurement Changing the Unit of Measure The units of measure used in your project are determined by a template, which by default is either a feet/inches template or millimeters template. Once you’ve opened a new project, you can change the units of measure and levels of precision used in that project by making selections on the Units of Measure page of the Program Settings dialog. Suppressing Metric Units in Dialogs If you have chosen to work in Metric units, you can choose to suppress units for length/distance, volume, and area measurements shown in dialogs. For example, 1200 mm would appear as simply 1200. To suppress units: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Units of Measure tab. With Metric Units selected, enable the Suppress metric units from dialogs check box. Click OK. 2. 3. To set your units of measure: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Units of Measure tab. Select either Imperial Units or Metric Units, then select the desired units to use. Measure Imperial Metric Units Available Feet-Inches Inches Millimeters Centimeters Meters 4. Measuring Distances Use the Measure tool to measure the distance between any two points in your 2D plan. To use the Measure tool: 1. 2. 3. Select Tools > Measure. Click your first point on the screen. Move your cursor in the direction you want to measure. A ruler is displayed that stretches as you move your cursor. 2. 3. 4. Select a level of precision for each unit of measure. For example, selecting #’-# #/16” sets the level of precision to 1/16th of an inch when working in feet and inches. Once you’ve set your units of measure, click OK. 4. Click your second point on the screen. The distance is shown on the ruler as well as on the Status bar at the bottom of the screen. Once you have measured your first distance, you can keep selecting points to measure 5. 5. 134 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Measuring Area and Perimeter additional distances from the last point selected. A running total is displayed on the Status bar. 4. When you are done viewing the area calculations, click OK. 22 6. When you have finished measuring, rightclick and select Finish. Measuring Area and Perimeter The Area/Perimeter Calculator displays the area (e.g. square footage) and perimeter length of each location in your model. It also displays the total area and total perimeter (of all locations). This tool can only be used if you have opened a project from another 3D Home Design program which contains a house. Note the calculations are taken from the exterior side of the building’s walls. To measure area: 1. Select Tools > Calculate/Estimate > Area/ Perimeter. 2. 3. To turn the grid lines off, uncheck the Show Grid check box. To print the calculations, click Print. User’s Guide 135 Chapter Commander For very precise control when inserting or editing elements, 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design offers a helpful tool called the Commander, which lets you view or enter exact values for distance, direction and angles. It is especially handy for users with some CAD experience. This chapter tells you how to turn the Commander on, and how to use it. 137 Chapter 23 Commander Displaying the Commander The Commander is a multi-functional tool that lets you enter precise values when inserting or editing elements. Even if you don’t need a high level of precision, you may want the Commander displayed so you can see lengths and angles as you draw or edit elements. The Commander becomes instantly active when inserting elements. It is most useful for things like retaining walls and edging, because it lets you enter a precise length for the element. The Commander also becomes active when you are moving, stretching or rotating elements. If you have started moving, stretching or rotating an element using your mouse, the Commander displays the move distance or rotation angle as you move your mouse. If you want to be able the enter values in the Commander when moving, stretching or rotating an element, you need to first select an appropriate editing tool from the rightclick menu or Edit > Modify Elements menu such as Move, Stretch, Lengthen, or Rotate. To display the Commander: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Workspace tab. Check the Commander check box. Click OK. 2. 3. 4. Displaying the Coordinate Icon The Coordinate Icon marks the current point from which an action will be performed. In other words, it identifies the current reference point when using the Commander. By default, this icon is turned off. If you plan to use the Commander while working, you should turn on the Coordinate Icon. To display the Coordinate Icon: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab. In the Visual Aids area, check the Show Coordinate Icon check box. Click OK. The Commander is displayed just below the drawing area, above the toolbar area. Initially the Commander will look grayed out because it is inactive. It will become active when you insert or edit elements. Using the Commander The Commander can be a very useful tool when inserting or editing elements. Using the Commander you can: • • • • • • Specify the insertion height of an element before it is inserted Select a precise insertion point for an element Specify a precise length and direction for elements like retaining walls and edging Specify a precise distance and direction when stretching or moving an element Specify a precise angle when rotating an element Specify a precise radius/included angle when curving a wall or deck 2. 3. 4. Specifying the Insertion Height of an Element Before You Insert It If you have the Commander turned on, it will display a Base Height edit box as soon as an insertion tool becomes active. Even if you don’t want to enter precise values, you can still use the Commander to view measurements as you draw and edit elements. The values in the Commander are linked to your cursor movement and update as you proceed through a command. The value shown in the Base Height edit box is the height at which the element will insert in your drawing. You can change the insertion height 138 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Selecting a Reference Point When Inserting and Editing Elements before selecting an insertion point for the element by typing a value in the Base Height edit box and pressing ENTER. The distance is measured from the terrain to the element’s insertion point. Most elements have their insertion point at the bottom of the element. however, the edit boxes change to Radius and Included Angle. You can move easily from one edit box to the next using your Tab key. Pressing ENTER after typing a value completes the current action. When entering values in the Commander, especially when inserting or moving elements, it is important to be aware of the current coordinate system in the Commander. The Commander offers two coordinate systems: Polar and Cartesian. The system you select determines how values are entered in the Commander when you are specifying points or distances. Note that you can switch between the Polar and Cartesian coordinate system once you have selected a reference point to draw from or move from. You do this by making a selection from the coordinate system drop box on the left side of the Commander. Note: If moving, stretching or rotating elements, and you want to enter values in the Commander, you need to first select an appropriate editing tool from the right-click menu or Edit > Modify Elements menu such as Move, Stretch, Lengthen or Rotate. 23 Selecting a Reference Point When Inserting and Editing Elements To use the Commander, you must first specify a reference point, or base point, from which values can be measured. If you are drawing a retaining wall, for example, the first point you click on the screen is considered the reference point. The Commander then becomes active, and you can enter a Distance and Direction (or X and Y values) for the wall. If you want to use the Commander to edit an element (e.g. move or rotate it), you must select a point from which to measure the move distance/ direction, or rotation angle. Most often you would select one of the element’s grab handles, which are the small blue squares that appear on the major points of an element when you select the element. There are two ways to select a reference point once you’ve activated a tool: • • Click the point in your drawing. Enter coordinates, or X, Y and Z values, in the Commander. (See Defining Points in the Cartesian Coordinate System on page 140.) Note that even if you choose to click the point in your drawing, you can see the coordinates of your cursor in the Commander as you move your mouse. By default, coordinates are read from the last point selected in the drawing area. This point is marked by the Coordinate Icon (if enabled). Entering Values in the Commander The Commander is intelligent and changes depending on the tool you are using. For example, if you are drawing retaining walls, the Commander’s edit boxes become Distance, Direction, and Z. If you are curving walls, User’s Guide 139 Chapter 23 Commander Direction and Angle of Rotation Direction in a drawing is specified in degrees of an angle. The angle is calculated counterclockwise from the positive X axis. Remember that the coordinates are measured from the current reference point, which is marked by the Coordinate Icon. (See Entering Values in the Commander on page 139.) In the Cartesian system, you can enter both positive and negative values for any of the coordinates. The Four Primary Drawing Directions Specifying Distance and Direction in the Polar Coordinate System The Polar coordinate system becomes active once you have selected a reference point to draw from, or start a move from. In the Polar coordinate system, you specify a distance and direction (angle) when drawing or moving an element. Although the four primary drawing directions are the ones you will probably be working with the most, any angle is possible. If you disable Ortho and Angle Snap, and move an element randomly in your drawing area, there is no restriction on angles at all. Even if Ortho and Angle Snap are enabled, you can enter any angle you want in the Commander. Distance. Enter a positive value to specify the length of the element, or the move distance. Direction. Enter the direction you want the element to run, or the direction in which you want to move an element. For information about how direction is specified, see Direction and Angle of Rotation on page 140. Z. Enter the distance you want to move the element vertically. You can enter a positive or negative value to move the element up or down. Defining Points in the Cartesian Coordinate System Initially when you start an insertion or editing command, the coordinate system is set to Cartesian. This lets you specify a precise reference point to draw or move from by entering X, Y and Z coordinate values in the Commander. Using the Commander When Rotating Elements When you select the Rotate tool from the rightclick menu or Edit > Modify Elements menu, then select a base point for the rotation, the Commander displays a Rotation Angle edit box. X. Enter an X coordinate to specify a horizontal (left/right) distance in 2D plan view. Y. Enter a Y coordinate to specify a vertical (up/ down) distance in 2D plan view. Z. Enter a Z coordinate to indicate elevation, or height above the terrain. To specify the desired angle of rotation for the element, type the angle in the Rotation Angle edit box and press ENTER. For information on how angles are measured, see Direction and Angle of Rotation on page 140. 140 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Using the Commander When Curving Elements 23 Using the Commander When Curving Elements When curving an element such as a wall or deck, you can use the Commander to specify a precise curve angle. Radius. The distance from the element (in its uncurved state) to the center point of the curve. Included Angle. The angle formed between two radius lines extending from the center of the circle implied by the curve out to the endpoints of the arc. The larger the angle, the rounder and larger the curve. Included Angle It is not necessary to enter both the Radius and Included Angle values. If you enter one, the program automatically supplies the other. Also, if you enter a value and nothing happens after you press ENTER, then the value is not valid in relation to the dimensions of your element. Radius User’s Guide 141 Chapter Editing Your Design When you double-click after inserting an element or select Finish from the right-click menu, you automatically go into Selection Mode, meaning you can select elements in your drawing area and edit them. Most elements can be moved, rotated, copied and deleted. Some elements have additional editing commands available. For example, you can lengthen, break and curve walls. All elements have a property sheet where you can change the size or appearance of the element. To access a menu of editing commands for a selected element, just right-click in the drawing area or select Edit > Modify Elements. Certain functions can be performed without selecting any commands at all. For example, you can move and rotate most elements by simply clicking and dragging your mouse. This chapter describes how to select elements, and use general editing commands like Move, Rotate, Elevate, Duplicate and Delete. It also describes how to access and edit element properties. For information about editing a specific type of element, see the chapter about that element. 143 Chapter 24 Editing Your Design Undoing the Previous Action The Undo tool cancels your most recent action. You can undo as many actions as you have taken since your last save. To undo an action: • • • Select Edit > Undo, or Click the Undo button on the Standard toolbar, or Press Ctrl+Z you can move the element by simply clicking and dragging it. If you want to move an area-drawn element, such as a pad, you need to select the Move Whole Element tool before clicking and dragging Otherwise, doing a straight drag-anddrop will only stretch it. If you have your Commander turned on and would like to be able to enter precise values for the move, you need to select the Move tool instead of doing a straight drag-and-drop. Tip: You can use the Redo tool to reapply an action you have canceled using the Undo tool. Doing a Straight Drag-and-Drop The straight drag-and-drop method is ideal for singular, one-click elements like cabinets and plants. To move an element using drag-and-drop: 1. 2. Select the element you want to move. You are now in Drag and Drop mode. Hover your pointer over the element’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to move the element. When the element is where you want it, release the mouse button. Redoing an Undo The Redo tool reapplies a tool that you have reversed using Undo. Redo will only work directly following an Undo. To redo a task: • • • Select Edit > Redo, or Click the Redo button on the Standard toolbar, or Press Ctrl+Y 3. 4. Accessing Edit Commands When you have an element selected, you can access a menu of edit commands by right-clicking in the drawing area, or by selecting Edit > Modify Elements. Menus vary depending on the element selected. Typical commands are Properties, Move, Rotate, Duplicate, and Delete. If two types of elements are selected (such as a floor and a wall), only commands that are common to both element types are available. Certain functions can be performed without selecting any commands at all. For example, you can move and rotate most elements by simply clicking and dragging your mouse. Using the Move Tool Use the Move tool when you want to be able to specify a precise distance and direction for the move in the Commander. To move an element using the Move tool: 1. 2. 3. Select the element you want to move. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move. Select a base point for the move. The move distance and direction will be measured from this point. Without holding your mouse button down, move your mouse to move the element. Select the point you want to move the element to, or enter a distance and direction in the Commander. 4. Moving Elements When you select an element, you are automatically in Drag and Drop mode. If the element is a singular, one-click object, like a plant, 144 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Raising or Lowering an Element 24 Raising or Lowering an Element Most elements can be raised or lowered using the Elevate tool on the element’s right-click menu. Many block elements (like furniture and plants) also have a Distance above current location or terrain variable in their properties that you can use to raise or lower the element. To raise or lower an element using the Elevate tool: 1. 2. Select the element you want to raise or lower. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the element. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the element above the terrain. The distance you enter is the distance from the terrain to the insertion point of the element. For most elements, the insertion point is at the base of the element. Click OK. to enter a precise rotation angle in the Commander, or you want to rotate the element about a point other than the center point of the element. Doing a Simple, On-the-Spot Rotation If you see a triangular grab handle on an element when it is selected, it can be rotated by simply clicking and dragging it. Using this method, the element is rotated about its center point. Rotation handle 3. Center . . . 90° 180° Select the element you want to rotate. . 270° 4. To raise or lower a block element by editing its properties: 1. 2. 3. Select the element you want to raise or lower. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the properties dialog, select the Behavior tab. If there is no Behavior tab, you will need to use the Elevate tool to raise or lower the element. Edit the value in the Distance above current location or terrain edit box. Click OK. If your Angle Snap is on, the element will rotate in increments of whatever angle is set for the Angle Snap. If the Angle Snap is off, the element will rotate in increments of 1º. To rotate an element by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor. If you do not see the triangular grab handle, the element can only be rotated with the Rotate tool. Tip: If the square grab handle is in close proximity to the triangular grab handle, you may want to zoom in on the element to distinguish between the two grab handles. 3. 4. Click and drag to rotate the element. When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button. 4. 5. Rotating Elements in 2D Plan View Singular, one-click elements like plants and furniture can be rotated on the spot by simply clicking and dragging them while in Rotation mode. For other elements such as retaining walls and pads, you need to use the Rotate tool. You also need to use the Rotate tool if you want to be able User’s Guide 145 Chapter 24 Editing Your Design Using the Rotate Tool Using the Rotate tool you can rotate an element about any selected base point. You should also use the Rotate tool if you want to be able to enter a precise rotation angle in the Commander. If your Angle Snap is on, the element will rotate in increments of whatever angle is set for the Angle Snap. If you are using the Commander, you can override the Angle Snap by entering the desired angle in the Commander. If the Angle Snap is off, the element will rotate in increments of 1º. To rotate an element using the Rotate tool: 1. 2. 3. Select the element to rotate. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate. Select a base point for the rotation. The base point can be any point on the element (e.g. center point or corner point), or any point in the drawing area. The point you pick establishes an automatic baseline that runs through the point at 180°. You can rotate fullcircle around this baseline. precise angle. Positive angle values are read in a counter-clockwise direction, while negative values are read in a clockwise direction. Changing an Element’s Orientation Symbol elements, such as furniture and light fixtures, are oriented in a logical fashion when you insert them in your drawing. You can edit the orientation of most symbol elements. To change an element’s orientation: 1. 2. 3. Select the element. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. On the Basic property page, click the appropriate arrow keys in the Orientation area to rotate the element. (Y, Z) axes: Rotates the element front to back, and vice versa. (X, Z) axes: Rotates the element towards its left or right side in 3D. (X, Y) axes: Rotates the element left or right in 2D plan view. . Base Point . Baseline Copying Elements The Duplicate tool creates a copy of a selected element that you can then position where you like in your plan. To duplicate an element: 270° rotation Tip: If you want to align an element with another element that may be lying at an odd angle, select a base point on the other element, then line up your rotation line with that element. 4. Without holding your mouse button down, move your mouse to rotate the element. The element will rotate from the defined base point in the direction you move the mouse. If the Commander is turned on, you can view the angle of rotation as you rotate, or enter a 1. 2. 3. Select the element to copy. Right-click and select Duplicate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Duplicate. Select a base point for the copy movement. Typically you would select one of the element's grab handles, but you can click anywhere in the drawing. The base point is simply a reference point used to define the move distance. Select the point you are copying the element to. You can do this by moving your mouse and then clicking to insert the copy, or by 4. 146 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Arraying Elements typing a distance and direction in the Commander. 6. In the Distance Between Columns box, type the spacing you want between columns. This determines the distance between elements appearing in rows (horizontal spacing). Note: If you are working in Imperial, make sure you include the feet symbol (e.g. 4’) if the value is in feet. Otherwise, the value is taken as inches. 7. 8. In the Array Rotation Angle box, type the degree of rotation for the array. Click OK. The array is created. 24 Arraying Elements When you array elements, you create multiple copies of an element at the same time. You can create an array in a single row or column, or a layout of rows and columns. You can also control the spacing between elements in the array, and the array's rotation angle. Columns Note: The Array tool is only available for certain elements. Rows Deleting Elements You can delete an element from your drawing in two quick steps. Sample array of boxes To delete an element: 1. 2. Select the element. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. To array an element: 1. 2. 3. Select the element you want to array. Right-click and select Array, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Array. In the Number of Rows box, type the number of horizontal rows you want or use the arrows to select a value. In the Number of Columns box, type the number of vertical columns you want. In the Distance Between Rows box, type the spacing you want between rows. This determines the distance between elements appearing in columns (vertical spacing). 4. 5. User’s Guide 147 Chapter 24 Editing Your Design Editing the Size and Composition of an Element You can edit the physical make-up of an element as well as its dimensions by accessing the element’s Basic property page. Some elements have additional property pages that control its composition. Note: Editing the properties of an element in your drawing has no effect on the element’s property definition in the catalog it came from. If you want to edit an element in a catalog, see Adding and Editing Elements in a Catalog on page 223. Editing an element in a catalog affects all future insertions of that element in your drawing. Changing an Element’s Material or Color When you view your design in Rendered or Patterned mode, elements are displayed using materials that are defined in the elements’ properties. A material can be a texture, such as brick, or a color. Materials also have a pattern assigned to them, which is what you see when you view in Patterned view. You can select a different material for each of an element’s components. Note: You can’t change the way an element looks in 2D plan view. There are two ways to change an element’s material settings: using the Materials Paintbrush, or through the element’s Appearance property page. The Materials Paintbrush is best used in 3D view. It lets you select a material or color in the catalog, then apply it to parts of an element. For example, if you want your table legs to be blue, you can select the Blue Paint material, then click on of the table’s legs. All table legs will update automatically. When you use the Materials Paintbrush on an element, the settings on the element’s Appearance property page update to match the selections you made with the Materials Paintbrush. If you choose to edit an element’s material through its Appearance property page, you can select different materials for each of the element’s parts, rather than just a selected part. It doesn’t matter if you’re in a 2D view or 3D view. When you edit the properties of elements that exist in your drawing, only selected elements are changed. Other occurrences of the element in your drawing remain unchanged. You can, however, select and edit multiple elements at the same time provided they share the same properties. To edit the properties of an inserted element: 1. Select the element you want to edit. To select multiple elements, use Shift + click. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Adjust the properties as desired. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the element graphic, and vice versa, if one exists. Click OK. The selected elements are updated in the drawing. 2. 3. 4. 148 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Changing an Element’s Material or Color To use the Materials Paintbrush: 1. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. There is an incredible selection to choose from, including Wood, Brick, Marble, Concrete, Steel, Carpet, Tile, Roofing and Fabric. If you want to apply a solid color select something from the Paint category. In 3D view, click on the element part that you want to apply the material to. The material is immediately applied. Right-click and select Finish. 6. In the Materials dialog, select the group containing the desired material. If you want to choose a solid color, select the Paint group. Select the material you want to use. The swatches in the preview windows update automatically. If you want to edit the material, click on one of the swatches to access the Edit Materials dialog. For information about editing materials, see Editing Material Properties on page 237. Click OK to return to the Appearance page. If you want to rotate the material on the element, enter an angle in the Rotation edit box, or use the arrows to scroll through a list of angles. This rotates the material in a clockwise direction. 4. 5. In the Components pane, select the component whose material you want to change. In the Material area, click the Select button. 24 2. 3. 4. To change an element’s material through the Appearance property page: 1. Select the element you want to edit. To select multiple elements, use Shift + click. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Select the Appearance tab. 7. 2. 3. 8. 9. 10. To shift the material on the element (left, right, up or down), use the Position arrows. 11. Select another component in the Components pane and select a material for that component. User’s Guide 149 Chapter 24 Editing Your Design 12. When all your materials are defined, click OK. Note: When you edit the material of an element in your drawing, the element’s material definition in the catalog does not change. The change only applies to the selected element. If you want to change the element’s properties in the catalog, see Adding and Editing Elements in a Catalog on page 223. 150 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Part 7 Power Tools Photo Boards Text & Dimensions Project Estimate 3DTrueView™ page 153 page 159 page 169 page 173 Chapter Photo Boards 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design lets you import digital photographs or scanned images into your work space. The image is oriented vertically in 3D view, much like a billboard. You could, for example, import a picture of your family pet and place it in your backyard. A photo board can be stationary or set to rotate with the camera so it’s always facing you. You can also control the height and width of the photo board. The handy Photo Board Wizard steps you through the process quickly and easily. 153 Chapter 25 Photo Boards Importing a Photo Board A photo board is simply a digital image that is oriented vertically in your 3D workspace. You can import any image you want — your family, pets, house — the only limit is your imagination. The handy Photo Board Wizard does it all in a few quick steps. To import a photo board: 1. Select File > Import > Photo Board Wizard. 4. Click the Select button, then select the image you want to import. You can import BMP, JPG and TGA files. The image is displayed in the preview window. Define the size of the image by entering values in the Height and Width edit boxes. Generally you should specify a size that is as close to reality as possible. For example, if the image is of a person who is six feet tall, you should enter a value close to 6’ in the Height edit box. Click Next. 5. 6. 2. Click Next. 7. Specify whether you want the photo board to be stationary or active. If Stationary is selected, the board will always remain oriented the same way, regardless of changes in your camera angle. If Billboard is selected, the photo board will rotate toward the camera so it will always face you in 3D. 3. Type a name for your photo board. 154 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Adding an Imported Photo Board to Your Catalog 8. Click Next. 25 Inserting a Photo Board from the Catalog The catalog contains a collection of photo boards containing pictures of animals. If you have saved your imported photo board to the catalog, it is also displayed with the existing photo boards in the catalog. To insert a photo board from the catalog: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select Insert > Photo Board. In the catalog panel, select the photo board you want to insert. Position the photo board where you want it, then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish. 9. Click Finish. The photo board is attached to your cursor, ready to be inserted. Moving a Photo Board You can move a photo board easily by just clicking and dragging it. To move a photo board: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the photo board. Hover your pointer over the board to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to move the board. When the board is where you want it, release your mouse button. 10. Position the photo board where you want it, then click to insert it. 11. Right-click and select Finish. Adding an Imported Photo Board to Your Catalog You can save a photo board that you have imported using the Photo Board Wizard to your catalog so you can insert it again in any project. To save your photo board to the current catalog: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Save Element to Catalog. Your pointer changes to a catalog cursor. Click on the photo board in your drawing. Rotating a Photo Board in 2D Plan View You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a photo board about a selected point in 2D plan view. To rotate a photo board: 1. 2. 3. Select the photo board. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate the photo board around. Click and drag to rotate the photo board, then release your mouse button. 2. 3. Click Yes to save the photo board. The photo board is added to the current catalog. 4. User’s Guide 155 Chapter 25 Photo Boards Changing the Elevation of a Photo Board You can raise or lower a photo board using the Elevate tool on the right-click menu. To raise or lower a photo board: 1. 2. Select the photo board. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the photo board. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the photo board above the terrain. Click OK. 2. 3. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. Edit the Height or Width in the Properties area. If Maintain Aspect Ratio is checked, the height will automatically change if you edit the width, and vice versa. This ensures the image doesn’t get distorted. Click OK. 4. Deleting a Photo Board You can delete a photo board in a couple of easy steps. To delete a photo board: 1. 2. Select the photo board. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. 3. 4. Tip: You can also change a photo board’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain variable on the photo board’s Behavior property page. Changing a Photo Board from Stationary to Rotating and Vice Versa You can choose whether a photo board is stationary or rotating after it has been inserted. A stationary board keeps the same orientation regardless of changes in the camera angle. A rotating board always rotates towards the camera. To change a photo board’s type: 1. 2. 3. Select the photo board. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Type area, click Stationary for a stationary photo board, or Billboard for a rotating photo board. Click OK. Creating Transparency in Photo Board Images You may find that you want to make portions of your photo board image transparent for a more realistic effect. If the image is of a person, for example, you may want to make the background in the image transparent so that when you insert the photo board in your drawing, you see just the person in your 3D view. To create transparency in your photo board image, you need to use a graphic editing program such as Microsoft® Paint to apply a magenta color to those portions you want to make transparent. Magenta background 4. Editing the Size of a Photo Board You can edit the height and width of a photo board after it has been inserted. To edit the size of a photo board: 1. Select the photo board. The RGB color settings for magenta are as follows: Red: 255 Green: 0 Blue: 255 156 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Creating Transparency in Photo Board Images Once you have finished editing the image in the graphic editing program, you can re-import the image into 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design using the Photo Board Wizard. 25 Photo board with no transparency Photo board with transparency User’s Guide 157 Chapter Text & Dimensions Using text tools you can add text to any area of your drawing. You may want to add a title to the plan, or label areas or specific elements. You can use whatever fonts and colors you want. Dimensions are used to convey precise measurements. You can quickly insert linear and aligned dimensions with a few simple mouse clicks. This chapter describes all text and dimension tools. 159 Chapter 26 Text & Dimensions Adding Text to Your Drawing You can add text of varying size, color and font to your drawings. Text can be moved and rotated after it has been inserted, just like most other elements. To add text to your drawing: 1. Select Tools > Text > Add Text, or click the Add Text button on the Notation toolbar. 6. 7. Click OK. The text is attached to your cursor. Position the text where you want it, then click to insert it. Moving Text You can move text by simply clicking and dragging it. To move text: 1. 2. 3. Select the text you want to move. Position your pointer over the blue grab handle to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to move the text, then release your mouse button. Rotating Text You can change the angle of text using the Rotate tool. To rotate text: 1. 2. 2. In the Text dialog, type the text you want to add. If you want to import a text (*.txt) file, click Import, then select the file to import. To select a style for the text, click the Text Style button and select or create a text style in the Text Styles dialog. By default, text is left justified. For multi-line text, this means that text lines will line up on the left, and be ragged on the right. If you want to change the justification of the text, click the appropriate button in the bottom left corner of the dialog. Left Justified Centered Right Justified Select the text you want to rotate. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around — typically the blue grab handle. Move your mouse to rotate the text in the desired direction. When the text is at the desired rotation, click to set the position. 3. 3. 4. 5. 4. Editing Text Content You can edit the content of a text element by accessing its properties. To edit text: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the text you want to edit. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Text dialog, edit the text in the text window. Click OK. 5. If you want to automatically return to the Text dialog after you have inserted the current text, enable the Multiple text insert check box. This is ideal when you want to insert different pieces of text in your drawing without having to select the Add Text tool again. 160 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Changing the Style of Text 26 Changing the Style of Text Text style settings include font, font style, size, and color. You can select a different text style for selected text, or edit individual text style properties. To change the style of text: 1. 2. 3. Select the text whose style you want to change. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Text dialog, click Text Style. Note: Text styles that are edited or added through inserted text are saved with the current project only. If you want to save them in the text styles library file, so that they can be made available in other projects, see Saving Customized Text Styles to the Text Styles Library File on page 251. Changing the Justification of Multi-line Text You can change the way multiple lines of text are aligned. To change the justification of text: 1. 2. 3. Select the text you want to edit. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Text dialog, click the appropriate justification button below the editing window. Left Justified Centered Right Justified 4. 4. In the Text Styles dialog, select a new text style, or edit the individual properties of the current text style. You can also create a new text style by clicking the Add Item button. Font. A set of text characters in a specific style and size. Font Style. The style of text. Choices can include Regular, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic. Text Height. The size of text. Text Color. The color of text. Click the swatch to access the Color dialog and select a color. 5. 6. Click OK in the Text Styles dialog. Click OK in the Text dialog. The text is changed automatically. Click OK. Deleting Text You can delete selected text from your drawing in a couple of easy steps. To delete text: 1. 2. Select the text you want to remove. You can select multiple entries using Shift+click. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. Adding Text with a Leader You can insert text with an arrow attached to it that points to a particular element or area in your drawing. The leader has two segments and can be oriented in any fashion. User’s Guide 161 Chapter 26 Text & Dimensions To add a text with leader: 1. Select Tools > Text > Add Text with Leader, or click the Add Text with Leader button on the Notation toolbar. Changing the Leader Arrow Style The leader arrow style is determined by the current dimension style, which by default is the Standard dimension style. You can change the style of the leader arrow by editing the properties of the dimension style, or by selecting a dimension style with the desired arrow style setting. To change the style of a leader arrow: 1. 2. 3. Click on the text with leader to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Dimension Styles dialog, click the Edit button. (Alternatively, if you have imported a dimension style with the desired arrow style setting, just select it in the dimension style list.) In the Edit Dimension Styles dialog, enable the Leaders radio button on the Lines and arrows page. 2. In the Leader Text dialog, type the text you want to appear with the leader, then click OK. In the drawing area, select the point where you want the arrowhead to appear. Move your pointer to stretch the leader, then select the middle point of the leader. Select a third point for the leader. The text is inserted. 2 3 1 4. 3. 4. 5. 5. Moving and Stretching a Leader You can move or stretch a leader by clicking and dragging its grab handles. To move/stretch a leader: 1. 2. Click on the text with leader to select it. Grab handles appear on the leader. Click and drag a grab handle to move the handle, then release your mouse button. 6. 7. Select the desired arrow style in the Arrow type area. You can change the dimensions of the arrow in the parameters window. Click OK in the Edit Dimension Styles dialog. Click OK in the Dimension Styles dialog. 162 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Moving Leader Text 26 Moving Leader Text If you have inserted text with a leader, you can move the text independently of the leader. To move leader text: 1. 2. 3. Click on the text with leader to select it. Right-click and select Move Text, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Text. Click and drag the text to move it, then release your mouse button. dimensions, and move and stretch them if you need to. Setting the Current Dimension Style When you add dimensions to your drawing, they use the current dimension style, which by default is the Standard dimension style. To view the properties of the current style, or select a different style to use, you need to access the Dimension Styles library for the current drawing. To set the current dimension style: 1. Select Settings > Dimension Styles. Editing Leader Text If you have inserted text with a leader, you can change the text to whatever you want. To edit leader text: 1. 2. 3. Click on the text with leader to select it. Right-click and select Edit Text, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Edit Text. In the Leader Text dialog, edit the text as desired, then click OK. Deleting Text with a Leader You can delete text with a leader in a couple of easy steps. To delete a leader with text: 1. 2. Click on any part of the leader or text. The entire leader with text is selected. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. 2. Select the style you want to use. To view or edit the properties of the style, click Edit. See Dimension Style Properties on page 166 for more information. Click Set Current to set the selected style as current. Click OK. 3. 4. Dimensioning 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design automatically displays on-screen dimensions as you create line-drawn and area-drawn elements. These dimensions are drawing aids only that disappear once you have inserted the element. Using 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design’s Dimension tools, you can add fixed dimensions to your drawing to convey the precise measurements of elements in your landscape plan. You can control the style of these User’s Guide 163 Chapter 26 Text & Dimensions Creating Linear Dimensions A linear dimension is a horizontal or vertical dimension with extension lines going vertically (for a horizontal linear dimension) or horizontally (for a vertical linear dimension) to the origins of the extension lines, which define the endpoint of the dimension. Creating Aligned Dimensions An aligned dimension is similar to a linear dimension, except it tilts to the same angle as the element you are dimensioning, making it the ideal choice for elements that are not horizontal or vertical. To create aligned dimensions: This tool is ideal for creating interior dimensions, or dimensions on a landscape plan. To create linear dimensions: 1. Select Tools > Dimensions > Linear Dimensions, or click the Linear Dimensions button on the Notation toolbar. Click a point in your drawing to begin the dimension line. Move your mouse (you do not have to hold the mouse button down) to a second point and click. A dimension line including offsets, arrows and a numerical value is added to your drawing. Move your mouse away from the dimension line to stretch your extension lines. When the extension lines are the desired length, click to finish the dimension. 4. 2. 3. 1. Select Tools > Dimensions > Aligned Dimensions, or click the Aligned Dimensions button on the Notation toolbar. Click a point in your drawing to begin the dimension line. Move your mouse (you do not have to hold the mouse button down) to a second point and click. A dimension line including offsets, arrows and a numerical value is added to your drawing. Move your mouse away from the dimension line to stretch your extension lines. When the extension lines are the desired length, click to finish the dimension. 2. 3. 4. Moving a Dimension Line You can move a dimension line using the Move Dimension Line tool. When you move a dimension line, the extension lines stretch to accommodate the move. To move a dimension line using the Move Dimension Line tool: 1. Select the dimension. 164 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Stretching Dimensions 2. Right-click and select Move Dimension Line, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Dimension Line. Click any point to serve as the base point for the move. Move your mouse in the direction you want to move the dimension line. Click to finish the move. 2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. 26 3. 4. 5. Stretching Dimensions You can make a dimension longer or shorter, or stretch either of its extension lines. When you stretch the length of a dimension, the dimension value updates automatically to reflect the new length. To adjust the length of a dimension: 1. 2. Select the dimension. Click on one of the lower extension grab handles, then drag the dimension to stretch it. Note that it is possible to stretch the extension line at the same time. 3. In the Dimension Styles dialog, select the style you want to apply to the dimension. To create a new dimension style, click the Add Item button, then type a name for the style and press ENTER. To edit the properties of the currently selected dimension style, click Edit, then make your changes in the Edit Dimension Styles dialog. See Dimension Style Properties on page 166. 4. 5. Grab handle With the desired style selected, click Set Current. Click OK. 3. Release your mouse button. To adjust the length of extension lines: 1. 2. Select the dimension. Click the grab handle at the end of the extension line, then drag to stretch the extension line. Release your mouse button. Note: Dimension styles that are edited or added through inserted dimensions are saved with the current project only. If you want to save them in the dimension styles library, so they can be made available in other projects, see Saving Customized Dimension Styles to the Dimension Styles Library File on page 255. Deleting a Dimension You can delete a dimension in a couple of easy steps. To delete a dimension: 1. 2. Select the dimension. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete. 3. Changing the Style of a Dimension You can change a dimension’s line, arrow and text style by applying a different dimension style to it, or by editing dimension style properties. To change the style of a dimension: 1. Select the dimension. You can select multiple dimensions using Shift+click. User’s Guide 165 Chapter 26 Text & Dimensions Dimension Style Properties You can control a dimension’s line, arrow and text style properties. Dimension Text Anatomy of a Dimension Dimension Line Arrow, Tick or Dot Text Extension Line Lines and Arrows Units The units (e.g. feet and inches) and precision used to display the dimension value. Override system units: Uses the unit of measure specified in the Edit Dimension Styles dialog instead of the unit of measure specified in the program settings. Type: Choose from Feet-Inches, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters or Inches. Precision: For Feet-Inches, the choices are whole units (0, 1/2, 1/4 and so on). For metric units, the choices are number of decimal places you can use. Arrow Type You can specify an arrow type for dimensions and leaders (leaders are used with the Text with Leader tool). Choose an arrow, dot or tick for your arrow type. The properties below the Arrow Type selection window (Extension Offset, Dimension Offset, etc.) vary depending on the arrow type selected. As you make different selections, the dimension updates in the preview window. Text Style Refers to the font, font style, text height and color of the dimension text. Click Text Style to select a style. Vertical Text Position This is the vertical position of the dimension text relative to the dimension line. Vertically Centered: Text is placed inside the dimension line. Horizontal Text: Forces the dimension text to always be horizontal, regardless of the dimension line's angle. Above Dimension Line: Text is placed above the dimension line. 166 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Dimension Style Properties Distance: Distance between the text and the dimension line when placing text above the dimension line. 26 Horizontal Text Position This is the position of the dimension text relative to the ends of the dimension line. Centered: Centers the text inside the dimension line. Distance from first end: Places the text a specific distance from the first end of the dimension. Specify the distance in the Distance edit box. Distance from the second end: Places the text a specific distance from the second end of the dimension. Specify the distance in the Distance edit box. Line Styles You can select a different line style for the dimension line, extension lines and arrows. A line style determines the line type and color. To assign a different line style to a dimension component, select the component in the left pane, then select the desired line style in the right pane. For information about creating custom line styles, see the Linestyles chapter on page 243. User’s Guide 167 Chapter Project Estimate 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design keeps track of all the materials you use to create your landscape plan as you design it. You can generate a project estimate with a single mouse click. The resulting estimate is displayed in a detailed spreadsheet that can be saved and printed. Sample unit prices are provided for your convenience, but you can specify custom pricing directly from your suppliers. The grand total is calculated for you automatically, making estimating a breeze! 169 Chapter 27 Project Estimate Generating a Project Estimate You can view an accurate project estimate at any time during a design session. The estimate includes a list of materials, the quantities used, and pricing. The estimate is always up-to-date and reflects your project in its current state. To generate a project estimate: 1. Select Tools > Calculate/Estimate > Generate Project Estimate. To turn grid lines off: 1. In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select View > Show Grid. To filter locations from the estimate: 1. In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, click the Filter Report button beside the report form drop box. 2. By default, the estimate is shown in Microsoft® Excel XLS spreadsheet format. You can switch it to a standard column report format, which can be saved as a TXT file. If you want you can remove the grid lines from the display. If you have opened a project from another 3D Home Design program which contains a house, you can choose to omit all or selected locations from the estimate if you want. The estimate can be printed and saved. To switch to a standard column report format: 1. In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select Standard Report Form from the report form drop box. To omit a location and its elements from the project estimate, click the location’s filter icon. You can omit landscaping elements from the report by filtering the terrain out. Click OK. The estimate is updated. 3. To print the estimate: 1. In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select File > Print, or click the Print button to the left of the report form drop box. In the Print dialog, select the printer you want to use, then click Print. 2. To save the estimate: 1. In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select File > Save and Close, or click the Save and Close button at the bottom of the dialog. Note: By default, the estimate is saved in the same directory where the project is saved. 170 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Opening a Saved Estimate To save using a different file name or save location: 1. Click the Browse button next to the Report File edit box at the bottom of the Generate Project Estimate dialog. In the Report Filename dialog, select the location where you want to save the estimate. In the File name edit box, type the name you want to save under. Click Save. The estimate is saved under the specified name and location. 27 Editing Material Pricing Most elements have a default unit price set for them in their properties. These prices are used in the project estimate. If you have already created your design, you can edit the prices of inserted elements by selecting them in the drawing, then editing their properties. Alternatively you can generate and save a project estimate, then edit the pricing in Microsoft® Excel or Notepad, depending on the report format you choose. If you edit the price of any element in the catalog, the price change will affect all new insertions of the element. To edit the price of an inserted element: 1. Select the element in your drawing. You can select multiple elements of the same type using Shift+click. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the properties dialog, select the Quantity tab. 2. 3. 4. To open the estimate in the associated editor: 1. Select File > Open with Associated Editor. If you haven’t saved the estimate yet, it is saved for you. The estimate is then opened in the associated editor. For estimates in the XLS format, the estimate opens in Microsoft® Excel. For estimates in the Standard Report (TXT) format, the estimate opens in a text editor such as Notepad. 2. 3. To close the Generate Project Estimate dialog: 1. Select File > Exit, or click the Close button in the top right corner of the dialog. Opening a Saved Estimate Once you have saved an estimate, you can open it any time in its associated editor (Microsoft® Excel or Notepad). You can then edit and print the estimate if you want. To open a saved estimate: 1. Select Tools > Calculate/Estimate > View Project Estimate. 4. 2. 3. Click the Browse button, then locate the file to open. Click Open. XLS files open in Microsoft® Excel, and TXT files open in a text editor such as Notepad. 5. Edit the value in the Price edit box. Note that prices are unit prices. For a carpet, for example, you would enter the price per square foot, not the price of the entire carpet. Click OK in the properties dialog. User’s Guide 171 Chapter 27 Project Estimate To edit material pricing in the catalog: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click and element in the catalog and select Catalog Manager. From the Element drop box, select the element type you want to edit. In the Select a Type window, select the group containing the element you want to edit. In the Select an Element window, select the element to edit. Select Catalog > Element Properties, or right-click and select Properties. In the properties dialog, select the Quantity tab. Edit the value in the Price edit box. Note that prices are unit prices. For a carpet, for example, you would enter the price per square foot, not the price of the entire carpet. Click OK in the properties dialog. Click OK. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 172 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Chapter 3DTrueView™ 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design incorporates powerful 3DTrueView™ rendering technology. 3DTrueView™ rendering adds light and shadow to a textured 3D view to achieve stunning, photo-realistic images of your design. These images can be printed directly from the screen. You can also choose to save the rendered image to a bitmap (BMP) or JPG file that you can then open in most graphic editing applications. Creating a 3DTrueView™ rendering involves nothing more than a single mouse click. Just sit back and watch your design come to life! 173 Chapter 28 3DTrueView™ How 3DTrueView™ Rendering Works A rendered view is a photo realistic view that includes light and shadows. When you render a 3D scene, the program performs a series of lighting calculations to determine the lighting in a scene. These are also called radiosity calculations. Once a final result is met, the scene is ray traced, or rendered. Ray tracing works by tracing the path taken by a ray of light through the scene, and calculating the ray’s reflection, refraction, or absorption whenever it intersects an element in the scene. Material properties define how light reflects off a surface. Direct light and ambient light levels define the light that is reflected. Direct light is light that is emitted from light fixtures. It has a specific color, intensity and direction. Ambient light can be thought of as a general level of light that is everywhere in the scene. Every light in a scene contributes to the overall ambient light in a scene. The first part of the radiosity process involves finding those element surfaces that are visible to direct light and calculating how much light is transferred to each element. Some elements will receive more light than others depending on their surface properties, and different surfaces will reflect different amounts of light. Still, each element will absorb some of the light, so the total amount reflected back into the scene will be less than that emitted by the light fixtures. The next part of the process involves finding the element that reflects the most light, and repeating the process. The element is considered a secondary light source, so we need to calculate how much of its light is transferred to other elements in the scene. The process is repeated, one step at a time, until the amount of light remaining in the scene is negligible in comparison to the light originally emitted by the light fixtures. We then say that the radiosity calculations have converged to a solution, and that’s when ray tracing begins. Setting the Viewpoint for the Scene When you create a 3DTrueView™ rendering, your model is captured at the angle currently shown on the screen. In most cases, the best type of view for 3DTrueView™ rendering is a Perspective view, because it is the most realistic. For information about 3D viewing, see 2D and 3D Viewing on page 19. Specific topics you might want to look at: • • • • Viewing in 3D on page 21 Changing Your Viewpoint on page 210 Selecting a Preset Camera Angle on page 212 Changing the Viewing Field Angle on page 213 Setting the Scene Even though creating a 3DTrueView™ rendering involves nothing more than a mouse click, there are a few things you should consider beforehand. Note: It doesn’t matter what display mode (wireframe, patterned, etc.) you’re currently in. 3DTrueView™ renderings will always be textured. Daytime Shots If you want to do a daytime shot, the most important factor to consider is sunlight. This is determined by your global position and time of day. By adjusting these settings, you control how much sunlight is in the scene, and from what angle it shines. See Defining Your Location and Time of Day on page 175. Night Shots To create a night shot, you need to first set your background to a night scene. See Selecting a Background for 3D Views on page 215. Once your background is set, all you need to do is set the time to a time of day when there is no sun. If you do want to create a night shot, you will probably want to insert some exterior lighting in your design. See Inserting Landscape Lighting on page 96. 174 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Defining Your Location and Time of Day 28 Defining Your Location and Time of Day You can define where your model is located in the world, as well as set the time of day. This determines how much daylight there will be in the scene. To define your location and time of day: 1. Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Global Settings tab. 4. To set the month and day, select a month by clicking the arrows on the month bar at the top of the calendar, then click a number on the calendar. To set the time of day, enter a time in the Time edit box, or use the slider to select a time. Enable either the am or fm radio button. Clicking Set Current Time reads the current time set in your computer system and defaults to the next smallest 5-minute increment of time. For example, 12:04 becomes 12:00. To keep track of changes in time due to daylight savings, enable the Daylight Saving check box. To set the angle from True North, enter a value in the Angle from True North edit box. This is the “geographic” North, as opposed to the “magnetic” North which you see on a compass. The value you specify determines where North is on your screen, and affects the angle of the sun for daylight rendering. The number in degrees that you enter is in relation to the 90° perpendicular orientation of your drawing. A value of 1º makes the top of the screen North. A value of 90º makes the top of the screen East, and the left side of the screen North. For more information, see “Specifying the Angle of True North” in the Online Help (enter the keywords “true north”). It is assumed that information regarding building orientation to True North can be taken from, or calculated from, a surveyor's certificate. However, True North can be calculated from a Magnetic North reading taken at your building site. For more information, see “Calculating True North from Magnetic North” in the Online Help (enter the keywords “true north”). 5. 2. 6. 7. 3. Select a country and city from the appropriate drop boxes. You can add or edit a city if needed. Just click the Add City or Edit City button. You will need to know the longitude, latitude and time zone of the city. You can save new or edited cities to the city template for use in other projects if you want. 8. Click OK. To save new or edited cities: 1. On the Global Settings page of the Program Settings dialog, click the Save button below the city list. User’s Guide 175 Chapter 28 3DTrueView™ 2. 3. 4. In the Save As dialog, select the timezone.cty file in the program’s templates folder. Click Save. Click Yes to replace the original city template. If you click Stop during the solution stage, radiosity calculations will stop, and the scene will be instantly rendered. This may be fine if the process seems to be taking a long time, but you may not get the result you want. 3. Once the radiosity calculations are complete, rendering begins. Please wait while the image is generated. screen that shows you the progression of the radiosity calculations. To load a saved city template into other projects: 1. On the Global Settings page of the Program Settings dialog, click the Load button below the city list. In the Open dialog, select the timezone.cty file in the program’s Templates folder. Click Open. The city list is updated automatically. 2. 3. Creating a 3DTrueView™ Rendering Creating a photo realistic 3DTrueView™ rendering involves only a simple menu selection or mouse click. Rendered views are displayed instantly on the screen once they’ve been calculated. If you enable the Render to File option in your render options, the image will also be saved to a BMP or JPG file for later access. For more information see Saving a 3DTrueView™ Rendering to a File on page 179. To create a 3DTrueView rendering: 1. 2. Make sure you have set the 3D scene exactly how you want it. Select View > 3DTrueView > Render 3DTrueView, or click the Render 3DTrueView button on the 3DTrueView toolbar. The solution begins. Before the rendered view is generated, the program goes through a process of calculating light in the scene. These are called radiosity calculations. Basically, it determines how much light is given off by the sun or by lighting fixtures, and how much light is reflected off the surface of elements. The view is updated at regular intervals during these calculations. A dialog appears on the 4. Once the rendering is complete, it fills your current view window. The Rendering 3DTrueView dialog tells you that the image is complete. At this point you can print the view if you want. When you are finished viewing the 3DTrueView™ rendering, click Close in the Rendering 3DTrueView dialog. The view returns to its original, pre-rendered state. If you selected the Render to File option before rendering, the image is saved in the same directory your project is located in. For more information, see Saving a 3DTrueView™ Rendering to a File on page 179. Adjusting the Rendering Quality By default, the quality level chosen for 3DTrueView™ renderings is Level 1 - Lowest (fastest). You can select an increased quality level 176 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Changing the Refresh Rate During Lighting Calculations before rendering if you want. Note that the higher level of quality you choose, the longer the rendering process takes. To adjust the rendering quality: 1. Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab. Select the quality level you want from the Quality Level drop box. 28 Adjusting the Brightness of the Rendered Image The program's "virtual camera" works in a manner similar to actual point-and-shoot cameras. It automatically calculates the correct "exposure" for the lighting situation and produces a view with infinite depth of field (i.e. everything is in focus). However if, in exceptional circumstances, you want to brighten or darken a rendering, you can use the Image Brightness option to manually override the automatic exposure. Brightness can be increased or decreased. To adjust image brightness: 1. Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab. Specify the amount you want to increase or decrease the brightness in the Image Brightness edit box, or use the arrow buttons to scroll up or down. A positive value increases the brightness, while a negative values decreases it. Click OK. 2. 3. 4. Click OK. 2. 3. Changing the Refresh Rate During Lighting Calculations As the program performs lighting calculations, the view updates at regular intervals to reflect calculations up to that point. You can change the interval at which the view refreshes by increasing or decreasing the number of steps between visual updates. To change the refresh rate during radiosity calculations: 1. Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab. Edit the value in the Change Display Every _ Steps edit box. Fewer steps increase the frequency of visual updates, but can increase rendering time. Click OK. 4. Turning Daylight Off By default, daylight is always included in radiosity calculations, even for night scenes. If you are doing a rendering inside a model that was created in another 3D Home Design program, you can turn daylight off if you want. This basically omits daylight from the lighting calculations, and can speed up rendering. You may want to do this in a room with very small windows, for example. Note: The Enable Daylight option should always remain on for exterior shots, even if it is a night shot. If you want to create a night shot, change your time of day instead. See Defining Your Location and Time of Day on page 175. 2. 3. 4. User’s Guide 177 Chapter 28 3DTrueView™ To turn daylight off: 1. Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab. Uncheck the Enable Daylight check box. Click OK. 6. 2. 3. 4. 5. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab. In the Effects area, check the Enable check box. Enable the Fog radio button. In the Density edit box, specify the desired thickness of the fog. The higher the percentage, the thicker the fog. Click OK. 2. 3. 4. Using Antialiasing to Reduce Jagged Edges Antialiasing blends pixels in areas where two colors or two materials meet to reduce artifacts (or “stair steps”) and produce a more natural look to the scene. By default, antialiasing is disabled to increase rendering speed. You can select varying levels of antialiasing. To use antialiasing: 1. Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab. Use the up arrows key next to the Antialiasing check box to increase the level of antialiasing. The higher the level, the cleaner the image, but the longer the rendering process takes. The highest level is 4. Click OK. Creating a Smoke Effect To create a smoke effect in your rendering, you need to turn on the Smoke option in your rendering settings before rendering the view. To create a smoke effect: 1. Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab. In the Effects area, check the Enable check box. Enable the Smoke radio button. In the Density edit box, specify the desired thickness of the smoke. The higher the percentage, the thicker the smoke. Click OK. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2. 3. 6. 4. Adjusting the Light Coming from Light Fixtures To adjust the color or intensity of light coming from a light fixture, you can add light bulbs, change a light bulb to a different type, adjust the intensity of the light, select a different color for the light, or turn a light off completely. See the following topics: Creating a Fog Effect To create a fog effect in your rendering, you need to turn on the Fog option in your rendering settings before rendering the view. To create a fog effect: 1. Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar. Editing a Light Fixture’s Light Source on page 96 Turning a Light On or Off on page 97 178 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Editing the Surface Properties of Materials 28 Editing the Surface Properties of Materials Different materials have different finishes. Surface finishes include Dull, Low Gloss, Semi Gloss, High Gloss, Liquid, Fully Reflective, Partially Reflective, Shiny, Fully Transparent, Partially Transparent, and Varnished. The finish determines how much a material reflects, emits and absorbs light. These factors can affect the lighting in a rendered scene. To edit the surface properties of an element’s materials: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the element in your drawing. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the properties dialog, select the Appearance tab. On the Appearance page, click the Select button, or click the Texture swatch to access the Materials dialog. In the Materials dialog, click the Rendered swatch to bring up the Edit Materials dialog. To change the surface finish of the material (dull, shiny, etc.), make a selection from the drop box in the Surface Properties area. If you want to specify a custom surface finish, select Custom in the list, then click the Advanced button. If creating a custom finish, specify its properties. These are described below. Specular. Reflection that creates highlights on materials, making them appear shiny. Emissive. The amount of light given off by a material. The more emissive a material is, the more self-luminous it appears. Transparency. The degree to which a material is pervious to light. Color Bleed. The degree to which different colors blend where they meet. 8. 9. Click OK in the Edit Materials dialog. Click OK in the Materials dialog. 10. Click OK in the properties dialog. Saving a 3DTrueView™ Rendering to a File Rendered views are displayed instantly on the screen once they’ve been calculated. If you want the image to be saved to a file, you need to turn on the Render to File option in your render settings before creating the rendering. The image will be saved to a BMP or JPG file that you can open in most graphic editing applications. To save a 3DTrueView rendering to a file: 1. Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab. In the Image Output area, enable the Render to File check box. By default, rendered images are saved in the same directory your projects are stored in. By default, this would be a directory similar to the following: C:\Documents and Settings\\My Documents\Landscape Design Deluxe 6\Projects To select a different location to save your rendered image in, click the Browse button next to the current output folder path. In the Open dialog, navigate to the folder where you want to store rendered images. By default, the file has the same name as your project for easy identification. To specify a custom name, enter the name in the File Name edit box. You can select either BMP or JPG as your file format from the Files of type drop box. 5. Click OK. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. User’s Guide 179 Chapter 28 3DTrueView™ Specifying the Output Size of Rendered Images By default, 3DTrueView™ images fill the view window they are created from. If you enabled the Render to File option in your rendering settings, the image is also saved at that size. You can select another output size if you want. To specify an output size for rendered images: 1. Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab. In the Image Output area, select the desired size from the Size drop box. The default selection is Current View Size, which saves the image at the size currently shown on the screen. Pre-defined sizes include 640 x 480, 800 x 600, and 1024 x 768. Selecting the Custom option lets you define a custom size by entering values in the Width and Height edit boxes. Click OK. To create and save an additional 3DTrueView rendering: 1. Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab. In the Image Output area, make sure Render to File is checked. Click the Browse button next to the current output folder path. In the Open dialog, enter a name in the File name edit box that is different from any other images that you have saved. You can select either BMP or JPG as your file format from the Files of type drop box. Click Open. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog. The next 3DTrueView™ rendering you create will be saved to the new file name. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2. 3. 6. 7. 4. Creating Multiple 3DTrueView™ Renderings in the Same Project If you enable the Render to File option before creating a rendering, the image is saved to a BMP or JPG file in your projects directory. The file has the same name as your project. If you create another 3DTrueView™ rendering in the same project, the file from the previous rendering is overwritten. If you want to create and save more 3DTrueView™ renderings within the same project, you need to specify a different output name for each new image before creating the rendering. 180 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Part 8 Managing Files Opening, Saving & Printing Exporting Files page 183 page 189 Chapter Opening, Saving & Printing Once you have started and saved a project, you can work on it whenever you like. You can open a saved project by selecting the Open a Saved Project button in the startup dialog, or by selecting Open on the File menu if the program is already running. Once you have opened a project, you can edit, save, print and export it, as well as save it as a template for future projects. You can have more than one project open at a time. If you have more than one project open, you can switch between projects using the Window menu. As you edit your drawing, the changes you make are stored temporarily in your computer’s memory until you save them. The Save function saves the current project under its current name. You can use Save As to save a project under a different name, and Save All to save all currently open projects. You can also use the Save As tool to save a drawing as a template for use in future projects. 183 Chapter 29 Opening, Saving & Printing Opening a Saved Project You can open a saved project (*.bld file) directly from the startup dialog that appears when you start the program. Just click Open a Saved Project, then select the project to open. If the program is already running, you can open a saved project using the Open tool. To open a saved project if the program is already running: 1. 2. 3. Select File > Open, or click the Open button on the Standard toolbar. In the Open dialog, navigate to the location where you saved the project. Select the project to open, then click Open. 2. 3. 3. Files\3D Home Architect\Landscape Design Deluxe 6\Samples). Select the project to open, then click Open. Changing the Number of Files in the Recently Used File List By default, a maximum of four projects are listed in the recently used file list near the bottom of the File menu. You can increase or decrease this number if you want. To change the number of files in the recently used file list: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab. Type the maximum number of files to display in the Recently used file list edit box, or use the arrows to select a number. You can list a maximum of 9 files. Note: You can open drawings from version 5.0 or later of 3D Home Design Suite Professional, 3D Home Architect®, or 3D Home Landscape Designer. Tip: If the project you want to open is one that your recently worked on, it may be listed in the recently used file list near the bottom of the File menu. Just select it to open it. Repairing Damaged Projects Occasionally a drawing may become damaged, usually when drawing walls. The Repair Project tool scans the project for elements that have caused damage, and either fixes or removes them. To repair a damaged project: 1. Select File > Repair Project. If the recovery is successful, the following dialog box appears: Viewing Sample Plans The program ships with a number of sample projects that you can use to see what the program can do, and get design ideas. You can also use a sample project as a template for your own design project. Sample projects are available for selection in the startup dialog when you launch the program. Just click View Sample Plans and select one from the list. If the program is already running, you can open a sample project using the Open tool. To open a sample plan if the program is already running: 1. 2. Select File > Open, or click the Open button on the Standard toolbar. In the Open dialog, navigate to the location where you installed the program, then select the Samples directory (e.g. C:\Program If the recovery is not successful, a dialog appears telling you why it was not successful. 184 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Saving Projects 29 Saving Projects The program as three save functions: Save, Save As and Save All. They are located on the File menu. • To save the current project under the current name, or to save the current project for the first time, select File > Save, or click the Save button on the Standard toolbar. If you are saving for the first time, you are prompted for a file name. To save the current project under a different name (i.e. create a copy of it), select File > Save As, then specify a name in the Save As dialog. To save all currently open projects, select File > Save All, or click the Save All button on the Standard toolbar. Note: When you are prompted to save your project, you can choose not to save at that time by clicking Cancel in the prompt dialog. If you want to disable the automatic save prompt, you can click Disable in the dialog. Note: Disabling the Automatic Save applies to the current project only. The Automatic Save is turned on by default for all new projects. • Specifying a Default Save Directory By default, new (unsaved) projects are saved in a directory similar to the following unless you specify otherwise: C:\Documents and Settings\\My Documents\Landscape Design Deluxe 6\Projects You can specify a different default save directory if you want. To specify the default save directory: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab. In the File Paths area, click on the Projects Directory to select it. Click Modify. In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the directory you want to use as your default save directory, then click OK. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog. • Setting the Automatic Save The Automatic Save option prompts you to save your project at regular intervals. This is a great way to make sure you save your changes regularly and avoid any loss should a power failure or system error occur. By default, the Automatic Save is enabled. 2. 3. 4. 5. To set the Automatic Save: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab. Enable the Automatic Save every check box. In the edit box, specify the save interval in minutes, or use the arrows to select a value. Click OK. 6. Saving a Project as a Template By default, every new project you start is based on a template. A template determines what settings new projects will have, such as the unit of measure, and building location settings. You can even include elements in a template if you want. You can create a template out of any drawing by simply saving it in your Templates directory. To use the template in new drawings you need to select the template in your Startup options. 2. 3. 4. 5. User’s Guide 185 Chapter 29 Opening, Saving & Printing To create a template: 1. Unless you have already created the drawing you want to use as a template, start a new project (File > New). Specify the settings you want to save with the template. Note that any elements in your drawing will be saved as well, so unless you want these elements to appear in new projects, you should delete the elements from your drawing. Select File > Save As. In the Save As dialog, navigate to the program’s Templates folder (e.g. C:\Program Files\3D Home Architect\Landscape Design Deluxe 6\Templates). In the File name edit box, type a name for the template. Click Save. 3. In the Startup area, make sure the Startup using Project Template radio button is enabled. Click the Browse button next to the current template name. In the Open dialog, select the template you want to use from the Templates directory, then click Open. In the Program Settings dialog, click OK. 4. 5. 2. 6. 3. 4. Note: You need to start a new drawing to put the new template into effect. Disabling the Use of Templates By default, new projects are based on a template that determines the unit of measure used. Templates also have a few pre-defined settings, such as a set of default building locations. If you prefer you can start new projects without using a template. If you choose to do this, new projects will be blank with no pre-defined settings. To disable the use of templates: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab. In the Startup area, enable the Do not use Project Template radio button. Click OK. 5. 6. Selecting a Default Project Template By default, new projects are based on a default template that ships with the program. If you chose to work in Imperial units during program installation, new projects will be based on the 1-Blank Project (ft & in).bld template, which is a blank drawing with measurements set to feet and inches. If you chose to work in Metric, new projects will be based on the template, which has its unit of measure set to millimeters. Each template contains three default building locations: Foundation, Ground Floor and Second Floor. You can select a different template to use as the default template when starting new drawings. You can use one of the templates that ships with the program, or one that you have created yourself. To select a default project template: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab. 2. 3. 4. Setting the Path to the Templates Directory By default, the Templates directory is located in the 3D Home Architect Landscape Design program group. If you have moved your Templates directory, or have chosen to store your templates in a different directory, you should reset the path to the template directory in your program settings. The path you set determines the default directory shown when you browse for templates in your Startup options on the General page of the Program Settings dialog. 2. 186 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Selecting a Directory for Temporary Files To set the path to your templates directory: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab. In the File Paths area, click on the Templates Directory to select it. Click Modify. In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the directory containing your templates, then click OK. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog. than one drawing open, make sure the drawing you want to close is the active one. To close a drawing: 1. 2. 3. Select File > Close, or click the Close button on the Standard toolbar. In the dialog, click Yes or No when you are asked to save changes. If you haven’t named the project yet and you clicked Yes in the previous step, specify a name for the project in the Save As dialog, then click Save. 29 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Printing Drawings The program uses the standard Windows Print routine with a few added features for your printing convenience. To print a drawing: 1. Select File > Print, or click the Print button on the Standard toolbar. Selecting a Directory for Temporary Files Certain functions of the program create temporary files which are stored in a directory on your computer system. By default, the path to the temporary directory is as follows: C:\Documents and Settings\\Local Settings\Temp You can specify a different directory to store your temporary files in if you want. To set a different temporary files directory: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab. In the File Paths area, click on the Temporary Directory to select it. Click Modify. In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the directory you want to use as your default temporary files directory, then click OK. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2. In the Print dialog, specify your print settings. Printer. Select a printer from the drop box. Click Properties to specify general printer properties. Print Area. The All option prints the extents of your drawing, which is the portion of your drawing that currently contains elements. As you add new elements, the extents update automatically. The Currently Displayed User’s Guide 6. Closing Projects Projects remain open until you close them or exit the program. You can close the active project without exiting the program. If you have more 187 Chapter 29 Opening, Saving & Printing option prints exactly what you see on the screen in the current view. If only part of your drawing is currently visible, only that part will appear in the printout. Copies. Select the number of copies to print from the Number of copies drop box. Scale. The Print to Scale option prints the current view according to its defined scale in the view properties, regardless of the paper size. The scale is the ratio of drawing units to real-world units. A scale of 1:1 (12" = 1'- 0") creates a view that is the same scale as the view in the main drawing window. A scale of 1:12 (1" = 1'- 0") creates a smaller-scale view. Note that if you change the scale, the model does not scale on the screen. It will only be scaled on paper when you print the drawing. However, things like text and dimensions will scale on the screen because they are specified in real-world units, whereas the model on your screen is created using units that are only proportional to real-world units. Regardless of a view’s scale, things like text and dimensions will always print out at the size that was assigned to them at the time of insertion. For example, if you inserted text that had a 1/2” text height setting, the text will be 1/2” on paper, regardless of the view scale or what the text looks like on the screen. To see a view’s defined scale, select Edit > View Properties, or right-click in the drawing area and select View Properties, or right-click on a view’s tab below the drawing area and select View Properties. Note that the Print to Scale option will not work with most 3D views (unless they are elevation views), since 3D views cannot be scaled. The Fit To Page option scales the drawing to fit the selected paper size. Note that this is the default setting for 3D views, since 3D views are not affected by changes in scale (unless they are elevation views). Placement on Paper. If you select Lower left, the image is printed in the lower left corner of the paper. If you select Center on paper, the image is centered on the paper. 3. Graphics. Choose from three levels of print quality (150, 300 or 600 dpi). A higher resolution (600 dpi) produces graphic images that are sharper and show finer detail, while a lower resolution (150 dpi) permits faster printing and shows less detail. Click OK. Using Print Setup The program uses the standard Windows Print Setup for printer and paper selection. To select a printer and paper for output: 1. 2. 3. Select File > Print Setup. Choose the options you want. Click OK. 188 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Chapter Exporting Files You can export your drawing to a variety of file formats including DXF, 3DS, WRL, BMP, JPG and TGA. 189 Chapter 30 Exporting Files Exporting Your Model The Export 3D Model tool lets you export your drawing to three file formats: • • • AutoCAD Basic DXF (*.dxf) Autodesk 3D Studio (*.3ds) VRML (*.wrl) 5. Click Save. The Export View dialog appears: To export your model: 1. 2. Select File > Export > 3D Model. In the Save As dialog, click on the Save as type drop box and select the file format you want to export to. Locate the directory where you want to save the exported file. In the File name edit box, type a file name. Click Save. A dialog appears confirming the model has been exported successfully. 7. 6. 3. 4. 5. From the Color drop box, select the desired color setting. Choose from Grayscale, 256 Color, High Color (16-bit), High Color (24-bit) or True Color (32-bit). From the Size drop box, select the desired output size. By default, Current View is selected, which saves the image at the size currently shown on the screen. You can choose from a list of preset sizes, or select Custom and enter the desired values in the Width and Height edit boxes. Click Save. The view is exported. 8. 6. Click OK. Exporting the Current View The Export 2D Image tool lets you export the current view to a BMP, JPG or TGA file. To export a view: 1. 2. Select File > Export > 2D Image. In the Save As dialog, click on the Save as type drop box and select the file format you want to export to. Locate the directory where you want to save the exported file. In the File name edit box, type a file name. 3. 4. 190 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Part 9 Customization Screen Settings Managing View Windows Custom Viewing Catalogs & Elements Materials, Colors & Patterns Line Styles Text & Dimension Styles Light Sources page 193 page 203 page 209 page 221 page 235 page 243 page 249 page 257 Chapter Screen Settings 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design’s screen environment is totally customizable, so you can create a work environment that is both functional and comfortable according to your personal needs. This chapter describes how to display, hide and move screen components, change the color of the drawing area and toolbar areas, and improve graphics display. 193 Chapter 31 Screen Settings Displaying/Hiding Toolbars There are 10 toolbars available for display. (By default, not all of them are displayed.) You can hide or show individual toolbars by setting your workspace options. When you display a toolbar, it is displayed in one of the toolbar areas which are located directly above and below the drawing area. Note that if you hide a toolbar that is displayed in a tab, the tab is hidden from view as well. To hide or show toolbars: 1. 2. Select Settings > Toolbars. Check the toolbars that you want to display, and uncheck those that you do not want to display. Click OK. 2. 3. 4. Make sure the check box of the toolbar you want to display is enabled. Disable the toolbar’s Tabbed check box. Click OK. Changing the Background Color of Toolbars You can change the general background color of individual toolbars by changing your workspace options. This applies to both tabbed and freestanding toolbars. To change the background color of toolbars: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select Settings > Toolbars. Click the Color box next to the toolbar you want to change. In the Color dialog, select or create the desired color, then click OK. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog. 3. Tip: If a toolbar is currently floating freely on the screen, you can hide it by clicking the close button on its title bar, or right-clicking its title bar and selecting Hide. Displaying Toolbars in Tabbed Format You can display any toolbar in tabbed format, meaning a tab will be added to the row of toolbar tabs below the menu bar. To display a toolbar in a tab: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select Settings > Toolbars. Enable the check box of the toolbar you want to display in a tab. Enable the toolbar’s Tabbed check box. Click OK. Changing the Color of Toolbar Areas The program has two toolbar areas: one directly above the drawing area, and one directly below the drawing area. By default, the background color of these areas is dark blue. You can change this color in your workspace options. To change the color of toolbar areas: 1. 2. 3. Select Settings > Toolbars. Click the colored box next to the Toolbar Areas option. In the Color dialog, select or create the desired color for your toolbar areas, then click OK to return to the Program Settings dialog. Click OK. Displaying Toolbars in a Nontabbed Format By default, the Landscape and Terrain toolbars are displayed in tabs below the menu bar. You can change any tabbed toolbar to be displayed as a non-tabbed, free-standing toolbar. To display toolbars in non-tabbed format: 1. Select Settings > Toolbars. 4. 194 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Moving Toolbars 31 Moving Toolbars You can drag any non-tabbed toolbar to any location on the screen. At window edges, the toolbar will automatically dock itself according to the location. For example, if you drag it to the right edge of the screen, it will assume a vertical orientation. If you drag it into the drawing window, it will float freely. You can then move it by dragging it by its title bar. To move a toolbar: 1. Click and hold your mouse button over the left grip end of the toolbar (or its title bar if it is currently in the drawing area). Resizing the Catalog Panel When the catalog panel is docked at one side of your screen, you can make it narrower or wider by simply clicking and dragging its edges. If you have moved the catalog panel away from the edge, so it is free-floating, you can resize it by clicking and dragging its corners. To resize the catalog panel if it is docked: 1. Position your pointer over the panel's left outside edge. (If you have moved the catalog panel to the left side of the screen, position your pointer over the right edge.) Watch for the Resize cursor to appear. Toolbar Grip End 2. 3. Drag the toolbar to the desired location. Release the mouse button. 2. 3. Resize cursor Displaying/Hiding the Catalog Panel By default, the catalog panel is displayed on the right side of the screen, as it is an essential component of the program. You can hide the catalog panel from view if you want. To display or hide the catalog panel: 1. Select Settings > Toolbars. Or, select Settings > Program Settings (or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar) and select the Workspace tab in the Program Settings dialog. In the Tool Display area, check or uncheck the Catalog Panel check box. Click OK. Click and drag the edge of the panel to stretch it in the desired direction. Release your mouse button. To resize the catalog panel if it is free-floating: 1. 2. 3. Position your pointer over one of the panel’s corners. Click and drag to stretch the panel. Release your mouse button. Moving the Catalog Panel If the catalog panel is docked on one side of the screen, you can move it by clicking and dragging its outside edge. If you move a panel to the side of the screen, it will automatically dock itself to the edge of the screen. Otherwise, the panel is displayed in a free-floating window. If the panel is free-floating, you can move it by clicking and dragging its title bar. 2. 3. User’s Guide 195 Chapter 31 Screen Settings To move the catalog panel when it is docked: 1. Position your pointer over the panel’s outside edge (the edge that is at the side of the screen). Watch for the Move cursor. Changing the Background Color of the Drawing Window By default, the color of the main drawing window is white. You can select a different color if you like. Note, however, that selecting a different background color can make some elements difficult to see depending on their color settings. To change the background color of the drawing window: Move cursor 1. 2. 3. Click and drag the panel to move it. Release your mouse button. 2. 3. Select Settings > Toolbars. Or, select Settings > Program Settings (or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar) and select the Workspace tab in the Program Settings dialog. Click the colored box next to the Background option. In the Color dialog, select or create the desired color for your drawing area, then click OK to return to the Program Settings dialog. Click OK. To move the catalog panel when it is free-floating: 1. 2. 3. Position your pointer over the panel’s title bar. Click and drag the panel to move it. Release your mouse button. 4. Displaying/Hiding the Status Bar The Status bar can be toggled on and off as needed. To display/hide the Status bar: 1. Select Settings > Toolbars. Or select Settings > Program Settings and select the Workspace tab in the Program Settings dialog. In the Tool Display area, select or clear the Status Bar check box. Click OK. Hardware Acceleration The Hardware Acceleration option controls how your screen responds during a work session. By default, hardware acceleration is enabled. Hardware acceleration increases the speed of your graphics display. When hardware acceleration is enabled, your computer takes advantage of any installed graphics card that supports hardware acceleration. If no card exists, and the Hardware Acceleration option is still enabled, your computer automatically defaults to slower software acceleration, which uses the Windows implementation of OpenGL. For detailed information about OpenGL, see the OpenGL topic in the online help. In most cases, it is best to enable the Hardware Acceleration option. However, problems sometimes arise with graphics cards on which hardware acceleration is poorly implemented. If you are experiencing display-related problems like scrambled line patterns, see the next topic, Improving Graphics Display. 2. 3. 196 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Improving Graphics Display To enable or disable hardware acceleration: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab. In the Graphics area, check or uncheck the Hardware Acceleration check box. Click OK. 31 2. 3. 4. Improving Graphics Display The type of graphics card you have can affect the way the program’s graphics are displayed on the screen. If the display seems unstable or contains some graphic artifacts (e.g. large pixels), here are some tips on how you may be able to improve the display: 1. Disable pre-selection. Pre-selection highlights elements when you hover your pointer over them, and displays tooltips. See Disabling Pre-Selection on page 15. Lower your screen resolution (to 1024 x 768, for example). To access this setting, rightclick your Windows desktop and select Properties. In the Display Properties dialog, select the Settings tab. Lower your color setting in Windows. For example, if your colors are set to True Color (32 bit), change the setting to High Color (16 bit). To access this setting, right-click your Windows desktop and select Properties. In the Display Properties dialog, select the Settings tab. If the above three methods fail to improve the graphics display, disable Hardware Acceleration in your Program Settings. See Hardware Acceleration on page 196. 2. 3. 4. User’s Guide 197 Chapter Building Locations If you have opened a project from another 3D Home Design program which contains a house model, the building elements in the model are controlled by your building location settings. For the most part you don’t need to worry about building locations in 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design, since most elements are inserted on the terrain. The only time you may want to adjust a building location is when inserting a deck, since decks are inserted at a height relative to the current building location. This chapter describes how to view and define building locations, and identify the current building location. 199 Chapter 32 Building Locations Viewing and Defining Building Locations When you define building locations, you are basically doing two things: • • setting the wall height for each floor (level) in your model specifying where each floor is positioned relative to the ground (zero) 2. 3. change location names or any of the numerical settings. Type the value you want. Press Enter. To add a new building location: 1. In the Building Locations dialog, click the Add Location button. A new location is added to the bottom of the list. Note: By default the new location will adopt the numerical settings of the currently selected location. 2. Specify the location’s properties. To specify a property, click on the current value, type the new value, then press Enter. Note: When you add a location to your list, it does not become the current location unless you select it in the list or edit its properties. To view building location settings: 1. Select Settings > Building Locations, or click the Building Locations button on the Settings toolbar. To delete a building location: 1. In the Building Locations dialog, click on one of the location’s fields to make it the current location. Click Delete Location. Below is a brief description of each building location property. Number. A reference number for the location. Name. The location’s name (e.g. Ground Floor). Floor Level. Height of floor base above ground level (0). Head Height. Height of tops of windows and wall openings relative to the floor level. Ceiling Height. Height of underside of ceiling surface relative to the floor level. Wall Height. Physical height of the walls on the location. To change the properties of a building location: 1. In the Building Locations dialog, click on the property you want to change. You can 2. Note: You cannot delete a location if it contains any elements. Also, you cannot delete a location if it is the only one in the list. Current Building Location If you are inserting a deck, you should take note of the current building location, since the height of the deck is relative to the floor level of the current building location. To identify the current building location: • Take a look at the building locations drop box on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. 200 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Location Dimming or • See which location is checked in the Building Locations dialog. Check mark identifies the current location To change the dimming percentage: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Workspace tab. Type the desired dimming percentage in the Dimming Percentage edit box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values. Click OK. 32 2. 3. 4. To make a different location current within the current view: • Click on the building locations drop box on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select the desired location. or • In the Building Locations dialog, click in the far left field of the location you want to make current. A check mark indicates the location is now current. Making Elements on All Locations Selectable in 2D Plan View If you have opened a project from another 3D Home Design program which contains a house model, only elements on the current building location can be selected in 2D plan view, even if elements on other locations are visible. If you want to make elements on all locations selectable, you need to change one of your program settings. To make elements on all locations selectable in 2D plan view: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab. In the Drawing Assistance area, uncheck the Select elements on current location only while in plan view check box. Click OK. Location Dimming Location dimming applies to the building elements of an architectural model that was created in another 3D Home Design program. When a particular location is current, building elements on all other visible locations are dimmed. This makes it easier to edit elements on the current location because it is more obvious which elements are part of the current location. By default, elements on other locations are dimmed by 90%. You can adjust the dimming so that it is lighter or darker according to your preference. Note: Location dimming has no effect on landscape elements. 2. 3. 4. User’s Guide 201 Chapter Managing View Windows By default, your project has one view window called Standard. You can create additional view windows using the View Manager. Each view window can have different view settings. For example, you may want to keep the wireframe 2D plan view in the Standard view window, and create a new view window containing a 3D view of your design. When you create new view windows, you can switch between open view windows using the Window menu. You can also turn your view tabs on, which will display a row of tabs below the drawing area. This provides instant point-and-click access to all your view windows. You can display multiple view windows at the same time using the Tile Open Views and Cascade Open Views tools. View windows can be moved, resized and closed to create the exact arrangement you want. This chapter describes all the functions of the View Manager, how to navigate between view windows, and arrange view windows. 203 Chapter 33 Managing View Windows Using the View Manager The View Manager contains a listing of view windows and lets you open, close, create, and edit views. By default, your project contains one view window called Standard. The scale of the view in this window is 1:48, or 1/4” = 1’-0”. Using the New View tool you can create new view windows. Each window can have different view settings. For example, you may want to display a wireframe, 2D plan view in the Standard view window, and create a new view window containing a 3D view of your model. Using the Window menu or view tabs you can switch between view windows as needed to see different views of your design. This can eliminate the need to constantly change the current view settings to see a particular view of your design. You can even display two or more view windows at the same time. You can edit the name and scale of views listed in the View Manager. To access the View Manager: 1. Select View > View Manager. Creating New View Windows By default, your project contains one view window called Standard. You can use the View Manager to create new view windows and specify different view settings for each window. For example, you may want to create a view window dedicated to 3D viewing only. Views are stored in groups for easy organization and navigation. You can add view windows to the default group, or create your own groups if you want. For example, you might want to create a group for 3D views only, then add a set of 3D view windows to that group. To create a new group in the View Manager: 1. 2. Select View > View Manager. Click the Add Group button, or rightclick in the View Manager’s view window and select Add Group. A group is added to the list. Right-click the new group and select Rename. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER. 3. 4. To rename a group in the View Manager: 1. 2. Right-click the group and select Rename. Type the new name, then press ENTER. To delete a group in the View Manager: 1. 2. Make sure the group contains no views. Select the group and click the Delete button, or right-click the group and select Delete. To create a new view in the View Manager: 1. 2. 3. Select the group you want to add the view to. Click the New View button, or rightclick and select New View. In the View Properties dialog, type a name for the view window, then select a print scale for the view. The scale is the ratio of units on paper to realworld units. If the scale is set to 1:1 (12" = 1'- 204 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Turning View Tabs On 0"), twelve inches on paper will represent one foot of your model. This would be a rather large printout. A scale of 1:12 (1" = 1'- 0"), however, would result in a smaller-scale view when the drawing is printed because every foot is represented by only one inch on paper. 4. Click OK. The view is added to the View Manager, and becomes the current view window. Click OK in the View Manager dialog. A new view window is created, and becomes the current view window. 6. Select the desired view settings for the new view window. Also, if you have turned your view tabs on, a view tab is created for the new view. To make a view window the current view window, simply select it from the Window menu, or select the view’s corresponding view tab below the drawing area. 33 Switching Between View Windows When you create a new view in the View Manager, the view appears in the program’s Window menu. 5. Turning View Tabs On When you turn your view tabs on, a row of tabs are displayed below the drawing area. Each tab represents an open view in the View Manager. Tiling View Windows By default, only one maximized view window is displayed at a time. Using the Tile Open Views tool you can instantly tile all open view windows in the drawing area. This is a great way to see different views of your design while you are working on it. When you make a change in one view window, the design updates automatically in all other view windows. To tile all open view windows: 1. Select Window > Tile Open Views. If you have not created any new views in the View Manager, only the Standard view tab is displayed. To turn view tabs on: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the Workspace tab. In the Tool Display area, check the View Tabs check box. Click OK. 2. 3. 4. Cascading View Windows By default, only one maximized view window is displayed at a time. Using the Cascade Open Views tool you can instantly display all open view windows in a stacked format, with the current view window on top. Once the view windows are cascaded you can move and resize each one if you want. To cascade all open view windows: 1. Select View > Cascade Open Views. User’s Guide 205 Chapter 33 Managing View Windows Returning to a Maximized View If you have tiled or cascaded your open view windows, you can return to a maximized view (where only one view window is visible) by maximizing one of the open view windows. To maximize a view window: 1. Click the Maximize button in the view window you want to maximize. To close a view window from within the window itself: 1. Click the Close button in the top right corner of the view window. Application window controls View window controls Close To close a view window using the View Manager: 1. 2. Select View > View Manager. Select the view you want to close. Click Close View. Restoring the Previous Arrangement of View Windows If you tiled, cascaded or arranged your view windows, then maximized one of them, you can use the Restore Down button to return to the view window arrangement that was displayed before you used the Maximize button. To restore the previous arrangement of view windows: 1. Click the Restore Down button in the top right corner of the current view window. Application window controls View window controls Restore Down 3. Opening View Windows that You Have Closed If you have closed a view window either through the View Manager or by clicking a view window’s Close button, you can open it again using the View Manager’s Open View button. To open a view window: 1. 2. 3. Select View > View Manager. Select the view you want to open. Click Open View. The view window becomes the current view window. It appears on the Window menu as well as on a view tab if you have view tabs turned on. Renaming a View Window You can edit the name of a view window as it appears in the View Manager, in the program’s title bar, and on the view tabs. You can do this in the View Manager, or by accessing the view window’s properties. To rename a view window when it is the current view window: 1. Select View > View Properties, or right-click in the view window and select View Properties. In the View Properties dialog, type the new name in the Name edit box. Closing View Windows By default, the Standard view window is open when you start a project. Also, every time you create a new view window in the View Manager, that window is automatically opened for you. You can close individual view windows using the View Manager’s Close View button, or by clicking the view window’s Close button. 2. 206 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Editing the Print Scale of a View 3. Click OK. To edit a view window’s print scale when it is the current view window: 1. Select View > View Properties, or right-click in the view window and select View Properties. In the View Properties dialog, select the desired scale from the Scale drop box. Click OK. 33 To rename a view window in the View Manager: 1. 2. Select View > View Manager. Right-click the view you want to rename, then select Rename. Or, select the view to rename and click the Properties button. Type the new name and press ENTER. Click OK. 2. 3. 3. 4. To edit a view window’s print scale in the View Manager: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select View > View Manager. Select the view to edit and click the Properties button. In the View Properties dialog, select the desired scale from the Scale drop box. Click OK. Editing the Print Scale of a View You can edit the print scale of a view by accessing the view’s properties. A view’s print scale is the ratio of units on paper to real-world units. If the scale is set to 1:1 (12" = 1'- 0"), twelve inches on paper will represent one foot of your model. This would be a rather large printout. A scale of 1:12 (1" = 1'- 0"), however, would result in a smaller-scale view when the drawing is printed because every foot is represented by only one inch on paper. Note that if you change the print scale, your 2D plan does not scale on the screen. It will only be scaled on paper when you print the drawing. The scale you specify in a view window’s properties has a direct link to the Print to Scale option in the Print dialog. Changing the print scale has no effect in 3D views, neither on the screen nor in printouts, unless it is an elevation view. This is because a model being viewed in 3D does not have concrete measurements like a flat, 2D view has. Things like text and dimensions will scale on the screen when you change the scale because they are specified in real-world units, whereas the model on your screen is created using units that are only proportional to real-world units. Regardless of a view’s scale, things like text and dimensions will always print out at the size that was assigned to them at the time of insertion. For example, if you inserted text that had a 1/2” text height setting, the text will be 1/2” on paper, regardless of the view scale or what the text looks like on the screen. Deleting View Windows You can delete a view window by removing it from the View Manager. To delete a view window: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select View > View Manager. Select the view to delete. Click the Delete button, or right-click and select Delete. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the view. User’s Guide 207 Chapter Custom Viewing You can create your own custom 3D views and edit existing 3D views to suit your needs. For example, you can change the angle of the view, or the camera height. While in 3D view you can use a variety of navigation tools to walk through or fly around your plan. 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design also lets you view instant elevations of your design, and create custom elevations to suit your presentation needs. If you have an architectural model in your project, you can also draw a cut line through your model to create an interesting crosssection view of your model’s interior. 209 Chapter 34 Custom Viewing Creating New 3D Views You can create a new 3D view by placing a new camera in your 2D plan view. Once you’ve inserted the camera, you specify the camera angle and viewing field angle by rotating and clicking your mouse. To create a new 3D view: 1. While in 2D plan view, select View > 3D Model View > Place New Camera, or click the 3D Model View button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Place New Camera. A camera is attached to your cursor, ready to be inserted. Click to insert the camera where you want it. Move your cursor in the direction you want to view. Moving the cursor back and forth changes the camera angle. Once you have the desired direction and angle in place, click to select a location for the target. You can also change your camera height (page 211), target height (page 211) and viewing field angle (page 213). Turning Cameras On and Off Every 3D view is controlled by a virtual “camera”. The Cameras On/Off function displays a camera icon on the screen. This gives you an idea of where you are viewing from. If you click on a camera, the target and viewing field angle become highlighted. This lets you know what the camera is focused on, and how much of your design is included in the view. When you have your cameras turned on, you can move cameras and their targets. You can also view the 3D view associated with a camera using the Look Through tool on a camera’s right-click menu. To turn cameras on: • • Select View > Viewing Aids > Cameras On/ Off, or Click the Viewing Aids button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Cameras On/Off 2. 3. 4. Once you’ve defined the position and angle of your camera, the 3D view is instantly displayed. The view will appear on your 3D Model View menu and toolbar flyouts for easy access. (By default, the first view you create is called Camera1). Changing a 3D View The position of the camera determines the point you are viewing your design from while in 3D view. By moving your camera you can change your viewpoint. See Changing Your Viewpoint on page 210. If you are currently in a 3D view, you can use navigation tools such as Walk Around and Slide to move the camera dynamically. You can find these topics later in this chapter, starting on page 214. You can also change what you’re focused on in a 3D view by moving the target. You can do this by displaying your cameras in 2D plan view and dragging the target icon to a new spot. See Changing the Target of Your View on page 211. In 2D plan view, all cameras for all 3D views are visible. (By default there are two: one for the 3D Perspective, and one for the 3D Overview.) You may need to zoom out to see them. Changing Your Viewpoint Moving a camera changes the angle you are viewing from in 3D. You can change the position of a camera by turning your cameras on, then moving the camera in 2D plan view. When you switch back to 3D view, the view will be changed accordingly. To change your viewpoint for a 3D view: 1. 2. Make sure you are in 2D plan view. Turn your cameras on. (See Turning Cameras On and Off on page 210.) By default, the camera for the 3D Perspective view is located to the left of the model. The 210 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Changing the Camera Height camera for the 3D Overview is located towards the right side of the model. 3. 4. Click on the camera you want to move. Hover your pointer over the camera’s blue grab handle to display the Move cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing area and select Move Camera. Click and drag the camera to move it where you want it. 3. By default, the camera for the 3D Perspective view is located to the left of the model. The camera for the 3D Overview is located towards the right side of the model. Click on the camera whose target you want to move. The target is usually inside or near your model. It is marked with a blue grab handle. Hover your pointer over the target’s grab handle to display the Move cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing area and select Move Target. Click and drag the target to move it where you want it. 34 5. 4. Changing the Camera Height The height of your camera determines the height you are viewing your model from. A positive camera height lets you look down on your model, while a negative camera height lets you look up at your model. A camera height of 0 would be like standing on the ground and looking at your landscape. The default camera height in the 3D Perspective view is 5’-6”. In the 3D Overview, the camera height is set to approximately 32’. To change the camera height: 1. With the 3D view displayed, right-click in the drawing window and select Camera Properties. In the Camera Properties dialog, type the height you want in the Camera Height edit box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values. Click Apply to see the change. If the view is acceptable, click OK. 2. 5. Changing the Target Height Raising or lowering your target can increase or decrease the steepness of the angle you are viewing from when looking through the camera. To change the target height: 1. With the 3D view displayed, right-click in the drawing window and select Camera Properties. In the Camera Properties dialog, type the height you want in the Target Height edit box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values. Click Apply to see the change. If the view is acceptable, click OK. 2. 3. 4. 3. 4. Viewing in Perspective Mode When a 3D view is set to a perspective view mode, objects in the scene that are far away appear as if they are smaller; objects closer seem larger. This creates a more realistic view of the model than parallel mode because distance plays Changing the Target of Your View The target of a 3D view is the area you are focused on, or looking towards. You can change the position of a target by turning your cameras on, then moving the target in 2D plan view. When you switch back to 3D view, the view be changed accordingly. To change the target of a 3D view: 1. 2. Make sure you are in 2D plan view. Turn your cameras on. (See Turning Cameras On and Off on page 210.) User’s Guide 211 Chapter 34 Custom Viewing a part in the view. By default, the 3D Perspective view has its view mode set to perspective mode. By default, the 3D Overview has its view mode set to parallel mode. If the current 3D view is in parallel mode, you can change the view mode to perspective mode if you want. To change to a perspective view mode: 1. With the 3D view displayed, right-click in the drawing window and select Camera Properties. In the Camera Properties dialog, enable the Perspective radio button. Click Apply to see the change. If the view is acceptable, click OK. If the current 3D view is in perspective mode, you can change the view mode to parallel mode if you want. To change to a parallel view mode: 1. With the 3D view displayed, right-click in the drawing window and select Camera Properties. In the Camera Properties dialog, enable the Parallel radio button. Click Apply to see the change. If the view is acceptable, click OK. 2. 3. 4. 2. 3. 4. If you want to change the distance you are viewing from, you need to change the view angle in the camera properties, or move your camera. You can change the angle you are viewing from by selecting a preset camera angle in the Camera Properties dialog, or by moving the camera. Viewing in Parallel Mode When a 3D view is set to a parallel view mode, the view is set from a common angle, and distance is eliminated from the view. This provides an instant, close-up view of your design. Selecting a Preset Camera Angle A convenient and effective way to quickly view your drawing from a number of different angles is to use the Preset Cameras in your camera properties. 212 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Changing the Viewing Field Angle The nine preset camera angles show your drawing: • • • looking down at an angle from above the four corners looking straight on from the four sides looking straight down from directly above (90°) program enlarges the image to fill the screen at smaller view angles, creating a close-up view. 34 To select a preset Camera angle: 1. With the 3D view displayed, right-click in the drawing window and select Camera Properties. In the Camera Properties dialog, click on one of the buttons in the Preset Cameras area. Click Apply to see the change. If the view is acceptable, click OK. 45º Viewing Field Angle 2. 3. 4. Note: You can change your viewing angle to any angle you want by moving the camera or using one of the dynamic navigation tools. Changing the Viewing Field Angle The viewing field can only be changed in the 3D Perspective view, or views with their view mode set to Perspective. The viewing field refers to your field of vision. It works like a camera lens: higher values produce a wide-angle view; lower values produce a close-up view. Sometimes changing the viewing field angle makes it seem like you are zooming in or out. This is because for wide-angle views, the program needs to shrink the image to provide enough screen space to contain the view. Conversely, the 120º Viewing Field Angle To change the viewing field angle: 1. With the 3D view displayed, right-click in the drawing window and select Camera Properties. In the Camera Properties dialog, type the desired angle in the View Angle edit box, or use the slider to increase or decrease the angle. Click Apply to see the change. If the view is acceptable, click OK. 2. 3. 4. User’s Guide 213 Chapter 34 Custom Viewing Walking Around in 3D View When you are in a 3D view, you can use the Walk Around tool to walk around your landscape plan. You can walk forward, backward, left or right. To walk around in 3D view: 1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Walk Around, or right-click in the drawing area and select Walk Around, or click the Walk Around button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Click and drag in the direction you want to move. • To move forward, click and drag upward. • To move backward, click and drag downward. • To walk left or right, click and drag left or right. If you click and drag up to the left, your path of motion will curve upward to the left, and so forth. 2. • • Drag to the right to rotate the model in a clockwise direction. Drag to the left to rotate the model in a counterclockwise direction. Sliding in a 3D View In a 3D view, the Slide tool moves both the camera and target at the same time. To slide in a 3D view: 1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Slide, or right-click in the drawing area and select Slide, or click the Slide button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Once Slide is selected, you can do the following: • • • Drag right to move your view to the left. Drag left to move your view to the right. Drag up (toward the top of the screen) to move your view down (toward the bottom of the screen). Drag down to move your view up. 2. • Flying Around Your 3D Model In a 3D view, the Fly Around tool revolves the camera around the target. To fly around your model: 1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Fly Around, or right-click in the drawing area and select Fly Around, or click the Fly Around button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Use your mouse button to orbit the camera. Your options are described below. • Click and hold the mouse button to slowly rotate the camera around the target on a level plane. Drag toward the top of the screen to make your model tilt downward like a boat coming off a wave. Drag toward the bottom of the screen to make your model tilt up like a boat riding onto a wave. Spinning the View Using the Look Around Tool In a 3D view, the Look Around tool revolves the target around the camera. To spin the view: 1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Look Around, or right-click in the drawing area and select Look Around, or click the Look Around button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Once Look Around is selected, you can do the following (presuming that your target is located inside or near the model): • Drag right to move the target in a counterclockwise direction. Your design orbits around you in a clockwise direction. Drag left to move the target in a clockwise direction. Your design orbits around you in a counterclockwise direction. 2. 2. • • • 214 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Resetting the Camera in a 3D View • Drag up to lower the height and shorten the distance of the target. Your view becomes high-angle, and your design moves toward the top of the screen. Drag down to raise the height and lengthen the distance of the target. Your view becomes low-angle, and your design moves toward the bottom of the screen. 34 Selecting a Background for 3D Views By default, a sky image is displayed behind your model when you are in a 3D view. You can select a different image to display, including custom bitmaps that you have imported, or switch to a night scene. To select a background for the view: 1. Select Settings > Background Settings, or click the Background Settings button on the Settings toolbar. • Note: Be careful when using the Look Around tool. It is very easy to lose sight of your design since the camera's "eye" is fixed in one direction only. It does not move to follow the orbiting target. Therefore, your field of vision is limited, and your design can quickly get above, below or behind you. Resetting the Camera in a 3D View If you have moved your camera, either by dragging it in 2D plan view or using a navigation tool like Walk Around or Slide, you can use the Reset Camera tool to move the camera back into its original position. Note that this tool is only available when the current view is a 3D view. To reset the camera to its original position: 1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Reset Camera, or click the Reset Camera button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. 2. In the Background Settings dialog, select either the Day Scene or Night Scene radio button. You would want to switch to a night scene if you are doing a nighttime 3DTrueView™ rendering of your model. Click on the current preview to access the Materials dialog. 3. User’s Guide 215 Chapter 34 Custom Viewing 4. In the Materials dialog, select a background from the Materials list. To add a material to the list (if you have your own bitmap, for example), see Customizing the Materials Library on page 236. Click OK in the Materials dialog. Click OK in the Background Settings dialog. Back Elevation Mark target arrow that identifies the view direction of the elevation. 5. 6. Viewing Elevations Elevations are 2D views that show a particular side of your design (front, rear, left or right) as if you were looking at it face on. Elevation views are typically used if you have a house in your design. While in an elevation view you can zoom in and out as well as change the display type. By default, four marks are displayed, one for each of the default elevations on the Elevation View menu. If you have created a custom elevation, a mark is displayed for that elevation as well. To turn elevation marks on or off: • • Select View > Viewing Aids > Elevation Marks On/Off, or Click the Viewing Aids button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Elevation Marks On/Off The marks are located at the extents of your drawing, so you may need to zoom out to see them. Sample Elevation To view an elevation: 1. Select View > Elevation View, or click the Elevation View button on the Advanced View Control toolbar. From the flyout, select the elevation you want to view (Front, Back, Right or Left). If you select and right-click an elevation mark, you can access a number of editing tools such as Properties, Move and Move Target. Selecting View Elevation displays the elevation associated with that mark. Moving Elevation Marks By default, elevation marks are centered with your model, which means the model is centered on the screen when you view the resulting elevation view. If you move an elevation mark in your 2D plan view, the model may be moved left or right when you display the elevation view. Moving a mark closer to or farther away from the model has no effect on the resulting elevation view. To move an elevation mark: 1. 2. Select the elevation mark in 2D plan view. Hover your pointer over the mark’s blue grab handle to display the Move cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing area and select Move. 2. Tip: If you have your elevation marks turned on in your 2D plan view, you can switch to an elevation view by selecting an elevation mark, right-clicking it, then selecting View Elevation. Turning Elevation Marks On and Off You can use the Elevation Marks On/Off tool to display elevation marks in your 2D plan view. An elevation mark contains the label given to the elevation in the elevation’s properties, as well as a 216 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Changing the Target of an Elevation 3. 4. Click and drag the mark to move it where you want it. Right-click and select View Elevation to see the resulting elevation. 2. To edit the name of the elevation as it appears on the Elevation View menu, edit the name in the Name edit box. To edit the text that appears on the elevation mark, edit the text in the Mark Text edit box. To apply a different text style to the elevation mark, click the Text Style button and make a selection from the Text Styles dialog. You can also edit the current text style if you want. Click OK. 34 3. 4. Changing the Target of an Elevation By default, elevation marks point straight at your model. The result is a completely face-on view when you display the resulting elevation view. If you rotate an elevation mark, you change the target of the elevation. This focuses the view on a different part of your design when you display the elevation view. To change the target of an elevation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make sure your elevation marks are turned on. In 2D plan view, select the mark whose target you want to change. Right-click and select Move Target. Click and drag to rotate the mark so it is pointing in a different direction. Right-click and select View Elevation to see the result. 5. Deleting an Elevation You can delete an elevation from the Elevation View menu by deleting its corresponding elevation mark in 2D plan view. To delete an elevation: 1. 2. 3. Make sure your elevation marks are turned on. In 2D plan view, select the mark to delete. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete. Creating a Custom Elevation You can create a custom elevation by inserting an elevation mark in your 2D plan view. Once you’ve inserted the mark, which represents your viewpoint, you can rotate it using your mouse to define the view direction. To create a custom elevation: 1. 2. Make sure you are in 2D plan view. Turn your elevation marks on. This is not necessary, but we recommend it so that you can see where other elevation marks are located. The default elevation marks are located at the extents of the terrain, so you may need to zoom out to see them. Select View > Elevation View > Create New Elevation, or click the Elevation View button on the Advanced View Control toolbar and select Create New Elevation. An elevation mark is attached to your cursor, ready to be inserted. Editing Elevation Properties You can edit the name of an elevation as it appears on the Elevation View menu, as well as edit the name and text style of an elevation mark. To edit elevation properties: 1. If the elevation view is currently displayed, right-click and select Elevation Properties. If you are currently in 2D plan view, select the elevation mark, then right-click and select Properties. 3. User’s Guide 217 Chapter 34 Custom Viewing 4. Click to insert the new elevation mark. This represents your viewpoint, so naturally you would select a point in front of the model side you want to look at in your elevation. Move your cursor to rotate the arrow on the elevation mark and define the view direction. Once it is pointing in the desired direction (usually towards your model), click to finish. 3. Select two points to draw a line that cuts through your model. This is the line you will be viewing from. Move your cursor in the direction you want to view. The more you move away from the section line, the deeper your view becomes. Once the bounding box is the desired distance and direction from the section line, click to finish. 4. 5. Once you’ve positioned the elevation mark, the resulting elevation is instantly displayed. It is also added to the Elevation View menu and toolbar flyout for easy access. (By default, the first view you create is called Elevation1.) Tip: You can change the name of the elevation as well as edit the elevation mark properties by editing the Elevation Properties. Creating a Section View If you have opened a project from another 3D Home Design program which contains an architectural model, you can cut through any portion of your model to create a section view. Section views are a great way to see the interior features of your model that you are not able to see from the outside. Once you’ve defined the section mark, the resulting section view is instantly displayed. It is also added to the Section View menu and toolbar flyouts for easy access. (By default, the first view you create is called Section1.) Viewing Section Views If you have created section views, you can display them at any time using the Section View menu or toolbar. To view a section view: Sample Section 1. To create a section view, you draw a section line through your model in 2D plan view, then click to define the view direction and depth. To create a section view: 1. 2. Make sure you are in 2D plan view. Select View > Section View > Create New Section, or click the Section View button on the Advanced View Control toolbar and select Create New Section. Select View > Section View, or click the Section View button on the Advanced View Control toolbar. From the flyout, select the section you want to view. 2. Tip: If you have your section marks turned on in your 2D plan view, you can switch to a section view by selecting a section mark, right-clicking it, then selecting View Section. 218 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Turning Section Marks On and Off 34 Turning Section Marks On and Off When you create a section, a section mark is displayed in the 2D plan view. The section mark contains markers at each end of the section line which indicate the direction of the section view. You can turn section marks on and off using the Section Marks On/Off tool. To turn section marks on or off: • • Select View > Viewing Aids > Section Marks On/Off, or Click the Viewing Aids button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Section Marks On/Off 4. display the Stretch cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing area and select Stretch. Click and drag to make the bounding box smaller or bigger. The bigger the box, the deeper the view. Right-click and select View Section to see the result. 5. Editing Section Properties You can edit the name of a section as it appears on the Section View menu, as well as edit the name and text style of a section mark. To edit section properties: 1. If the section view is currently displayed, right-click and select Section Properties. If you are currently in 2D plan view, select the section mark, then right-click and select Properties. Editing a Section View You can edit a section view by moving the section mark associated with the section view, or by stretching the bounding box attached to the section line. By moving a section mark you are changing your viewpoint. By stretching the bounding box, you are changing the depth of the view. To change your viewpoint by moving the section mark: 1. 2. 3. In 2D plan view, make sure your section marks are turned on. Click on the section mark. Hover your pointer over the blue grab handle on the section line to display the Move cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing area and select Move. Click and drag the mark to move it where you want it. Right-click and select View Section to see the result. 2. To edit the name of the section as it appears on the Section View menu, edit the name in the Name edit box. To edit the text that appears on the section mark, edit the text in the Mark Text edit box. To apply a different text style to the section mark, click the Text Style button and make a selection from the Text Styles dialog. You can also edit the current text style if you want. Click OK. 3. 4. 4. 5. To change the depth of the section view: 1. 2. 3. In 2D plan view, make sure your section marks are turned on. Click on the section mark. Hover your pointer over the blue grab handle on the bounding box line to 5. User’s Guide 219 Chapter 34 Custom Viewing Deleting a Section View You can delete a section from the Section View menu by deleting its corresponding section mark in 2D plan view. To delete a section: 1. 2. 3. Make sure your section marks are turned on. In 2D plan view, select the mark to delete. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete. To change framing members or member spacing: 1. In non-framed view, select the wall, floor, ceiling or roof whose framing you want to change. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. On the Basic property page, click the Specify Framing button. 2. 3. Displaying Framing If you have opened a drawing from another 3D Home Design program which contains a house, you can instantly view just your house frame using the Display Framing tool. Walls, floors, ceilings and roofs have a framing configuration assigned to them in their properties. 4. 5. Select the desired framing members and specify the spacing you want. Click OK. To display framing: 1. Select View > Framing Visibility > Display Framing. Note: You can also use the View Filter to display framing. However, the framing will not be displayed on its own unless you turn everything else off. Note: Framing cannot be selected for editing. It is available for viewing purposes only. To return to a non-framed view: 1. Select View > Framing Visibility > Display All But Framing. 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 220 Chapter Catalogs & Elements 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design’s Catalog Manager lets you add, edit and delete elements to suit your needs. You can also create new, custom catalogs that contain a specific selection of elements. You can open any catalog you want during a work session to gain access to the elements you want. Another great feature is Save Element to Catalog, which lets you save an element that you have edited in your drawing to the current catalog. 221 Chapter 35 Catalogs & Elements Using the Catalog Manager The program’s Catalog Manager provides full control of new and existing catalogs. To view a listing of a particular element type: 1. Select the element from the Element drop box. To view the properties of an element: 1. 2. Select the element in the Select an Element window. Select Catalog > Element Properties, or right-click and select Properties. Adding a Group to a Catalog All elements are organized by group. For example, pads are grouped under Concrete Pads and Masonry Pads. This helps you locate specific element types quickly. You can add groups to any catalog using the Add Group tool. To add a group to the current catalog: 1. Using the Catalog Manager you can: • • • • • • View the contents and properties of any catalog Add groups and elements to a catalog Delete groups and elements from a catalog Edit elements in a catalog Import elements into a catalog from another catalog Create and save new catalogs 2. 3. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box. Select Catalog > Add Group, or right-click in the Select a Type window and select Add Group. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER. Select File > Save Catalog. 4. 5. To access the Catalog Manager: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Renaming a Group in a Catalog You can change the name of any group in a catalog using the Rename Group tool. To rename a group: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. 222 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Deleting a Group in a Catalog 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box. In the Select a Type window, select the group you want to rename. Select Catalog > Rename Group, or rightclick and select Rename Group. Type the new name and press ENTER. Select File > Save Catalog. 7. 8. 4. 5. 6. In the Select an Element window, select the element to edit. Select Catalog > Element Properties, or right-click and select Properties. Edit the properties as desired. See Working with Property Pages on page 226 for more information. Click OK to return to the Catalog Manager. Select File > Save Catalog. 35 Deleting a Group in a Catalog You can delete a group in a catalog provided it contains no elements. To delete a group in a catalog: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box. In the Select a Type window, select the group you want to delete. Note that the group can only be deleted if it contains no elements. Select Catalog > Delete Group, or right-click and select Delete Group. Select File > Save Catalog. Note: Editing elements in a catalog has no effect on elements already inserted in your drawing. It only affects future insertions of the element. To add a new element to a catalog: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box. In the Select a Type window, select the group you want to add the element to. Select Catalog > Add Element. Elements like furniture and accessories can be defined based on a set of general parameters, or by importing a 3D Studio file. If this is the case, you will see a dialog similar to the following: 2. 3. 2. 3. 4. 4. 5. Adding and Editing Elements in a Catalog Every element has a number of different properties that determine its size, geometry and appearance. You can edit these properties to suit your needs. If you want you can create a new element instead of editing an existing one. Note: You can’t edit elements in the catalog panel. You need to use the Catalog Manager. To edit an element in a catalog: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box. In the Select a Type window, select the group containing the element you want to edit. 2. 3. To define the element by specifying size properties, select the Use a Parametric Template radio button, select the specific element type you want to create (chair, table, etc.), then click OK. User’s Guide 223 Chapter 35 Catalogs & Elements To import a 3D Studio file, select the Import geometry from file radio button, click OK, then select the desired 3D Studio file. Some elements will prompt you directly for a 3D Studio file because they do not have a parametric template. For more information, see Importing 3D Studio Files on page 224. 5. 6. 7. Define the element's properties. (See Working with Property Pages on page 226.) Click OK. The element is added to the catalog. Select File > Save Catalog. 3. 4. In the Select a Type window, select the group you want to add the element to. Select Catalog > Add Element. In the Define Element dialog, select the Import geometry from file radio button. Saving Edited Elements in Your Drawing to a Catalog If you have edited the properties of an inserted element, you can save that element (and its custom properties) to the current catalog. To add an edited element from your drawing into the current catalog: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Save Element to Catalog. Your pointer changes to a catalog cursor. Select the element in your drawing. 5. 6. Click OK. In the Open dialog, select the 3D Studio file, then click Open. 2. 3. Click Yes to save the element. The element is added to the current catalog. Importing 3D Studio Files Many sites on the Internet offer free downloading of elements in 3D Studio (*.3ds) format. You can easily convert these files for use in 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design. To import a 3D Studio file: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box (e.g. Exterior Furniture). 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 7. Since 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design can only import 3D Studio files, the only selection in the Create Components From drop box is Materials, since 3DS objects are essentially an assembly of materials. By default, the imported object’s materials will be stored in a new group in your materials library. If you want to store them in 2. 224 Simplifying an Element a specific group, click Select, then select the desired group. 12. Define the element’s properties. The element will already have size properties assigned to it that are taken from the 3D Studio file, but you can change these. You may need to edit the orientation of the element so that it inserts correctly in the drawing. 13. If you want to select a different 3D Studio file to apply to your new element, click the Select button in the Imported Element area of the properties dialog. Repeat steps 7-10. 14. Click OK. The new element is added to the catalog. 15. Select File > Save Catalog. 8. 9. Click OK in the Material Group(s) dialog. When you import a 3D Studio block, there is usually no way of knowing what units the designer intended for the block. In the Block Import Options dialog, select the unit of measure in the Convert File From drop box that will result in a logical Resultant Width, Depth and Height. Selecting Custom lets you specify a custom scale in the Custom Scale edit box. The scale is the multiplication factor of the units used for objects in the block. For example, if you're converting a file that you assume was created in feet and inches, the scale is 25.4. 10. Once logical dimensions are displayed, click OK in the Block Import Options dialog. 11. In the properties dialog, enter a name for the element in the Name edit box. 35 Simplifying an Element If an element looks too complex in the preview window, you can simplify it by reducing the number of polygons used to display it. This applies only to some block elements like furniture and accessories. To simplify an imported element: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Locate the element in the catalog. Select Catalog > Element Properties. In the property dialog, click Simplify. 2. 3. 4. 5. To simplify the element, slide the ruler to the left. The Number of vertices in object and Percentage of simplification values update accordingly. To put a limit on how much simplification can take place, enter a value in the Min number of vertices per component edit User’s Guide 6. 225 Chapter 35 Catalogs & Elements box. The larger the number, the less simplified the element will become. 7. 8. 9. Click OK to return to the properties dialog. Click OK in the properties dialog. Select File > Save Catalog. Working with Property Pages When you access an element’s property pages, a multi-tabbed dialog is displayed. The tabs and properties vary depending on the element. The most common property pages are Basic, Appearance, Quantity and Behavior. The name, notes and hyperlinks properties are common to all property pages. Controlling What Parts of an Element are Displayed You can hide certain parts of an element from view by changing its display properties. This applies only to some block elements like furniture and accessories. To control what parts of an element are displayed: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Locate the element in the catalog. Select Catalog > Element Properties. In the property dialog, click Display. 2. 3. 4. Sample Properties Dialog A preview of the element is shown in the preview window. By default, the image is displayed in a 3D rendered view. You can switch between 3D and 2D as well as select a different display mode by right-clicking in the preview window and making a selection from the menu. 5. To display or hide a component from view in 2D and/or 3D view, select it in the list, then click the appropriate eye icon. Component is displayed Component is not displayed When the image is in a 3D view, you can rotate it around by clicking and dragging with your mouse. 6. 7. 8. Click OK to return to the properties dialog. Click OK in the properties dialog. Select File > Save Catalog. 226 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Using Automatic Name Generation 35 Using Automatic Name Generation Names of elements are based on pre-defined formulas. The name 8" Concrete Wall is made up of three variables: To modify the formula used for an element's automatic name generation: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box. Select the element to edit. Select Catalog > Element Properties, or right-click and select Properties. Click the Options button to the right of the Auto Name check box. The Automatic Name Generation dialog for that element type is displayed. The right pane (titled Used Variables and Separators) displays the current formula. 8” Concrete Wall Width Type Element 2. 3. 4. Each variable is separated by a space. These variables and spaces are defined in the name's formula. If you add or change an element, and select Auto Name, the element's name updates automatically in the catalog. For example, if you create a concrete wall, and define a width of 10", the name automatically becomes 10" Concrete Wall. Automatic name generation: • Saves typing a name every time you add or edit an element • Ensures consistency in catalogs • Prevents duplicate entries if you forget to change a name To use automatic name generation when adding or editing an element, enable the Auto Name check box next to the Name edit box in the element’s properties dialog. Note: If Auto Name is not selected, you can type any name you want in the Name edit box. 5. 6. Editing the Name Generation Formula When you add or edit a catalog element, you can modify the formula used to generate the element's name if you are using automatic name generation. Formulas are made up of variables (like Element Class and Element Type) and separators (spaces, symbols or characters). Editing an element’s name generation formula sets the formula for any new elements you create of that type. For example, if you edit the name generation formula for an 8” Brick Wall, any new walls you add to the catalog will use the new formula if you use automatic name generation. To remove a component from the formula, select it and click Remove. To add a component to the formula, select the desired variable or separator in the Available Variables or Available Separators window and click Add. To move a component in the formula, select the component and click Move Up or Move Down. When you have finished modifying the formula, click OK to close the Automatic Name Generation dialog. 7. 8. 9. 10. Click OK to close the element's properties dialog. User’s Guide 227 Chapter 35 Catalogs & Elements 11. In the Catalog Manager, select File > Save Catalog. (X, Y) axes: Rotates the element left or right in 2D plan view. Basic Page Most elements have a Basic property page, although the properties on this page will vary according to the element type. Generally there is a Type section, where you can select the specific element type, as well as a Properties section, where you can specify the dimensions of the element. Appearance Page The Appearance properties page is common to most elements. It provides control over the materials applied to elements, which come into play when you view your model in Rendered or Patterned mode. A material can be a texture, such as brick, or a color. This is what you see in Rendered mode. Materials also have a pattern assigned to them, which is what you see when you view in Patterned mode. The contents of the Components window varies depending on the element. It contains a listing of the individual components that make up the element, so you can apply a different material to each component. Sample Basic Page Note: You can find detailed descriptions of size properties for specific element types in their respective chapters. Changing an Element’s Orientation Symbol elements, such as furniture and light fixtures, are oriented in a logical fashion when you insert them in your drawing. You can edit the orientation of most symbol elements. To change an element’s orientation: 1. On the Basic property page, click the appropriate arrow keys in the Orientation area to rotate the element. (Y, Z) axes: Rotates the element front to back, and vice versa. (X, Z) axes: Rotates the element towards its left or right side in 3D. 1. Sample Appearance Page To change an element’s material: In the Components pane, select the component whose material you want to change. 228 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Quantity Page 2. In the Material area, click the Select button. 35 Quantity Page The Quantity properties page is common to most elements. It contains information that helps identify the element as a material, such as the manufacturer and price. Some of the information on this page is used in the project estimate. 3. In the Materials dialog, select the group containing the desired material. If you want to choose a solid color, select the Paint group. Select the material you want to use. The swatches in the preview windows update automatically. If you want to edit the material, click on one of the swatches to access the Edit Materials dialog. For information about editing materials, see Editing Material Properties on page 237. Click OK to return to the Appearance page. If you want to rotate the material on the element, enter an angle in the Rotation edit box, or use the arrows to scroll through a list of angles. This rotates the material in a clockwise direction. To shift the material on the element (left, right, up or down), use the Position arrows. Select another component in the Components pane and select a material for that component. When all your materials are defined, click OK. Sample Quantity Page 4. Manuf: The Manufacturer of the product. Supplier: The company or store who will be supplying the product. Price: The unit price of the product. Division: A construction division identification. In North America, CSI divisions are used. Part No.: Part Number. A series of numbers that identifies the product. Alt Code: Alternate Code. An extra identification code that is used to link an element in the program’s catalog to the databases of other applications, such as Timberline. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. User’s Guide 229 Chapter 35 Catalogs & Elements Behavior Page The Behavior property page is available for symbol elements like furniture and lights. forwards or backwards. A Z value moves the insertion point up or down on the element. To edit an element’s snap edge: 1. Click on the desired snap edge graphic in the Snap Edge area. Adding Notes to an Element’s Properties The Notes function in the properties dialog lets you enter a note about the element. This additional information can be anything you want. To add a note to an element’s properties: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box. Select the element to edit. Select Catalog > Element Properties, or right-click and select Properties. In the bottom left corner of the dialog, click the Add Notes button. 2. Sample Behavior Page 3. 4. 5. Usually this page contains a Distance above current location or terrain option which lets you control the height at which the element is inserted relative to the terrain. The value entered is the distance from the terrain to the insertion point of the element. (For most elements, the insertion point is at the bottom of the element.) Some elements have a defined Insertion Point, which is the point on the element that is attached to the cursor when you are inserting the element. Some elements also have a defined Snap Edge, which determines which edge of the element will snap to a wall if you position it near a wall. To edit an element’s insertion height: 1. Edit the value in the Distance above current location or terrain edit box. 6. 7. Enter your note in the Notes dialog. Click OK. To edit an element’s insertion point: 1. Edit the values in the X Axis, Y Axis and Z Axis edit boxes, or use the sliders beside these edit boxes. An X value moves the insertion point left or right. A Y value moves the insertion point 230 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Adding Hyperlinks to an Element’s Properties 35 Adding Hyperlinks to an Element’s Properties The Hyperlinks function in the properties dialog lets you create a link to an external file (e.g. Word document) or Web address. To add a hyperlink to an element’s properties: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box. Select the element to edit. Select Catalog > Element Properties, or right-click and select Properties. In the bottom left corner of the dialog, click the Add Hyperlinks button. 9. To view the link, select it in the hyperlink window, then click Go to. 10. To delete a hyperlink, select it in the hyperlink window, then click Delete. 11. Click OK. Note: You can create a link to another Broderbund Home Design (*.bld) file. However, if that file uses the same catalog as the current drawing, you cannot access the catalog in the linked file. ® 2. 3. 4. 5. Creating a New Catalog If you plan to edit or add elements in the Master Catalog, you may want to create a new catalog instead of editing the existing one. That way, the custom elements you create are distinguishable from the defaults and are stored in one place. When you create a new catalog, you specify a name and where you want to store the catalog. When you close the Catalog Manager, the new catalog will become the current catalog in the catalog panel. To create a new catalog: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the Catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Select File > New Catalog. 2. 6. In the Hyperlinks dialog, specify a name for the hyperlink in the Name edit box (e.g. Broderbund Web Site). In the Link to edit box, type the web address (e.g. http://www.broderbund.com) or path to the file you are linking to. If you are linking to a file, you can click Browse to search through the directories on your computer. Once you’ve located the file in the Open dialog, click Open. The path to the file is automatically displayed in the Link to edit box. Click Add to add the link to the hyperlink window. 7. 8. User’s Guide 231 Chapter 35 Catalogs & Elements 3. In the Create a new catalog dialog, type a name (without extension) in the File Name box. Click the Browse button next to the Location edit box and select the directory where you want to store the new catalog. The default is the program's Catalogs directory, which is where you should store all catalogs. From the Type drop box, select the unit of measure you would like to use for elements in the catalog. From the Precision drop box, select the level of precision you would like to use for measurements. For example, selecting #’-# #/16” sets the level of precision to 1/16th of an inch when working in feet and inches. In the Name edit box, type your name. In the Company edit box, type the name of your company, if applicable. Click OK. A new, blank catalog is created. 11. You can now add groups and elements to the catalog, or import elements from another catalog (see Importing Elements into Catalogs on page 232). Remember to save the catalog after you make changes to it. 4. Creating a Copy of a Catalog You can save a catalog under a different name, which essentially creates a copy of it. To create a copy of a catalog under a different name: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Make sure the catalog you want to save is the current catalog. Select File > Save Catalog As. 5. 6. 2. 3. 7. 8. 9. 4. 5. In the File name edit box, type the name you want to save under (without extension). Click Save. Note: The newly saved catalog becomes the current catalog. Importing Elements into Catalogs Using the Catalog Manager you can import elements from another catalog into the current catalog. This feature is often used when you are creating new catalogs. Note: If you want to import a 3D Studio file, see Importing 3D Studio Files on page 224. 10. Select File > Save Catalog. 232 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Deleting Elements from a Catalog To import elements into a catalog: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Make sure the catalog you want to import elements into is the currently open catalog. From the Element drop box, select the appropriate element type. Click Expand to expand the Catalog Manager dialog. On the right side of the dialog, click the Browse button, then select the catalog you want to import elements from. belongs to is also imported into the current catalog. 35 2. 3. 4. 5. 7. When you are done importing elements, click Collapse to return to the regular view in the Catalog Manager. Select File > Save Catalog. 8. Deleting Elements from a Catalog You can delete any element from a catalog. 6. In the right-hand window, select an element to import, then click Import Item. If you want to import all elements listed, just click Import All. The element is imported into the current catalog. Note that the group that the element To delete an element from a catalog: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box. Select the element you want to delete. Select Catalog > Delete Element, or right-click and select Delete Element. Select File > Save Catalog. 2. 3. 4. 5. Opening a Catalog You can use the Open Catalog tool to open any catalog and make it the current catalog in the catalog panel. The Open Catalog tool is also available in the Catalog Manager. User’s Guide 233 Chapter 35 Catalogs & Elements To open a catalog for display in the Catalog panel: 1. 2. 3. Select File > Catalogs > Open Catalog. In the Open dialog, locate the catalog you want to open. Click Open. The catalog you opened becomes the active catalog. Note that when you open a catalog, only one element type is displayed. The type displayed depends on the last Insert tool selected. Viewing Catalog Properties You can view the properties of the current catalog (file name, location, etc.) using the Catalog Properties tool. To open a catalog in the Catalog Manager: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Select File > Open Catalog. In the Open dialog, locate the catalog you want to open. Click Open. The catalog you opened becomes the active catalog in the Catalog Manager. Click OK. The catalog is now the current catalog in the catalog panel. To view the properties of the catalog currently in the catalog panel: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Properties. 2. 3. 4. 5. Closing a Catalog You can use the Close Catalog tool to close the current catalog in the catalog panel or the Catalog Manager dialog. Note that this leaves the catalog window blank until you open another catalog. To close the catalog in the catalog panel: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Close Catalog. To view catalog properties within the catalog Manager: 1. Select File > Catalog Properties. To close a catalog in the Catalog Manager: 1. Select File > Close Catalog. 234 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Chapter Materials, Colors & Patterns Every element has a material assigned to it in the element's property pages. Materials determine what textures, colors and patterns are used to display elements in 3D view. You can edit and create materials on the fly. All materials are stored in a materials library, called materials.mlb. You can create new material libraries containing a specific selection of materials, and load those custom libraries in other projects. This chapter tells you how to customize materials and work with material libraries. If you want to edit the material, color or pattern of an inserted element, see Changing an Element’s Material or Color on page 148. 235 Chapter 36 Materials, Colors & Patterns Things You Should Know About Editing Materials When you add or edit a material through the Catalog Manager, the custom material is saved with the catalog, and is only available when editing elements in the catalog. If you add or edit a material when editing an element that has been inserted in your drawing, however, the customized material is only available in the current project when editing the properties of inserted elements. The materials library in the catalog remains unchanged. This is because the materials library in the catalog is separate from the materials library in the current drawing. The reason that there is a project-specific materials library is so that any materials used in your project are always saved with the project, making it possible to share your project with others and always maintain your customized materials. If you want materials that you have customized in your catalog to be available in your projectspecific materials library, or vice versa, you can use the Transfer tool to save the custom materials to the external materials library file (materials.mlb), then import the custom materials from the library file into the other materials library. You can add new materials to the library, as well as edit and delete existing materials. If you customize the catalog materials library (through the Catalog Manager), your change is saved with the catalog. If you customize the project-specific materials library (by editing an inserted element), your change is saved in the current project only. To access the catalog materials library: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries > Materials. The Materials dialog appears. Customizing the Materials Library The materials library contains a vast array of materials that you can apply to elements. Even so, you may find that you want to customize it at some point in time. In the materials library, materials are listed in groups (Concrete, Brick, Wood, etc.) so you can organize and find them easily. You can add, rename and delete groups as needed. 2. To access the project-specific materials library: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select an element in your drawing. Right-click and select Properties. In the properties dialog, select the Appearance tab. Click the Select button. The Materials dialog appears. To add a group to the materials library: 1. Select Material > Add Group, or right-click in the Group window and select Add Group. 236 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Editing Material Properties 2. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER. 2. 3. Select Material > Edit Material, or right-click and select Edit Material. Edit the material properties in the Edit Materials dialog. See Editing Material Properties on page 237. Click OK. 36 To rename a group in the materials library: 1. 2. 3. Select the group in the Group window. Select Material > Rename Group, or rightclick and select Rename Group. Type the new name, then press ENTER. 4. To delete a material from the materials library: 1. 2. Select the material in the Material window. Select Material > Delete Material, or rightclick and select Delete Material. To delete a group from the materials library: 1. 2. Select the group in the Group window. Select Material > Delete Group, or rightclick and select Delete Group. Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains materials. To add a new material to the materials library: 1. 2. In the Group window, select or create the group you want to add the material to. Select Material > Add Material, or right-click in the Material window and select Add Material. To save changes to the catalog materials library: 1. 2. Once you’ve made your changes in the Materials dialog, click OK. In the Catalog Manager, select File > Save Catalog. Editing Material Properties When you are adding or editing a material in the materials library, you need to specify the material’s properties. A material has two main types of properties: Rendered and Patterned. Rendered properties determine what texture or color is used to display an element in the Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode. Patterned properties determine what pattern is used to display an element in Patterned mode. To edit the properties of a material: 1. 2. Select the material to edit in the materials list. Select Material > Edit Material, or click one of the preview swatches. 3. 4. 5. In the Material Name edit box, type a name for the new material. Specify the material properties. See Editing Material Properties on page 237. Click OK. The material is added to the library. To edit a material in the materials library: 1. Select the material in the Material window. User’s Guide 237 Chapter 36 Materials, Colors & Patterns To edit Rendered properties: 1. In the Edit Materials dialog, select the Rendered tab. versa. This prevents distortion. If you want to specify different values for each, you need to open the Maintain Aspect Ratio lock by clicking on it. Maintain Aspect Ratio 6. 7. 8. 2. If you want to display an element in a solid color in 3D rendered or rendered outline view, enable the Use Solid Color radio button. Click the Select button, then select the color you want to use in the Color dialog. If you want to display an element with a texture applied to it in 3D rendered or rendered outline view, enable the Use Texture radio button. Click the Select button, then select the texture you want to use. A wide selection of textures can be found in the program’s Textures directory. You can use BMP, JPG, TGA and PNG files. If want to use textures from outside sources, see Using Textures from Outside Sources on page 239 for guidelines. If you want to change the scale of the texture, enter new values in the Tile Height and Tile Width edit boxes. Tile height refers to the height of one bitmap tile. The program uses tiled rendering to display images, meaning images are generated in pieces (tiles) vertically and horizontally. Changing the tile height of a brick material, for example, would make the bricks look taller. Changing the tile width would make the bricks look wider. By default, the Tile Height and Tile Width have the Maintain Aspect Ratio lock closed. When the lock is closed, the Tile Width changes to match the Tile Height, and vice 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 9. To repeat the bitmap tile horizontally, enable the Tile Horizontally check box. To repeat the bitmap tile vertically, enable the Tile Vertically check box. To change the surface finish of the material (dull, shiny, etc.), make a selection from the drop box in the Surface Properties area. This setting will take effect when you create a 3DTrueView. If you want to specify a custom surface finish, select Custom in the list, then click the Advanced button. If creating a custom finish, specify its properties. These are described below. Specular. Reflection that creates highlights on materials, making them appear shiny. Emissive. The amount of light given off by a material. The more emissive a material is, the more self-luminous it appears. Transparency. The degree to which a material is pervious to light. Color Bleed. The degree to which different colors blend where they meet. To return to the basic view, click the Basic button at the bottom of the dialog. 3. 4. 5. 238 Using Textures from Outside Sources To edit Patterned properties: 1. In the Edit Materials dialog, select the Patterned tab. uniform throughout. However, cropping can have an undesirable result if the texture is something like a tree. 36 Saving Customized Materials to a Materials Library File If you have added or edited materials in either the catalog materials library or project-specific materials library, you can save the custom materials to the external materials library file (materials.mlb). You can then import the customized materials from the library file into any materials library, whether that be the catalog materials library or project-specific materials library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle between libraries. 2. To select a different pattern to use in 3D patterned views, select the pattern in the Pattern list. To edit the scale of the pattern, edit the value in the Scale edit box. A value of 2 doubles the original scale, while a value of .5 halves the original scale. To specify more options, click the Advanced button. To edit a pattern, see Customizing the Patterns Library on page 241. You can save materials to the default materials library, or create a new library to save them in. To save customized materials to a materials library file: 1. 2. In the Materials dialog, select File > Transfer. In the Open dialog, select the library you want to export materials to, then click Open. The main materials library is called materials.mlb. Tip: You can create a new library file if you want by entering a name in the File name edit box. 3. 4. Using Textures from Outside Sources When changing a material’s texture assignment, you can use textures from outside sources provided they are appropriately sized and not too large. As a rule, the texture’s dimensions should be a multiple of 2: 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, etc. If the dimensions are not multiples of 2, the texture will be cropped (from the top and right side) to the next smallest size. For some textures, this will make it look like the texture is cut off. For example, if your texture is 500 x 500, it will be cropped down to 256 x 256, since 500 is not a multiple of 2. If the texture were 512 x 512, however, it would not be cropped. Cropping is not that important if the texture is a grid pattern (such as brick), since such a texture is 3. In the left pane, select the customized material, then click Export Item. The material (and the group it is under) is added to the materials library file. If you wanted User’s Guide 239 Chapter 36 Materials, Colors & Patterns you could also click Export All to instantly export the entire materials list to the library file. 4. Click OK. If you want to import the customized materials into your catalog materials library or projectspecific materials library, see the next topic, Importing Materials from a Materials Library File. Specifying the Location of the Textures Directory By default, textures are located in the program’s Textures directory. If you move your textures directory to another location on your system, or would like to link to another Textures directory (such as one from an older version of the program), you will need to specify the location of the Textures directory so that textures appear properly in the program. To specify the location of your Textures directory: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab. In the File Paths area, click on the Textures Directory to select it. Click Modify. In the Browse For Folder dialog, locate the folder containing your textures, then click OK. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog. Importing Materials from a Materials Library File If you have saved customized materials to the materials library file, you can import the materials into your catalog materials library or any project-specific materials library. To import materials from a library file: 1. 2. In the Materials dialog, select File > Transfer. In the Open dialog, select the materials library (e.g. materials.mlb) that you want to import materials from, then click Open. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3. In the right pane, select the material to import, then click Import Item. Or, just click Import All to import the entire list. Click OK. Note: If you set your path to the Textures directory of an older 3D Home Design program, the catalog in version 6 will have no textures in it until you switch the path back to the Textures directory of version 6. To alleviate this problem you can copy your old textures into your new Textures directory and leave the path set to the new Textures directory. You will then be able to open drawings from an older version and have all your textures applied, as well as leave the textures in the catalog intact. 4. 240 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Customizing the Patterns Library 36 Customizing the Patterns Library The patterns library contains an excellent selection of pre-defined patterns that you can apply to materials. You can edit patterns to suit your needs. No. of Lines. The number of lines that will repeat in the pattern. Usually, this will be 1 or 2, but it could be more depending on the complexity of the pattern. Edit Line. The line you are currently editing. Definition. Generally, the segment lengths and spaces in the line's pattern. A single value (other than 0) creates a solid line. (See Example 2 on page 241.) For dashed patterns, segments and spaces can be different lengths, but spaces must be preceded by a negative sign to indicate they are spaces. For example, a definition of 20,-5,10,-5 (in Metric) creates the following pattern: 20 mm dash, 5 mm space, 10 mm dash, 5 mm space. (See Example 1 on page 241.) X Origin. The point on the X axis the line passes through. Y Origin. The point on the Y axis the line passes through. To access the patterns library: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries > Patterns. The Patterns dialog appears. Angle. The angle of the line in degrees. Offset. The spacing between lines as the line is repeated (offset) parallel to the original throughout the pattern. Shift. The distance each offset line is shifted (left or right) from the origin of the previous line. This creates a staggered effect. (See Example 3 on page 242.) Example 1 (single line pattern) No. of Lines: 1 Line Definition: 20,-5,10,-5 Angle: 45° Offset: 5 Example 2 (multi-line pattern) No. of Lines: 2 Line Definition: 1.00 (both lines) Angle: 45° (line 1) and 135° (line 2) Offset: 20 (both lines) 2. Note: You can also access the patterns library when editing the Patterned properties of a material, by clicking the pattern swatch in the Edit Materials dialog. To edit a pattern: 1. 2. Select the pattern in the list. To edit the scale of a pattern, enter a value in the Scale edit box. A value of 2 doubles the original scale, while a value of .5 halves the original scale. To edit the pattern’s line definition, click the Advanced button at the bottom of the dialog. A number of properties pop up that let you define the pattern. 3. User’s Guide 241 Chapter 36 Materials, Colors & Patterns Example 3 (pattern with a shift) No. of Lines: 1 Line Definition: 10,-5 Angle: 0° Offset: 5 Shift: 5 242 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Chapter Line Styles A line style defines the type and color of a line. Line styles are applied to electrical wiring and dimension styles. You can customize the line styles and linetype libraries to suit your needs. To change the dimension style of an inserted dimension, see Changing the Style of a Dimension on page 165. 243 Chapter 37 Line Styles Things You Should Know About Editing Line Styles Line styles are used by electrical wiring and dimension styles. When you add or edit a line style through the Catalog Manager, the custom line style is saved with the catalog, and is only available when editing dimension styles in the catalog. If you add or edit a line style when editing electrical wiring or the style of a dimension in your drawing, however, the customized line style is only available in the current project when editing the properties of inserted wiring or dimensions. The line styles library in the catalog remains unchanged. This is because the line styles library in the catalog is separate from the line styles library in the current project. The reason that there is a project-specific line styles library is so that any line styles used in your project are always saved with the project, making it possible to share your project with others and always maintain your customized line styles. If you want line styles that you have customized in your catalog to be available in your projectspecific line styles library, or vice versa, you can use the Transfer tool to save the custom line styles to the external line styles library file (linestyles.klb), then import the custom line styles from the library file into the other line styles library. Customizing the Line Styles Library The line styles library contains a wide selection of line styles that you can apply to electrical wiring and dimension styles. You may find that you want to customize the library at some point in time. In the line styles library, line styles are listed in groups so you can organize and find them easily. The Wiring group contains an assortment of wiring styles. You can add, rename and delete groups as needed. You can add new line styles to the library, as well as edit and delete existing line styles. When you edit the line styles library in your catalog, the line styles are saved with your catalog. If you edit line styles while editing your drawing, the line styles are saved in the current drawing only. To access the line styles library in the Catalog Manager: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries > Line Styles. The Line Styles dialog appears. 2. 244 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Customizing the Line Styles Library To access the line styles library through inserted electrical wiring: 1. 2. Select the wiring in your drawing. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. The Line Styles dialog appears. This is your project-specific line styles library. To add a new line style to the line styles library: 1. 2. In the Group window, select or create the group you want to add the line style to. Select Linestyle > Add Linestyle, or rightclick in the Material window and select Add Linestyle. 37 To access the line styles library by editing a dimension style: 1. Select Settings > Dimension Styles. Or, select a dimension in your drawing, then right-click and select Properties. In the Dimension Styles dialog, click Edit. In the Edit Dimension Styles dialog, select the Line Styles tab. This is your projectspecific line styles library. 2. 3. To add a group to the line styles library: 1. 2. Select Linestyle > Add Group, or right-click in the Group window and select Add Group. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER. 3. 4. In the Line Style Name edit box, type a name for the new line style. To select a linetype for the line style, click the Browse button next to the Linetype edit box. Select a linetype from the Linetypes dialog. If you want to add or edit a linetype, see Customizing the Linetypes Library on page 247. To select a color for the line, click the Color box in the Edit Line Styles dialog, then select the color you want from the Color dialog. Click OK. The line style is added to the library. To rename a group in the line styles library: 1. 2. 3. Select the group in the Group window. Select Linestyle > Rename Group, or rightclick and select Rename Group. Type the new name, then press ENTER. 5. To delete a group from the line styles library: 1. 2. Select the group in the Group window. Select Linestyle > Delete Group, or rightclick and select Delete Group. 6. Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains line styles. To edit a line style in the line styles library: 1. Select the line style in the Material window. User’s Guide 245 Chapter 37 Line Styles 2. Select Linestyle > Edit Linestyle, or rightclick and select Edit Linestyle. You can save line styles to the default line styles library, or create a new library to save them in. To save customized line styles to the line styles library file: 1. 2. In the Line Styles dialog, select File > Transfer. In the Open dialog, select the linestyles.klb file (or whatever file you want to save to), then click Open. Tip: You can create a new library file if you want by entering a name in the File name edit box. 3. 4. In the Edit Line Styles dialog, select the desired linetype and color. Click OK. To delete a line style from the line styles library: 1. 2. Select the line style in the Material window. Select Linestyle > Delete Linestyle, or rightclick and select Delete Linestyle. 3. In the left pane of the Transfer dialog, select the line style you want to save, then click Export Item. To export the entire list, just click Export All. The library file is updated. Click OK. To save changes to the line styles library in the catalog: 1. 2. Once you’ve made your changes in the Line Styles dialog, click OK. In the Catalog Manager, select File > Save Catalog. 4. Saving Line Styles to a Line Styles Library File If you have added or edited line styles in either the catalog line styles library or project-specific line styles library, you can save the custom line styles to the external line styles library file (linestyles.klb). You can then import the customized line styles from the library file into any line styles library, whether that be the catalog line styles library or project-specific line styles library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle between libraries. If you want to import the custom line styles into your catalog line styles library or the projectspecific line styles library, see the next topic, Importing Line Styles from a Line Styles Library File. Importing Line Styles from a Line Styles Library File If you have saved customized line styles to the line styles library file, you can import the line styles into your catalog line styles library or any project-specific line styles library. To import line styles from a line styles library file: 1. In the Line Styles dialog, select File > Transfer. 246 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Customizing the Linetypes Library 2. In the Open dialog, select the linestyles.klb file (or whatever file you want to import line styles from), then click Open. Note: You can also access the linetypes library when editing a line style, by clicking one of the swatches, then clicking the Browse button in the Edit Line Styles dialog. If you do access the linetypes library this way, new or edited linetypes will be saved with the line style in the current drawing only. The line styles and linetypes libraries in the catalog will remain unchanged. To edit a linetype: 1. 2. Select the linetype in the list. In the Definition edit box, edit the linetype’s definition. Lines are defined by a series of distances separated by commas. Each number represents the length of either a line segment or space. Positive numbers create a line segment of the specified length. Negative numbers create a space of the specified length. For example, a dashed line may have a definition like 1/4”, -1/4”. Once you’ve edited the linetype, click OK. 37 3. In the right pane of the Transfer dialog, select the custom line style you want to import, then click Import Item. Or, to import the entire list, just click Import All. The list in the left pane is updated. Click OK. 3. 4. Customizing the Linetypes Library The linetypes library contains a list of pre-defined linetypes that you can apply to line styles. You may want to add or edit linetypes to suit your needs. To add a linetype to the list: 1. Click the Add Item button below the linetypes list, or right-click in the left pane and select Add Item. A new entry is added to the list. Type a name for the linetype and press ENTER. In the Definition edit box, specify the linetype’s definition. Once you’ve defined the linetype, click OK. 2. 3. 4. To delete a linetype from the list: 1. 2. Select the linetype in the list. Right-click and select Delete, or click the Delete button below the linetypes list. To access the linetypes library: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries > Linetypes. The Linetypes dialog appears. Note: You cannot delete the existing, pre-defined linetypes because they are being used. To save changes to the linetypes library in the catalog: 1. Once you’ve made your changes in the Linetypes dialog, click OK. User’s Guide 2. 247 Chapter 37 Line Styles 2. In the Catalog Manager, select File > Save Catalog. 248 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Chapter Text & Dimension Styles When you insert text or dimensions in your drawing, they are always based on a style that determines how they look. Text and dimension styles are stored in libraries. You can edit and create text and dimension styles to suit your needs. If you want to change the style of text that you have inserted in your drawing, see Changing the Style of Text on page 161. If you want to change the style of a dimension in your drawing, see Changing the Style of a Dimension on page 165. 249 Chapter 38 Text & Dimension Styles Things You Should Know About Editing Text Styles When you add or edit a text style through the Catalog Manager, the custom text style is saved with the catalog, and is only available when editing text styles in the catalog. If you add or edit a text style when editing text in your drawing (or an element that uses text), however, the customized text style is only available in the current project when editing text styles in your drawing. The text styles library in the catalog remains unchanged. This is because the text styles library in the catalog is separate from the text styles library in the current project. The reason that there is a project-specific text styles library is so that any text styles used in your project are always saved with the project, making it possible to share your project with others and always maintain your customized text styles. If you want text styles that you have customized in your catalog to be available in your projectspecific text styles library, or vice versa, you can use the Transfer tool to save the custom text styles to the external text styles library file (Textstyles.tsl), then import the custom text styles from the library file into the other text styles library. Tip: You can save text styles in your template drawing by opening the template drawing, then selecting Settings > Text Styles and creating your custom text style in the Text Styles dialog. The custom text styles will then be available in the project-specific text styles libraries of future projects that you base on the template drawing. Customizing the Text Styles Library The text styles library contains a number of predefined text styles that you can apply to text. You can edit the existing text styles, or create your own. When you edit the text styles library in your catalog, the text styles are saved with your catalog. If you edit text styles while editing inserted text, or an element that uses text, the text styles are saved in the current drawing only. To access the text styles library in the Catalog Manager: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries > Text Styles. The Text Styles dialog appears. 2. To access the text styles library through inserted text: 1. 2. 3. Select the text in your drawing. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Text dialog, click the Text Style button. The Text Styles dialog appears. This is your project-specific text styles library. To access the text styles library through the Settings menu: 1. Select Settings > Text Styles. This is your project-specific text styles library. 250 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Saving Customized Text Styles to the Text Styles Library File To add a text style to the library: 1. Right-click in the text style window and select Add Item. Or, click the Add Item button below the text style window. A new entry is added to the list. Type a name for the text style and press ENTER. In the Properties area, define the text style. Font. A set of text characters in a specific style and size. Font Style. The style of text. Choices can include Regular, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic. Text Height. The size of text. Text Color. The color of text. Click the swatch to access the Color dialog and select a color. 4. Click OK. 2. In the Catalog Manager, select File > Save Catalog. 38 Saving Customized Text Styles to the Text Styles Library File If you have added or edited text styles in either the catalog text styles library or project-specific text styles library, you can save the custom text styles to the external text styles library file (Textstyles.tsl). You can then import the customized text styles from the library file into any text styles library, whether that be the catalog text styles library or project-specific text styles library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle between libraries. You can save text styles to the default text styles library file, or create a new library to save them in. To save customized text styles to the text styles library file: 1. 2. In the Text Styles dialog, click the Transfer button. In the Open dialog, select the Textstyles.tsl file (or whatever file you want to save to), then click Open. Tip: You can create a new library file if you want by entering a name in the File name edit box. 2. 3. To edit a text style in the library: 1. 2. Select the text style in the list. Edit the properties in the Properties area. Font. A set of text characters in a specific style and size. Font Style. The style of text. Choices can include Regular, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic. Text Height. The size of text. Text Color. The color of text. Click the swatch to access the Color dialog and select a color. 3. Click OK. Note: Clicking Reset will return a text style to the following default values: Arial, Regular, 4", Black. To delete a text style from the library: 1. 2. Select the text style in the list. Right-click and select Delete, or click the Delete button below the text styles window. 3. To save changes to the text styles library in the catalog: 1. Once you’ve made your changes in the Text Styles dialog, click OK. 4. In the left pane of the Transfer dialog, select the text style you want to save, then click Export Item. To export the entire list, just click Export All. The library file is updated. Click OK. User’s Guide 251 Chapter 38 Text & Dimension Styles If you want to import the custom text styles into your catalog text styles library or the current drawing, see the next topic, Importing Text Styles from a Text Styles Library File. in your drawing. The dimension styles library in the catalog remains unchanged. This is because the dimension styles library in the catalog is separate from the dimension styles library in the current project. The reason that there is a project-specific dimension styles library is so that any dimension styles used in your project are always saved with the project, making it possible to share your project with others and always maintain your customized dimension styles. If you want dimension styles that you have customized in your catalog to be available in your project-specific dimension styles library, or vice versa, you can use the Transfer tool to save the custom dimension styles to the external dimension styles library file (Dimstyles.dlb), then import the custom dimension styles from the library file into the other dimension styles library. Tip: You can save dimension styles in your template drawing by opening the template drawing, then selecting Settings > Dimension Styles and creating your custom dimension style in the Dimension Styles dialog. The custom dimension styles will then be available in the project-specific dimension styles libraries of future projects that you base on the template drawing. Importing Text Styles from a Text Styles Library File If you have saved customized text styles to the text styles library file, you can import the text styles into your catalog text styles library or any project-specific text styles library. To import text styles from a text styles library file: 1. 2. In the Text Styles dialog, click Transfer. In the Open dialog, select the Textstyles.tsl file (or whatever file you want to import text styles from), then click Open. 3. In the right pane of the Transfer dialog, select the custom text style you want to import, then click Import Item. Or, to import the entire list, just click Import All. The list in the left pane is updated. Click OK. Customizing the Dimension Styles Library The dimension styles library contains one predefined dimension style called Standard. This is the default dimension style used when you insert dimensions in your drawing. You can add and edit dimension styles to suit your needs. 4. Things You Should Know About Editing Dimension Styles When you add or edit a dimension style through the Catalog Manager, the custom dimension style is saved with the catalog, and is only available when editing dimension styles in the catalog. If you add or edit a dimension style when editing dimensions in your drawing, however, the customized dimension style is only available in the current project when editing dimension styles 252 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Dimension Style Properties When you edit the dimension styles library in your catalog, the dimension styles are saved with your catalog. If you edit dimension styles while editing inserted dimensions, the dimension styles are saved in the current drawing only. To access the dimension styles library in the Catalog Manager: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries > Dimension Styles. The Dimension Styles dialog appears. 3. Define the dimension in the Edit Dimension Styles dialog. See Dimension Style Properties on page 253. Click OK. 38 4. To delete a dimension style from the library: 1. 2. Select the dimension style in the list. Right-click and select Delete, or click the Delete button below the dimension styles window. 2. To save changes to the dimension styles library in the catalog: 1. 2. Once you’ve made your changes in the Dimension Styles dialog, click OK. In the Catalog Manager, select File > Save Catalog. To access the dimension styles library through inserted dimensions: 1. 2. Select the dimension in your drawing. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. The Dimension Styles dialog appears. This is your project-specific dimension styles library. Dimension Style Properties You can control a dimension’s line, arrow and text style properties. To access the dimension styles library through the Settings menu: 1. Select Settings > Dimension Styles. This is your project-specific dimension styles library. Anatomy of a Dimension Dimension Line Arrow, Tick or Dot Text Extension Line To add a new dimension style to the list: 1. Right-click in the dimension style window and select Add Item. Or, click the Add Item button below the dimension style window. A new entry is added to the list. Type a name for the dimension style and press ENTER. Click the Edit button, then define the dimension style. See Dimension Style Properties on page 253. Click OK. Lines and Arrows 2. 3. 4. To edit a dimension style: 1. 2. Select the dimension style in the list. Click Edit. User’s Guide 253 Chapter 38 Text & Dimension Styles Arrow Type You can specify an arrow type for dimensions and leaders (leaders are used with the Text with Leader tool). Choose an arrow, dot or tick for your arrow type. The properties below the Arrow Type selection window (Extension Offset, Dimension Offset, etc.) vary depending on the arrow type selected. As you make different selections, the dimension updates in the preview window. Vertical Text Position This is the vertical position of the dimension text relative to the dimension line. Vertically Centered: Text is placed inside the dimension line. Horizontal Text: Forces the dimension text to always be horizontal, regardless of the dimension line's angle. Above Dimension Line: Text is placed above the dimension line. Distance: Distance between the text and the dimension line when placing text above the dimension line. Dimension Text Horizontal Text Position This is the position of the dimension text relative to the ends of the dimension line. Centered: Centers the text inside the dimension line. Distance from first end: Places the text a specific distance from the first end of the dimension. Specify the distance in the Distance edit box. Units The units (e.g. feet and inches) and precision used to display the dimension value. Override system units: Uses the unit of measure specified in the Edit Dimension Styles dialog instead of the unit of measure specified in the program settings. Type: Choose from Feet-Inches, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters or Inches. Precision: For Feet-Inches, the choices are whole units (0, 1/2, 1/4 and so on). For metric units, the choices are number of decimal places you can use. Distance from the second end: Places the text a specific distance from the second end of the dimension. Specify the distance in the Distance edit box. Text Style Refers to the font, font style, text height and color of the dimension text. Click Text Style to select a style. 254 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Saving Customized Dimension Styles to the Dimension Styles Library File 38 Line Styles You can select a different line style for the dimension line, extension lines and arrows. A line style determines the linetype and color. 2. In the Open dialog, select the Dimstyles.dlb file (or whatever file you want to save to), then click Open. Tip: You can create a new library file if you want by entering a name in the File name edit box. To assign a different line style to a dimension component, select the component in the left pane, then select the desired line style in the right pane. For information about creating custom line styles, see the Line Styles chapter on page 243. 3. In the left pane of the Transfer dialog, select the dimension style you want to save, then click Export Item. To export the entire list, just click Export All. The library file is updated. Click OK. Saving Customized Dimension Styles to the Dimension Styles Library File If you have added or edited dimension styles in either the catalog dimension styles library or project-specific dimension styles library, you can save the custom dimension styles to the external dimension styles library file (Dimstyles.dlb). You can then import the customized dimension styles from the library file into any dimension styles library, whether that be the catalog dimension styles library or project-specific dimension styles library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle between libraries. You can save dimension styles to the default dimension styles library file, or create a new library to save them in. To save dimension styles to the dimension styles library file: 1. In the Dimension Styles dialog, click the Transfer button. 4. If you want to import the custom dimension styles into your catalog dimension styles library or the project-specific dimension styles library, see the next topic, Importing Dimension Styles from a Dimension Styles Library File. Importing Dimension Styles from Dimension Styles Library File If you have saved customized dimension styles to the dimension styles library file, you can import the dimension styles into your catalog dimension styles library or any project-specific dimension styles library. To import dimension styles from a dimension styles library file: 1. In the Dimension Styles dialog, click Transfer. User’s Guide 255 Chapter 38 Text & Dimension Styles 2. In the Open dialog, select the Dimstyles.dlb file (or whatever file you want to import dimension styles from), then click Open. 3. In the right pane of the Transfer dialog, select the custom dimension style you want to import, then click Import Item. Or, to import the entire list, just click Import All. The list in the left pane is updated. Click OK. 4. 256 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Chapter Light Sources Light sources are basically light bulbs. Light sources are contained in a light source library which is accessible through the Catalog Manager as well as the Lights property page of light fixtures. You can edit existing light sources as well as import your own light source files into the library. If you want to change a light fixture’s light source, see Editing a Light Fixture’s Light Source on page 96. 257 Chapter 39 Light Sources Things You Should Know About Editing Light Sources Light sources are basically light bulbs. They are applied to light fixtures. When you add or edit a light source through the Catalog Manager, the custom light source is saved with the catalog, and is only available when editing light sources in the catalog. If you add or edit a light source when editing a light fixture that has been inserted in your drawing, however, the customized light source is only available in the current project when editing the properties of inserted light fixtures. The light source library in the catalog remains unchanged. This is because the light source library in the catalog is separate from the light source library in the current drawing. The reason that there is a project-specific light source library is so that any light sources used in your project are always saved with the project, making it possible to share your project with others and always maintain your customized light sources. If you want light sources that you have customized in your catalog to be available in your project-specific light source library, or vice versa, you can use the Transfer tool to save the custom light sources to the external light source library file (Lights.llb), then import the custom light source from the library file into the other light source library. Customizing the Light Source Library The light source library contains an assortment of light sources, mainly fluorescent and incandescent light bulbs, that can be applied to lighting fixtures. You can customize the light source library by adding and editing light sources. Most manufacturers of lighting equipment provide downloadable .IES photometric data files free of charge on their web sites for use in lighting calculations. Once you’ve added a light source to your library, you can edit its intensity and color if you want. Light sources are listed in groups so you can organize and find them easily. You can create, rename and delete groups. When you edit the light source library in your catalog, the light sources are saved with your catalog. If you edit the light source library while editing an element, the light sources are saved in the current drawing only. To access the light source library in the Catalog Manager: 1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries > Light Sources. The Light Sources dialog appears. 2. 258 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Saving Customized Light Sources to the Light Source Library File To access the light source library through an inserted light fixture: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the light fixture. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. In the Lights dialog, select the Lights tab. Click Add or Edit to access the light source library. 1. 2. 3. 7. If you want to change the color of the light, click the Color edit box and make a selection from the Color dialog. 39 To apply a different IES file to a light source: Select the light source in the list. Click the Load IES File button. Locate and select the *.ies file and click Open. The filename is displayed in the right pane of the Light Sources dialog. To add a group to the light source library: 1. Right-click an existing group and select Add Group, or click the Add Group button below the light source window. An entry is added to the list. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER. To edit the intensity of a light source: 1. 2. Select the light source in the list. In the Scale edit box, specify how much you want to scale the intensity in terms of a percentage. For example, if the light source is a 60 Watt bulb, a value of 50% would make the bulb function like a 30 Watt bulb. 2. To delete a group from the line styles library: 1. 2. Select the group to delete. Right-click and select Delete Group, or click the Delete button below the light source window. To edit the color of a light source: 1. 2. 3. Select the light source in the list. Click the Color edit box. In the Color dialog, select the color you want, then click OK. Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains light sources. To add a light source to the list: 1. 2. Select the group you want to add the light source to. Click the Add Item button below the light source window, or right-click in the light source window and select Add Item. A new entry is added to the list. Type a name for the light source and press ENTER. Click the Load IES File button. Locate and select the *.ies file and click Open. The filename is displayed in the right pane of the Light Sources dialog. If you want to change the intensity of the light, specify the desired percentage in the Scale edit box. For example, if the light source is a 60 Watt bulb, a value of 50% would make the bulb function like a 30 Watt bulb. To delete a light source from the library: 1. 2. Select the light source in the list. Right-click and select Delete, or click the Delete button below the light source window. 3. 4. 5. Saving Customized Light Sources to the Light Source Library File If you have added or edited light sources in either the catalog light source library or project-specific light source library, you can save the custom light sources to the external light source library file (Lights.llb). You can then import the customized light sources from the library file into any light 6. User’s Guide 259 Chapter 39 Light Sources source library, whether that be the catalog light source library or project-specific light source library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle between libraries. You can save light sources to the default light source library, or create a new library to save them in. To save light sources to the light source library file: 1. 2. In the Light Sources dialog, click Transfer. In the Open dialog, select the Lights.llb file (or whatever file you want to save to), then click Open. Tip: You can create a new library file if you want by entering a name in the File name edit box. 3. In the right pane of the Transfer dialog, select the custom light source you want to import, then click Import Item. Or, to import the entire list, just click Import All. The list in the left pane is updated. Click OK. To import light sources from a light source library file: 1. 2. In the Light Sources dialog, click Transfer. In the Open dialog, select the Lights.llb file (or whatever file you want to import light sources from), then click Open. 4. Specifying the Location of the Light Source Directory 3. In the left pane of the Transfer dialog, select the light source you want to save, then click Export Item. To export the entire list, just click Export All. The library file is updated. Click OK. By default, light sources are located in the program’s Lights directory. If you move your Lights directory to another location on your system, you will need to specify the location of the Lights directory so that light sources can be accessed by the program. To specify the location of your Textures directory: 1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab. In the File Paths area, click on the Lights Directory to select it. Click Modify. 4. If you want to import the custom light sources into your catalog light source library or the project-specific light source library, see the next topic, Importing Light Sources from a Light Source Library File. Importing Light Sources from a Light Source Library File If you have saved customized light sources to the light source library file, you can import the light sources into your catalog light source library or any project-specific light source library. 2. 3. 4. 260 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Specifying the Location of the Light Source Directory 5. In the Browse For Folder dialog, locate the folder containing your light sources, then click OK. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog. 39 6. User’s Guide 261 Glossary This handy Glossary contains definitions of terms and abbreviations used in the program and in this User’s Guide. Entries are listed in alphabetical order for your convenience. 263 Glossary Glossary A Alkaline – Having a PH of more than 7. Alt Code – Alternate Code. An extra identification code that is used to link an element in the program's catalog to the databases of other applications. Ambient – A general level of light that is everywhere in the scene. Angle Snap – Makes elements move/rotate at specific increments (angles). Antialiasing – A method of improving image quality by smoothing out jagged edges. This is achieved by adjusting pixel positions or setting pixel intensities so that there is a more gradual transition between the color of a line and the background color. Array – A method of copying an element into a pattern of rows and/or columns. Artifacts – Fuzz or distortion in a graphic image or sequence of video images. Large digital pixels (“blocks”) and jerkiness in the video stream are examples of artifacts. Aspect Ratio – The ratio of width to height. Automatic Save – Saves your drawing for you at specified intervals without prompting. B Beam – In a deck frame, structural member supported by posts that acts to support the deck’s floor joists. Berm – A mound or bank of soil without formal sides. You often see large berms on the sides of highways, which are used for noise control. BLD – BUILD file. The drawing file produced by the program. The extension given to the program's drawing files. BMP – Bitmap. An image file whose bits are referenced to pixels. C Catalog Directory –The directory containing the Master Catalog and other catalogs that you have created. Catalog Panel – The window on the right side of the screen that displays the contents of the current catalog. Collision Control – An intelligent drawing aid that prevents building elements from being inserted where they won't fit. Commander – An editing window that appears when certain functions are chosen. It provides precise control over such things as distance and direction. D Daylight Saving Time – Time usually one hour ahead of standard time. Delimiter – A character that marks the beginning or end of a unit of data. Diffuse – The amount of color that is reflected when an element is illuminated by a light. Division – A construction division identification. In North America, CSI divisions are used. DLB File – Dimension Style Library File. Contains Dimension Styles. DPI – Dots per inch. The measurement of resolution for printers. Drag and Drop Mode – The default mode you are in when you select an element for editing. You can move and rotate elements with your mouse when you are in Drag and Drop Mode. Drawing Aids – Tools that control the way your cursor works and the way elements are inserted. Duplicate – Copies a selected element on the same location. DWG – Standard file format for saving vector graphics in applications like AutoCAD. DXF – Drawing Exchange Format. An ASCII or binary file format of a CAD drawing. 264 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Glossary E Editor – A software application capable of editing text. Element – A specific type of element, such as a door, having its own distinct properties (size, appearance, etc.). Elevation – 1. The front, back and side views of a building. 2. The height of an element above the terrain. Estimate – A report containing a listing of materials, quantities, unit costs, and total cost. F Filter – To exclude an element or location from being displayed, quantified or selected. Floor Level – The height of a floor (location) above the ground (0). G Group – A container for a list of specific element types. For example, doors are organized in groups such as Bi-fold and Single Hinged. H Hatching – A pattern of lines used to fill a particular area of your drawing and to represent the material used for that area (e.g. concrete). Head Height –The height at which the tops of openings, doors and windows are located relative to the floor level. Hidden Line – A view mode where hidden lines are removed from the view, leaving only surfaces displayed. HLB File – Pattern Library File. Contains hatching patterns. Hyperlinks – Jumps (links) to external document files or Web addresses. I IES File – Name derived from Illuminating Engineering Society. A photometric data file (Lights file) containing Luminaire definition and information. Interface – Program components that you see on the screen and use to perform tasks. J Joist – One of a parallel set of structural members used to support floor loads. They, in turn, are supported by beams, girders, or bearing walls. K KLB File – Line Styles Library File. L Line Styles – Settings that determine the color and pattern of a line. Used in electrical wiring and dimension styles. LLB File – Lights Library File. Locations – Drawing layers containing definitions for wall height, floor level, head height and ceiling level. Lumen – A Lumen is equal to one foot-candle (the amount of light one candle generates one foot away) falling on one SQUARE foot of area. Luminaire – The international term for a piece of lighting equipment. The complete unit including lamp, fixture, and other parts. M Magnetic North – Magnetic North is the magnetic north pole. It is the focus of the planet's magnetic field and is the point magnetic compasses point toward. MLB File – Materials Library File. N NLB File – Linetype Library File. Nosing – The portion of a stair tread that projects over the riser. O Open GL – A 3D graphics Application Programming Interface (API) that includes routines for shading, texture mapping, texture filtering, anti-aliasing, lighting, geometry transformations, etc. User’s Guide 265 Glossary Ortho – A Drawing Aid that restricts drawing to straight up, down, left, or right. Orthogonal View – An alternate name for Parallel View in which all drawing lines are parallel and the effect of distance is eliminated. Contrasts with Perspective View. P Pan – A control that allows you to move the onscreen view by dragging up, down, left, or right. Parallel View – A 3D view that eliminates the effect of distance from a view. In Parallel View, all drawing lines are parallel. Contrasts with Perspective View. Parallel View is sometimes called Orthogonal View. Parametric – Having a set of physical properties that determines the characteristics of an element. Percent (%) Below Horizon – The percentage that you want the background to appear below ground level (absolute zero). Perspective View – A 3D view in which the scale of an element decreases according to its distance from the viewer. Drawing lines converge to a vanishing point. Perspective View represents the way an element would appear to the human eye. Photometric Data File – A file that allows you to define complex light distributions based on physical lamp properties. When loading a photometric file, a photometric web is constructed that defines the intensity of light for any direction from a light source. Pixel – A word invented by combining the two words “picture” and “element”. The smallest unit of color on a computer display. Size varies by resolution. Pixel Search Distance – The Pixel Search Distance determines how close your cursor (which is attached to an element you are inserting) needs to be to an existing element before Object Snap occurs. Plan View – A flat, 2D view from above. Plateau – A relatively large, flat area of land situated above the adjacent land. Project Directory – The location of the default directory in which projects are stored. Project Estimate – A report containing a listing of materials, quantities, unit costs, and total cost. Q Quantity Report – A list of the type and quantity of materials in your model. Also known as a Materials List or Bill of Materials. R Render – To display a 3D model with surfaces, textures, lighting and shading. Rendered Mode – A display mode where solid colors and textures are applied to surfaces, creating a realistic 3D effect. Rendered Outline Mode – A display mode where solid colors and textures are applied to elements, and surfaces are outlined with a black line for high definition. Retaining Wall – A wall constructed to contain a lateral force, such as a bank of dirt. S Shininess – The ability of a texture to reflect light. Slab – Concrete pavement, i.e. driveways, garages, and basement floors. Slope – Ground that forms an incline. Snap Angle – The increment angle your cursor will snap at (if Angle Snap is enabled). Specular – A shininess factor that determines the amount of highlighting you see on an element from light sources. Spreadsheet – A table of values arranged in rows and columns. Status Bar – The bar below the drawing area that contains the Help message for the current state or tool. Also contains drawing aid buttons. Stringer – The inclined side of a stair that supports the treads and risers. 266 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Glossary T Template – A set of pre-defined properties that determines the setup and outcome of something (like a report). Temporary Directory – The default directory in which temporary files generated by the program are saved. Terrain – A piece of land. Tile Height – The height of one tile in a texture pattern. The program generates large images by “tiling” texture bitmaps horizontally and vertically. Transparency – The degree to which a texture can be penetrated by light. Tread – The horizontal part of a stair that is stepped on. True North – True North is the geographic North Pole. It is located at 90 degrees North latitude and all lines of longitude converge at the pole. TSL File – Text Style Library File V View Filter – A dialog used for displaying and hiding elements and/or locations, and controlling the selectability of elements. VRML – Virtual Reality Modeling Language. The open standard for virtual reality on the Internet. W Windowing – A selection method where you click and drag a rectangle, from left to right, around elements you want to select. Wireframe View – The default 3D view where all lines making up elements are displayed. It allows you to see through elements. WRL File – WORLD file. Capable of being viewed in VRML viewers. X X Axis – One of the three drawing axes. An X coordinate specifies a horizontal distance. Y Y Axis – One of the three drawing axes. A Y coordinate specifies a vertical distance. Z Z Axis – One of the three drawing axes. The Z coordinate indicates either elevation or depth. Z Buffer – A block of memory used to store the Zaxis value of a pixel on the screen. Higher depth values improve detail of 3D display but may slow the system. Zenith - Culminating point. Zoom Realtime – Magnifies or shrinks the view as you click and drag with your mouse. Zoom to Fit – Zooms the drawing to the extents of the drawing area, creating a maximized view of your entire design. Zoom Window – Magnifies an area of your drawing that you select by windowing. User’s Guide 267 Catalog Index When you want to know where to find something in the catalog, this is the place to look. The Catalog Index contains a list of elements — everything from arbors to windchimes — and tells you what tool to select to access each one, and what group to select in the catalog. Items are listed in alphabetical order for your convenience. 269 Catalog Index Catalog Index Items Arbors Arrows, north Badminton Courts Barbecues Bark Basketball Nets and Courts Benches, exterior Bird Baths, Feeders & Houses Borders, garden Cars Chairs, patio Columns, decorative Concrete Edging Concrete fills Corner Accents Deck Box Doghouses Edging Tool to Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Fills Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Edging Insert > Landscape > Fills Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Edging Catalog Groups Arbors and Trellis North Arrows Sports Outdoor Cooking and Heating Fills Sports Benches and Storage Decorative Accessories Decorative Accessories Other Outdoor Items Chairs Decorative Accessories Rail Edging Fills Decorative Accessories Benches and Storage Storage & Enclosures Plastic Edging Post Edging Rail Edging Irrigation Fire Hydrant Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories 270 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Catalog Index Catalog Index Items Fireplaces, outdoor Fountains Garages, detached Garden Boxes Garden Hoses Gazebos Golf Hole Gravel Greenhouse Hammocks Hoses, garden Hot Tubs House Templates Jungle Gyms Lawn Edging Lights, outdoor Tool to Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Fills Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Edging Insert > Landscape > Landscape Lighting Catalog Groups Outdoor Cooking and Heating Decorative Accessories Storage & Enclosures Planters and Garden Boxes Irrigation Storage & Enclosures Sports Fills Storage & Enclosures Swings and Hammocks Irrigation Pools & Hot Tubs House Templates Playground Plastic Edging Exterior Fixtures Ground Lighting Light Posts Chairs Other Outdoor Items Playground Lounge Chairs, outdoor Mail Boxes Merry-Go-Round Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures User’s Guide 271 Catalog Index Catalog Index Items North Arrows Obelisks Patio Furniture Tool to Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture Catalog Groups North Arrows Arbors and Trellis Tables Chairs Benches and Storage Tables Tables Planters and Garden Boxes Playground Fills Pools & Hot Tubs Playground Outdoor Cooking and Heating Fills Playground Storage & Enclosures Playground Storage & Enclosures Fills Pop-up Sprinklers Decorative Accessories Playground Patio umbrellas Picnic Tables Planters Play Gyms & Play Houses Ponds Pools Propane Heater Sand Sandbox Screened Rooms See-Saw Sheds Soil Sprinklers Sundials Swing Sets Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Fills Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Fills Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Fills Insert > Landscape > Irrigation Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures 272 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Catalog Index Catalog Index Items Swings Tables, patio Tennis Courts Trampoline Trellis Umbrellas, patio Volleyball Courts Water Water Well Weather Vanes Windchimes Windmill Wood Edging Tool to Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures Insert > Landscape > Fills Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories Insert > Landscape > Edging Catalog Groups Swings and Hammocks Tables Sports Sports Arbors and Trellis Tables Sports Fills Irrigation Decorative Accessories Decorative Accessories Decorative Accessories Post Edging Rail Edging User’s Guide 273 Index 1-2-3 2D Designer’s View, 20 2D Image export, 190 2D Percent Open, 60 2D Plan Preview, 226 2D Plan View, 20 2D plant representation, editing, 112 2D Viewing in catalog panel, 226 in drawing area, 20 3D Home Architect Online, 7 3D Model export, 190 3D Model View 3D Overview, 21 3D Perspective, 21 about, 21 changing the camera height, 211 changing the display mode, 22 changing the target height, 211 changing the viewing field angle, 213 changing your viewpoint, 210 changing, 210 creating new, 210 flying around in, 214 moving the camera, 210 moving the target, 211 perspective view mode, 211 selecting a preset camera angle, 212 sliding in, 214 spinning the view, 214 walking around in, 214 3D Overview, 212 3D Percent Open, 60 3D Perspective, 211 3D Studio files exporting to, 190 importing, 224 selecting to apply to an element, 225 3D Viewing, 21 3DS files exporting to, 190 importing, 224 3DTrueView about, 174 adjusting image brightness, 177 changing refresh rate during lighting calculations, 177 creating fog effect, 178 creating smoke effect, 178 enabling ambient lighting, 178 rendering a view, 176 save location, 179 save name, 179 saving multiple renderings, 180 saving to file, 179 setting quality, 176 setting the viewpoint, 174 setting up the scene, 174 specifying image size, 180 turning daylight off, 177 using antialiasing, 178 A Above-ground pools, 84 Accessories inserting, 92 Add City, 175 Add Group catalog, 222 light source library, 259 line styles library, 245 materials library, 236 Add Linestyle, 245 Add Location, 200 Add Material, 237 Add Text with Leader, 161 275 Index Add Text, 160 Advanced Features, 5 Aligned Dimensions, 164 Alignment of text, 161 Alkaline, 264 Alt Code, 229 Ambient lighting, enabling, 178 Angle from Joists, 67 Angle Snap, 131 Angle, camera, 212 Angle, slope, 51 Angle, view, 210, 213 Angles, specifying, 140 Annotation Text with Leader, 161 Text, 160 Antialiasing 3DTrueView, 178 Appearance page, 228 Appearance properties, 228 Appearance, elements, 148, 228 Arbors, 84 Area/Perimeter Calculator, 135 Array, 147 Artifacts, eliminating, 197 Auto Name, 227 Auto-cut terrain around building, 46 Automatic name generation editing the formula, 227 using, 227 Automatic Save, 185 Berms/Trenches creating, 47 deleting, 48 moving, 48 stretching, 48 Bill of Materials, 170 Billboard behavior, 154 Billboards, 154 Bird baths, 92 Bird feeders, 92 Bird houses, 92 Bitmaps exporting to, 190 using your own in materials, 239 Blank Project, 4 Block Import Options, 224 Bloom time, 117 BMP exporting to, 190 using your own in materials, 239 Board Offset, 58, 61 Board Spacing, 58, 61 Board Style, 58, 61 Borders, garden, 92 Box planters, 92 Boxes, garden, 84 Branded Content Providers, 7 Breaking edging, 109 fences, 57 retaining walls, 77 Brick, 77 Brightness, image, 177 Broderbund.com, 7 Building 64 Building elements, filtering from view, 27 Building Locations adding, 200 current, 200 defining, 200 deleting, 200 dimming, 201 filtering from view, 28 making selectable/non-selectable, 31 Building lot, 42, 43 B Background color, drawing area, 196 Background, in 3D views, 215 Badminton courts, 84 Base Height, 138 Basic property page, 228 Basic View Control Toolbar, 10 Basics, program, 5 Basketball courts, 84 Beds, garden, 104 Behavior Photo Board, 154 Behavior page, 231 Benches, 88 Berms editing height, 48 editing peak shape, 48 C Cabanas, 84 Camera Height, changing, 211 276 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Index Cameras changing the height of, 211 looking through, 21 moving, 210 orbiting around targets, 214 placing new, 210 resetting, 215 turning on and off, 210 Cars, 92 Cartesian Coordinate System, 139 Cartesian coordinate system, 140 Cascade Open Views, 205 Catalog Manager, about, 222 Catalog Panel about, 11 displaying/hiding, 195 resizing, 195 Catalog Properties, 234 Catalogs adding a group to, 222 changing preview display, 226 closing, 234 creating copies of, 232 creating new, 231 deleting elements from, 233 deleting groups from, 223 editing elements, 223 importing elements into, 232 opening, 233 previewing images in, 226 renaming groups in, 222 saving edited elements from your drawing, 224 saving under different name, 232 saving, 232 viewing properties of, 234 Categories adding to catalogs, 222 deleting in catalogs, 223 renaming in catalogs, 222 Ceiling Height, 200 Centered text, 161 Chairs, patio, 88 Change Display Every _ Steps, 177 City, 175 Click-and-drag insertion method, 14 Close Catalog, 234 Closed Riser, 72 Closing catalogs, 234 Closing projects, 187 Collision Control, 131 Color Background (drawing area), 196 changing an element’s, 148, 228 light sources, 259 text, 161, 251 toolbar areas, 194 toolbars, 194 Color Bleed, 179, 238 Colors applying to the terrain, 46 editing an element’s, 228 editing material color, 238 of plants throughout growing season, 117 viewing an element’s, 228 Columns decorative, 92 Commander displaying, 138 selecting a reference point for actions, 139 specifying insertion heights, 138 using to rotate elements, 140 using when curving elements, 141 using, 138 Common plant names, 116 Complexity of care (plant), 116 Component Display, 226 Components, appearance of, 228 Concrete slabs applying different materials to, 74 creating, 72 deleting, 74 editing thickness, 73 moving, 73 reshaping, 73 resizing, 73 rotating, 73 Contents, package, 2 Context-sensitive menus, 15, 144 Contours, showing, 46 Convert File From, 225 Coordinate icon, displaying/hiding, 138 Coordinate system Cartesian, 140 Polar, 140 selecting, 139 Coordinates, entering, 140 Copies (print), 188 Copying User’s Guide 277 Index elements, 146 Corner details, 92 Corrupted projects, repairing, 184 Country, 175 Create Elevation View, 217 Creating 104, 164 Cropped textures, 239 Cross-section, creating, 218 Current View Size, 180 Curving deck edges, 65 deck opening edges, 69 retaining walls, 76 using the Commander, 141 Custom textures, 239 Customer Service, 6 Customizing catalogs, 221 dimension styles, 249 elements, 223 light sources, 257 line styles, 243 materials, 235 screen, 193 text styles, 249 view windows, 203 views, 209 Cut Opening deck, 68 Cut-off textures, 239 parts, 70 Deck tool, 64 Decks building with Deck tool, 64 changing direction of deck boards, 65 changing the railing style, 67 controlling display of railings, 67 controlling railings on deck stairs, 71 creating openings in, 68 curving edges, 65 curving opening edges, 69 deleting, 69 displaying footings under posts, 66 displaying skirting, 68 editing frame construction, 66 editing height, 65 editing posts, 65 inserting a deck floor, 64 inserting stairs, 69 moving, 64 removing openings, 69 reshaping openings, 68 reshaping, 65 resizing openings, 68 stretching, 65 viewing tutorial, 5 Default save directory, 185 Delete Element, 233 Delete Group light source library, 259 line styles library, 245 materials library, 237 Delete Linestyle, 246 Delete Material, 237 Deleting berms/trenches, 48 building locations, 200 deck openings, 69 deck stairs, 72 decks, 69 dimension styles from library, 253 dimensions, 165 edging, 110 elements, 147, 233 elevations, 217 exterior accessories, 93 exterior furniture, 89 exterior structures, 85 fences, 59 filled areas, 105 D Damaged projects, repairing, 184 Date and time, 175 Daylight Savings, 175 Daylight, turning off, 177 Deck Openings curving edges, 69 inserting, 68 removing, 69 reshaping, 68 resizing, 68 Deck Stairs controlling railing display, 71 deleting, 72 editing properties, 70 editing size, 70 inserting, 69 moving, 70 278 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Index gates, 61 groups from catalogs, 223 groups from light source library, 259 groups from line styles library, 245 groups from materials library, 237 groups in View Manager, 204 hills, 47 irrigation, 100 light source from library, 259 line styles from library, 246 linetypes from linetypes library, 247 materials from library, 237 outdoor light fixtures, 98 paths, 81 patio slabs, 74 photo boards, 156 plants, 114 plateaus, 49 retaining walls, 77 section views, 220 site boundary, 42 slopes, 51 sprinklers, 100 text with leader, 163 text, 161 valleys, 47 views in View Manager, 207 Depth below ground level, 66 Deselecting elements, 15 Designer’s View, 20 Dimension Styles adding, 253 changing, 165 customizing dimension styles library, 252 customizing library, 252 deleting from library, 253 editing, 253 important considerations before editing, 252 importing dimension styles from library into catalog, 255 properties, 166, 253 saving to library file, 255 setting current, 163 Dimensions about, 163 aligned, 164 changing style, 165 deleting, 165 displaying/hiding, 28 editing an element’s, 148 filtering for selection, 32 linear, 164 moving dimension line, 164 scale, 188, 207 setting current style, 163 stretching, 165 Dimming Percentage, locations, 201 Direction, specifying, 140 Disabling templates, 186 Diseases page (Encyclopedia), 123, 124 Display All But Framing, 220 Display Filter, 26 Display Framing, 220 Display Mode, 22 Display of graphics, improving, 197 Display settings, adjusting, 4 Displaying building elements, 27 cameras, 210 catalog panel, 195 Coordinate Icon, 138 dimensions, 28 electrical wiring, 28 project trace images, 29 selected building elements, 27 selected parts on elements, 226 text, 28 toolbars, 194 view tabs, 205 Distance above current location or terrain, 145, 230 Distance, measuring, 134 Distance, specifying, 140 Diving board, 84 Division, 229 Do not use Project Template, 186 Doghouses, 84 Door mats, 92 Down to deck location, 70 Down to previous location, 70 Down to terrain, 70 DPI, 264 Dragging method of insertion, 14 Drawing Grid displaying, 130 setting up, 130 turning on and off, 130 Drawings, opening from older versions, 2 Driveways, 80 User’s Guide 279 Index Duplicate, 146 DXF export, 190 patterns, 241 photo boards, 156 plants, 112 print scale, 207 retaining walls, 76 screen settings, 193 sections, 219 site boundary, 42 slopes, 50 text styles, 250 text, 160 views, 209 wall elevation, 76 wall height, 76 wall width, 76 Editing Mode, 14, 144 Electrical Wiring displaying/hiding, 28 making selectable/non-selectable, 32 Element Properties, 222 Elements changing display of in preview window, 226 changing elevation, 145 creating custom, 223 deleting from catalogs, 233 deleting, 147 editing in catalogs, 223 editing properties, 148 filtering from view, 27 importing 3D Studio files, 224 importing into catalogs, 232 inserting, 14 moving, 144 rotating, 145 saving edited elements to a catalog, 224 Elevate tool, 145 Elevation editing an element’s, 145 exterior accessories, 92 photo board, 156 plants, 112 retaining walls, 76 Elevation Marks editing properties of, 217 moving, 216 turning on/off, 216 Elevation Properties, 217 Elevations changing the target of, 217 creating custom, 217 E Edging breaking, 109 changing length, 109 changing material, 110 cleaning up corners, 108 deleting, 110 editing height, 110 editing width, 110 inserting, 108 moving, 109 rotating, 109 stretching, 109 Edit City, 175 Edit Linestyle, 245 Edit Material, 237 Edit menu, 15 Editing about, 143 accessing edit commands, 144 accessing edit tools, 15 berms, 48 building locations, 200 catalogs, 222 deck stairs, 70 decks, 65 dimension styles, 252 dimensions, 164 edging, 108 element properties, 148 elements in catalogs, 223 exterior accessories, 92 exterior furniture, 88 exterior structures, 84 fences, 57 fills, 104 gates, 60 hills, 47 leader with text, 162 light fixtures, 96 light sources, 258 line styles, 244 linetypes, 247 materials, 236 path elements, 80 patio slabs, 73 280 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Index deleting, 217 displaying marks for, 216 moving left or right, 216 viewing, 216 viewing/editing properties, 217 Emissive, 179, 238 Enable Ambient Lighting, 178 Enable Collision Control, 131 Enable Daylight, 177 Enable Pre-Selection, 15 Encyclopedia about, 115 accessing, 116 Diseases page, 123 Main page, 116 Notebook page, 121 Picture page, 122 Plant Care Calendar, 118 searching for a plant, 116 selecting a plant to add to a catalog, 125 selecting a plant to view, 116 World Map page, 120 Estimate changing report format, 170 filtering, 170 generating, 170 printing, 170 saving, 170 specifying name, 171 specifying save location, 171 turning grid lines off, 170 viewing saved estimate, 171 Excavated areas, 48 Explicit Height, 70 Export Model, 190 Export View, 190 Exporting current view, 190 custom light sources to library file, 259 custom line styles to library file, 246 dimension styles to library file, 255 materials to library file, 239 model, 190 text styles to library file, 251 to 3DS, 190 to BMP, 190 to DXF, 190 to JPG, 190 to TGA, 190 to WRL, 190 Extend Stair, 70 Extension Below Base, 76 Exterior Accessories changing elevation, 92 deleting, 93 editing appearance, 93 editing size, 92 inserting, 92 moving, 92 rotating, 92 Exterior Furniture applying different colors/materials, 88 deleting, 89 editing size, 88 inserting, 88 moving, 88 rotating, 88 Exterior Structures applying different materials, 84 deleting, 85 editing size, 84 inserting house templates, 38 inserting, 38, 84 moving, 84 rotating, 84 F Fences breaking, 57 deleting, 59 editing material, 59 editing properties, 57 inserting, 56 lengthening, 57 parts, 57 raked, 58 shortening, 57 stepped, 58 stretching, 57 Field of vision, 213 File Paths Projects Directory, 185 Templates directory, 186 Temporary Directory, 187 Fills changing fill material, 105 creating, 104 deleting, 105 moving, 105 User’s Guide 281 Index reshaping, 104 resizing, 104 rotating, 105 Filtering building elements for selection, 30, 31 building elements from view, 27 building locations for selection, 31 dimensions for selection, 32 dimensions from view, 28 display, 26 electrical wiring from view, 28 elements/locations for selection, 29 framing, 220 landscape elements for selection, 30 landscape elements from view, 26 plants by disease, 123 plants by selected criteria, 124 project estimate, 170 project trace images from view, 29 text for selection, 31 text from view, 28 Finishing commands, 14 Fireplaces, outdoor, 92 Fit To Page, 188 Flip Opening gates, 60 Flip Swing gates, 60 Flipping gate swing, 60 gates, 60 Floor Level, 200 Floor Locations adding, 200 current, 200 defining, 200 deleting, 200 dimming, 201 filtering from view, 28 making selectable/non-selectable, 31 Floors deck, 64 Flowers, 112 Fly Around tool, 214 Focal point, moving, 211 Fog, 178 Font Style, 161, 251 Font, 161, 251 Footings displaying under deck posts, 66 Format, project estimate, 170 Fountains, 92 Framing changing, 220 displaying, 220 editing deck frames, 66 hiding, 220 Furniture outdoor, 88 G Garages, 84 Garden beds, 104 Garden borders, 92 Garden boxes, raised, 84 Gardens, 112 Gates deleting, 61 editing properties, 60 flipping swing, 60 flipping, 60 hinge side, 60 inserting, 59 moving, 60 Gazebos, 84 Generate Project Estimate, 170 Generate Quantity Report, 170 Geometry, editing, 148 Global Settings, 175 Glossary of Terms, 6, 263, 269 Going 14 Golf Holes, 84 Graphics display, improving, 197 Graphics print quality, 188 Greenhouse, 84 Grid drawing, 130 snap, 130 Grid Mesh Spacing, 46 Grid Snap, 130 Groups adding to catalogs, 222 adding to light source library, 259 adding to line styles library, 245 adding to materials library, 236 deleting from catalogs, 223 deleting from light source library, 259 deleting from line styles library, 245 deleting from materials library, 237 282 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Index renaming in line styles library, 245 renaming in materials library, 237 renaming, 222 Growing season (plant), 117 Growth, plant, 116 Guarantee, 7 project trace images, 29 selected building elements, 27 text, 28 toolbars, 194 Hills deleting, 47 editing height, 47 editing peak shape, 47 moving, 47 Hills, 46 Hot tubs, 84 House Templates, 38 How to Complete a Project, 5 How to Use the Tools, 5 Hug Terrain, 58, 73, 80 Hyperlinks, 231 H Hanging planters, 92 Hardware Acceleration, 196 Hatched view, 23 Head Height, 200 Heater, propane, 92 Height Camera, 211 ceiling, 200 deck, 65 edging, 110 floor, 200 head, 200 insertion, 230 retaining walls, 76 specifying insertion height in Commander, 138 Target Height, 211 wall, 200 window, 200 Height (elevation) editing an element’s, 145 exterior accessories, 92 photo boards, 156 plants, 112 Help E-mail Support, 6 Glossary of Terms, 6 Online Self-Support, 6 online, 5 technical, 6 Telephone Support, 6 Troubleshooting Guide, 6 Hidden Line view, 23 Hiding building elements, 27 cameras, 210 catalog panel, 195 Coordinate Icon, 138 dimensions, 28 electrical wiring, 28 framing, 220 I Icon, coordinate, 138 IES files, importing, 259 If 138 Image Brightness, 177 Importing 3D Studio Files, 224 dimension styles into dimension styles library, 255 elements into catalogs, 232 IES files, 259 light source files, 259 line styles into line styles library, 246, 260 materials from library file, 240 photo boards, 154 text files, 160 text styles into text styles library, 252 Improving graphics display, 197 Include railing on selected edges, 67 Include Railings, 71 Include skirting on selected edges, 68 Included Angle, 141 In-ground pools, 84 Inserting 38 about inserting elements, 14 driveways, 80 edging, 108 exterior accessories, 92 exterior furniture, 88 exterior structures, 38, 84 fences, 56 fills, 104 User’s Guide 283 Index gates, 59 irrigation, 100 landscaping, 101 light fixtures, 96 paths, 80 patios, 72 photo boards, 154, 155 plants, 112 property lines, 42 retaining walls, 76 sidewalks, 80 site boundary, 42 sprinklers, 100 text, 160 Insertion Height, 138 Insertion height, 230 Insertion Method for line-drawn elements, 14 Insertion Point, 230 Insertion Point, editing an element’s, 230 Installing 3 Installing the software, 3 Irrigation deleting, 100 editing height, 100 editing spray, 100 inserting, 100 moving, 100 rotating, 100 garden beds, 104 gates, 59 hills and valleys, 46 inserting furniture, 88 inserting house templates, 38 inserting structures, 38, 84 irrigation, 100 paths, 80 patios, 63 plants, 112 plateaus, 48 ponds, 104 retaining walls, 76 sidewalks, 80 slopes, 49 terrain, 46 toolbar, 10 viewing tutorial, 5 Latin plant names, 116 Latitude, 175 Lawn edging, 108 Leader arrow style, 162 Leader with text, 161 Learn menu, 5 Learn to Use, 5 Learning 5 Left Justify Text, 161 Lengthening edging, 109 fences, 57 paths, 80 retaining walls, 76 Libraries Dimension Styles, 252 dimension styles, 252 Light Source, 258 Line Styles, 244 Linetypes, 247 Materials, 236 Patterns, 241 Text Styles, 250 Lifetime (plant), 116 Light fixtures changing the look of, 98 deleting, 98 editing light source, 96 editing size, 96 inserting outdoors, 96 moving, 96 turning on and off, 97 J JPG exporting to, 190 using your own in materials, 239 Jungle Gyms, 38, 84 Justification, text, 161 L Landscape Lighting editing size, 96 inserting, 96 moving, 96 Landscape tab, 10 Landscaping decks, 63 edging, 108 fences, 55, 56 fills, 104 filtering elements for selection, 30 filtering landscape elements from view, 26 284 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Index turning on/off, 98 Light posts, 96 Light Sources adding groups to library, 259 adding to library, 259 customizing library, 258 deleting from library, 259 deleting groups from library, 259 editing color, 259 editing in light fixtures, 96 editing intensity, 259 important considerations before editing, 258 saving custom light sources to library file, 259 specifying directory, 260 Lighting preference (plant), 116 Lights customizing light source library, 258 outdoor, 96 path, 96 Lights Directory, 260 Line Styles accessing library, 244 adding groups to line styles library, 245 adding to library, 245 deleting from library, 246 deleting groups from library, 245 editing in library, 245 important considerations when editing, 244 importing line styles from library into catalog, 246, 260 renaming groups in library, 245 saving custom line styles to library file, 246 Linear Dimensions, 164 Linetypes adding to linetypes library, 247 customizing linetypes library, 247 deleting from library, 247 editing, 247 viewing an element’s, 228 Load city template, 176 Load IES File, 259 Location Dimming, 201 Locations adding, 200 current, 200 defining, 200 deleting, 200 filtering from view, 28 making selectable/non-selectable, 31 lock, Maintain Aspect Ratio, 238 Longitude, 175 Look Around tool, 214 Look Through, 21 Lot lines, 42, 43 Lounges, 88 Lowering decks, 65 elements, 145 outdoor accessories, 92 photo boards, 156 plants, 112 retaining walls, 76 M Mailboxes, 92 Maintain Aspect Ratio, 156, 238 Making 31 Manufacturer, 229 Mark Text, 217, 219 Marks elevation, 216 section, 219 Materials adding groups to materials library, 236 adding to library, 237 applying to terrain, 46 changing an element’s, 148, 228 customizing materials library, 236 deleting from library, 237 deleting groups from library, 237 editing an element’s, 228 editing in library, 237 editing surface properties, 179 important notes about editing, 236 importing from library file, 240 properties, 237 renaming groups in library, 237 rotating on elements, 149, 229 saving to library file, 239 scale of in rendered views, 238 Tile Height, 238 Tile Width, 238 using textures from outside sources, 238, 239 viewing an element’s, 228 Materials Paintbrush, 148 Mats, door, 92 Max. Post Spacing, 58 Max. Riser Height, 71 Maximizing a view window, 206 User’s Guide 285 Index Measure tool, 134 Measuring area, 135 Menu Bar, 10 Menus for editing, 15, 144 Min number of vertices per component, 225 Modify Elements, 15, 144 month 114 Month, 175 Move Target, 217 Move Whole Element deck, 64 fill, 105 plateau, 49 slab, 73 Moving berms, 48 cameras for 3D views, 210 deck stairs, 70 decks, 64 dimension line, 164 edging, 109 elements vertically, 145 elements, 144 elevation target, 217 elevations marks, 216 exterior accessories, 92 exterior furniture, 88 exterior structures, 84 filled areas, 105 gates, 60 hills, 47 irrigation, 100 leader text, 163 outdoor lighting, 96 paths, 81 photo boards, 155 plants, 112 plateaus, 49 section marks, 219 site boundary, 42 slabs, 73 slopes, 51 sprinklers, 100 text leader, 162 text, 160 toolbars, 195 trenches, 48 valleys, 47 Mulched beds, 104 Multiple text insert, 160 N Name generation about, 227 editing the formula, 227 using, 227 Name, building location, 200 New Catalog, 231 New Project, 4 New View, 204 North arrows, 92 Nosing, 72 Note 132, 231 Notebook page (Encyclopedia), 121, 124 Notes, in properties dialog, 230 Number of copies, 188 Number, location, 200 O Obelisks, 92 Object Snap, 130 OBJSNAP, 130 Older versions opening drawings from, 2 uninstalling, 3 Online Help, 5 Online Software Help, 6 Open Catalog, 233 Open View, 204 Open, 184 Opening catalogs, 233 drawing from older versions, 2 projects from other programs, 39 sample projects, 184 saved estimate, 171 saved project, 184 saved projects, 184 views, 204 Openings curving deck opening edges, 69 inserting in decks, 68 removing from decks, 69 reshaping in decks, 68 resizing in decks, 68 Orientation, element, 146, 228 Ortho, 131 Orthogonal view mode, 212 286 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Index Outdoor accessories, 92 Outdoor fireplaces, 92 Outdoor furniture, 88 Outdoor structures, 38, 84 Overhang deck beams, 67 deck boards, 66 deck joists, 67 deck stairs, 72 Override system units, 166, 254 Patterns, element, 228 Perspective view mode, 211 Perspective, 3D, 21 Photo Boards changing elevation, 156 changing to rotating, 156 changing to stationary, 156 creating transparency in, 156 deleting, 156 editing size, 156 importing, 154 inserting, 155 moving, 155 rotating, 155 saving to the catalog, 155 Photo realistic images, 173 Pick and drag insertion method, selecting, 14 Pick Points insertion method, selecting, 14 Picnic tables, 88 Picture page (Encyclopedia), 122 Pixel Search Distance, 131 Place New Camera, 210 Plan view displaying, 20 rendered, 20 Plans sample, 184 Plant Care Calendar 118 Plant Encyclopedia about, 115 accessing, 116 care requirements, 116 Diseases page, 123 growth information, 116 lighting preferences, 116 Main page, 116 Notebook page, 121 Picture page, 122 Plant Care Calendar, 118 searching for a plant, 116 selecting a plant to add to a catalog, 125 selecting a plant to view, 116 temperature preferences, 116 water requirements, 116 World Map page, 120 Plant Growth Over Time, 114 Plant Seasonal Change, 114 Planters, 92 Planting age, 113 Plants User’s Guide P Package contents, 2 Pads applying different materials to, 74 inserting, 72 Paintbrush, materials, 148 Panning, 22 Parallel view mode, 212 Part No., 229 Path lights, 96 Paths applying different materials, 81 deleting, 81 drawing, 80 editing length, 80 editing thickness, 81 editing width, 81 moving, 81 rotating, 80 Patio furniture, 88 Patio umbrellas, 92 Patios applying different materials to, 74 creating, 72 deleting, 74 editing thickness, 73 moving, 73 reshaping, 73 resizing, 73 rotating, 73 Patterned properties, 239 Patterned view, 23 Patterns customizing library, 241 editing on elements, 148 editing, 241 important notes about editing, 241 viewing an element’s, 228 287 Index adding to catalog from Encyclopedia, 125 applying seasonal change, 114 care calendar, 118 changing age, 113 changing elevation, 112 deleting, 114 diseases, 123, 124 editing appearance in 2D plan view, 112 editing size, 113 Encyclopedia, 115 filtering by selected criteria, 124 forcing custom size, 113 inserting, 112 life expectancy, 116 moving, 112 seeing growth over time, 114 soil requirements, 116 usages, 116 zone information, 116 Plateaus creating, 48 deleting, 49 editing height, 49 editing peak shape, 49 moving, 49 reshaping, 49 stretching, 49 Playgrounds, 38, 84 Playhouses, 38, 84 Pointer tool, 14, 144 Polar Coordinate System, 139, 140 Ponds, 104 Pool slide, 84 Pools, 84 Position, materials on elements, 149 Post edging, 108 Post Extension, 58 Post Rotation, 58 Post Width, 58 Posts deck, 65 fence, 58 Precision for units of measure, 134 Precision, 232 Pre-Selection, enabling, 15 Preset Cameras, 212 Preview, element, 226 Previous versions opening drawings from, 2 uninstalling, 3 Price, 229 Pricing, editing, 171 Print Scale, editing, 207 Print Setup, 188 Print to Scale, 188 Print, 187 Printing area/perimeter calculations, 135 drawings, 187 editing the print scale, 207 project estimate, 170 quality, 188 to scale, 188 Program Basics, 5 Program Help, 5 Project Estimate changing report format, 170 filtering, 170 generating, 170 printing, 170 saving, 170 specifying name, 171 specifying save location, 171 turning grid lines off, 170 viewing saved estimate, 171 Project Trace Image displaying/hiding, 29 making selectable/non-selectable, 32 Projects opening, 184 repairing, 184 saving as templates, 185 saving, 185 Projects Directory, 185 Propane heater, 92 Properties appearance, 228 berms, 48 deck posts, 65 deck railings, 67 deck stairs, 70 decks, 65, 66 dimensions, 165 edging, 110 editing element properties in catalogs, 226 editing, 233 element composition, 148 element geometry, 148 element size, 148 element, 148, 233 288 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Index elevation, 217 exterior accessories, 92 exterior furniture, 88 exterior structures, 84 fence, 57 gate, 60 hills, 47 light fixtures, 96 of catalogs, 234 path elements, 81 photo boards, 156 plants, 112 plateaus, 49 retaining walls, 76 Section Properties, 219 slopes, 51 viewing an element’s, 222 viewing, 233 Property lines, 42, 43 Rename Group line styles library, 245 materials library, 237 Renaming groups in View Manager, 204 groups, 222 View Windows, 206 Render 3DTrueView, 176 Render to File, 179, 180 Rendered 2D plan view, 20 Rendered Outline view, 23 Rendered properties, 238 Rendered view, 23 Rendering about, 174 adjusting image brightness, 177 changing refresh rate during lighting calculations, 177 changing refresh rate, 177 creating a 3DTrueView rendering, 176 creating fog effect, 178 creating smoke effect, 178 enabling ambient lighting, 178 saving multiple image files, 180 setting quality, 176 setting the viewpoint, 174 setting up scene, 174 specifying image size, 180 turning daylight off, 177 using antialiasing, 178 Repair Project, 184 Report filter, 170 Report format, estimate, 170 Report, material, 170 Requirements, system, 2 Reset Camera, 215 Reshaping deck openings, 68 decks, 65 filled areas, 104 paths, 80 plateaus, 49 slabs, 73 Resizing catalog panel, 195 deck openings, 68 fills, 104 slabs, 73 Resolution, setting, 4 Q Quality, rendering, 176 Quantity page, 229 Quantity Reports generating, 170 R Radius, 141 Rail edging, 108 Railings changing a deck’s railings, 67 on deck stairs, 71 on decks, 67 Rails (edging), 108 Raised garden boxes, 84 Raising decks, 65 elements, 145 outdoor accessories, 92 photo boards, 156 plants, 112 retaining walls, 76 Raked fence, 58 Recently used file list, 184 Redo, 144 Reference point icon, 138 Reference point, commander, 139 Refreshing the view during rendering, 177 Registering the program, 4 User’s Guide 289 Index Restoring previous view window arrangement, 206 Retaining Walls applying different finishes to, 77 breaking, 77 curving, 76 definition, 266 deleting, 77 drawing, 76 editing properties, 76 lengthening, 76 lengthening/shortening, 76 rotating, 76 shortening, 76 Right Justify Text, 161 Right-click menus accessing, 15, 144 Riser Height, 71 Rotating decks, 64 edging, 109 elements, 145, 146, 228 exterior accessories, 92 exterior furniture, 88 exterior structures, 84 filled areas, 105 irrigation, 100 materials on elements, 149, 229 paths, 80 photo boards, 155 retaining walls, 76 slabs, 73 sprinklers, 100 text, 160 using the Commander, 140 Save, 185 Saved Project, 184 Saving 3DTrueView renderings, 179 automatically, 185 catalogs, 232 cities, 175 custom materials to library file, 239 dimension styles to library file, 255 multiple rendered images in same project, 180 photo boards to the catalog, 155 project estimate, 170 projects as templates, 185 projects, 185 text styles to the library file, 251 Scale drawing, 204 editing, 207 Fit to Page, 188 light source intensity, 259 of dimensions, 188, 207 of materials, 238 of text, 188, 207 of views, 188, 207 printing to, 188 printouts, 207 Scene setup for rendering, 174 Screen area size, setting, 4 Screen layout, 9 Screen settings, 193 Screen tips, disabling, 15 Screened rooms, 84 Season Change, 114 Season Color Diagram, 117 Secondary Post Position, 58 Section Marks On/Off, 219 Section Properties, 219 Section Views creating, 218 deleting, 220 editing properties, 219 editing, 219 turning section marks on/off, 219 viewing, 218 Select 28, 29 Select All, 15, 30 Select button (3D Studio file), 225 Select button (Encyclopedia), 125 S Samples, 184 Sandboxes, 84 Satisfaction Guaranteed, 7 Save All, 185 Save As, 185 Save Catalog As, 232 Save Catalog, 232 Save city template, 175 Save directory, default, 185 Save Element to Catalog, 224 Save location, 3DTrueView image, 179 Save location, project estimate, 171 290 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Index Select elements on current location only while in plan view, 201 Select None, 30 Select Previous, 15 Select/Edit, 14, 144 Selectability of building elements, 30, 31 of building locations, 31 of dimensions, 32 of electrical wiring, 32 of elements in 2D plan view, 201 of project trace images, 32 of text, 31 specifying, 29 Selecting disabling pre-selection, 15 elements, 15 Selection Filter about, 29 filtering building elements, 30, 31 filtering building locations, 31 filtering dimensions, 32 filtering electrical wiring, 32 filtering landscape elements, 30 filtering project trace images, 32 filtering text, 31 Selection mode, 14, 144 Set Current Time, 175 Set Decking Direction, 65 Settings, saving in a template, 185 Sheds, 84 Shortcut menus, 15, 144 Shortening edging, 109 fences, 57 paths, 80 retaining walls, 76 Show contours, 46 Show Coordinate Icon, 138 Show Grid (estimate), 170 Show Grid, 135 Show trunk in plan, 113 Shrubs, 112 Sidewalks, 80 Simplify, 225 Simplifying 225 Site Boundary, 42, 43 Size editing an element’s, 148 printouts, 207 property page, 228 rendered image, 180 Skirting, deck, 68 Slabs applying different materials to, 74 creating, 72 deleting, 74 editing thickness, 73 moving, 73 reshaping, 73 resizing, 73 rotating, 73 Slide tool, 214 Slopes creating, 49 deleting, 51 editing angle, 51 editing height, 51 moving, 51 stretching, 50 Smoke, 178 Snap Angle, 131 Snap Edge, 230 Snapping at defined angles, 131 orthogonal, 131 to drawing grid, 130 to objects, 130 Soil beds, 104 Soil requirements (plant), 116 Spacing deck boards, 66, 67 posts along beam, 66 Specify Framing, 220 Specular, 179, 238 Spinning in 3D view, 214 Spray properties, sprinkler, 100 Sprinklers deleting, 100 editing height, 100 editing spray properties, 100 inserting, 100 moving, 100 rotating, 100 Square footage, measuring, 135 Stairs adding to deck, 69 Standard Report Form, 170 Start a New Project, 4 Starting the program, 4 User’s Guide 291 Index Startup dialog about, 4 disabling, 4 Stationary photo board, 154 Status Bar about, 12 displaying, 196 hiding, 196 Stepped fence, 58 Stone, 77 Storage sheds, 84 Stretching berms, 48 decks, 65 dimensions, 165 edging, 109 fences, 57 fills, 104 paths, 80 plateaus, 49 retaining walls, 76 section marks, 219 slopes, 50 text leader, 162 trenches, 48 Structures, exterior, 38, 84 Sundials, 92 Supplier, 229 Support, technical, 6 Surface Properties, materials, 179 Survey, site, 42, 43 Swings, 38, 84 System Requirements, 2 orbiting around the camera, 214 Target Height, changing, 211 Technical Support, 6 Temperature preferences (plant), 116 Template path to Templates directory, 186 saving a project as, 185 setting default, 186 starting drawings without, 186 Templates, house, 38 Temporary Directory, 187 Tennis courts, 38, 84 Terrain applying a texture and color, 46 base level, 46 hugging, 73, 80 settings, 46 toolbar, 10 Terrain Base Level, 46 Terrain tab, 10 Text adding to drawing, 160 changing justification, 161 changing the style of inserted text, 161 deleting, 161 displaying/hiding, 28 editing content, 160 editing leader text, 163 filtering for selection, 31 importing text files, 160 moving, 160 rotating, 160 scale, 188, 207 with leader, 161 Text Color, 161, 251 Text Height, 161, 251 Text Styles changing the style of existing text, 161 customizing text styles library, 250 editing in elevation marks, 217 editing in section marks, 219 elevation marks, 217 important considerations when editing, 250 importing text styles from library into catalog, 252 saving to library file, 251 Text with Leader adding, 161 changing leader arrow, 162 deleting, 163 T Tables, patio, 88 Tables, picnic, 88 Tabs changing color of, 194 disabling tabbed toolbars, 194 displaying toolbars in 194 hiding, 194 showing, 194 toolbar, 10 view tabs, 205 Target changing the height of, 211 moving an elevation’s, 217 moving, 211 292 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6 Index editing text, 163 moving the text, 163 moving/stretching, 162 Textures applied to elements, 228 applying different textures to elements, 148 applying to the terrain, 46 appropriate sizing for, 239 cropped, 239 cut-off, 239 specifying location of directory, 240 using different, 238 using from outside sources, 239 viewing an element’s, 228 Textures Directory, 240 TGA exporting to, 190 using your own in materials, 239 Thickness patio slab, 73 Tile Height, 238 Tile Horizontally, 238 Tile Open Views, 205 Tile Vertically, 238 Tile Width, 238 Time of day, 175 Time Zone, 175 Title bar, 10 Toolbars Basic View Control, 10 changing color of toolbar areas, 194 changing the background color of, 194 displaying in non-tabbed format, 194 displaying in tabs 194 hiding, 194 Landscape, 10 moving, 195 showing, 194 tabbed, 10 terrain, 10 Zoom and Navigate, 11 Tooltips on elements, 15 Topography, recreating, 45 Trampolines, 84 Transfer dimension styles, 255 line styles, 246 materials, 239, 240 text styles, 251 Transparency, 179, 238 Transparency, in photo boards, 156 Trees, 112 Trellises, 92 Trenches creating, 47 deleting, 48 moving, 48 stretching, 48 Troubleshooting Guide, 6 Trunk Diameter, 113 Tutorials, 5 U Umbrella, patio, 92 Undo, 144 Uninstalling previous version, 3 Units of Measure, 134, 232 Usage (plant), 116 Use Solid Color, 238 Use Texture, 238 V Valleys deleting, 47 inserting, 46 moving, 47 Vegetable garden boxes, 84 View Filter about, 25 filtering building elements from view, 27 filtering dimensions from view, 28 filtering landscape elements, 26 filtering locations from view, 28 filtering text from view, 28 View Manager accessing, 204 adding groups to, 204 adding new views to, 204 deleting groups in, 204 deleting views in, 207 renaming groups, 204 View Mode Parallel, 212 Perspective, 211 View Project Estimate, 171 View Sample Plans, 184 View Tabs turning on/off, 205 View Windows User’s Guide 293 Index cascading, 205 creating new, 204 creating, 204 deleting, 207 managing, 204 maximizing, 206 renaming, 206 restoring the previous arrangement, 206 switching between, 205 Viewing 2D Designer’s View, 20 2D Plan View, 20 cameras, 210 elevations, 216 in 3D, 21 managing views, 204 section views, 218 switching between view windows, 205 Viewing Angle increasing/decreasing, 213 selecting a preset camera angle, 212 Viewing Field, 213 Viewpoint in 3DTrueView renderings, 174 Viewpoint, 3D view, 210 Views exporting, 190 opening, 204 Volleyball courts, 38, 84 VRML export, 190 X X, Y, Z coordinates, 140 Z Z 140 Zone (plant), 116 Zoom and Navigate toolbar, 11 Zoom Realtime, 22 Zoom to Fit, 22 Zoom Window, 22 Zooming 22 Zooming in and out, 22 W Walk Around tool, 214 Wall Height, 76, 200 Walls editing elevation, 76 editing height, 76 editing width, 76 retaining, 76 Water requirements (plant), 116 Weather vanes, 92 Width, wall, 76 Windchimes, 92 Windmills, 92 Wireframe view, 23 Wiring displaying/hiding, 28 making selectable/non-selectable, 32 World Map page, 120, 124 WRL export, 190 294 3D Home Architect® Landscape Design Deluxe 6